Home

Palette OS Manual

1. Palette OS v10 User Manual g MA i jj he RO cee l Piaf pale Tr m gt p l j i j f E Ci e b wua a a a a Wai a J _ e x DE ee Light Palette Strand Lighting A Genlyte Company win strandlighting com 2007 Genlyte Group LLC Light Palette Palette OS v10 Table of Contents Concepts and Overview Feature Overview About Palette system Capacities Universal Attribute Control Model Definition Conclusion Tracking A Note on Redundant Data Timing Multiple Cue List Concept Fade Resolution HTP vs LTP Priorities Tips and Tricks Screen Layout Toolbars Channel Grid Channel s different states Attribute Grid File Menu Display Menu Help Menu Softkeys Status Window Look Pages Macro Buttons View Properties Remote Video Screen Layout Console Buttons Display Keys Live Button Blind Button Patch Button Playback Keys DBO Button Go Button Goto Cue Button Select Button Halt Back Button Step Cue Buttons Release Playback Button Recording Keys Record Button Update Button Cue Button Strand Lighting pl Palette OS v10 Group Button Look Button Action Keys Arrow Buttons Delete Button Edit Button Load Button Move Copy Button Tools Button View Button Main Keys Additional 10 Key buttons Next Button Number Buttons Release Button Rem Dim Button Shift Button Soft Keys Up Button Programming and Viewing Fixtures Fixture Colors and Symbols
2. 20 RPM and 8 Hz This means that even if you programmed your show with one type of fixture you can play it back with another More commonly you will have a rig made up of multiple fixtures and you will want to talk to them using the same language This is where Copy Move really works to your advantage If you have one light doing exactly what you want and you want another to do just that same thing you can Copy all of the attributes from the first channel to the second If you ve dialed something up really nice on one channel then figured out that it may look better on another you can just Move the attributes across The attributes you move from the first channel will be released When you want to copy or move attributes of a moving light launch the command as described above to open the dialog box to the Channel tab Strand Lighting p295 Palette OS v10 Emm If you launched the command and pressed CUE or LOOK press S10 to display the Channel tab By default it will open to the Channel tab Fill in the Source Channels and Destination Channels fields If desired you can select a group using the channels from a pre recorded Cue or Look or Recall the Stored selection Before closing the dialog box you can filter out different information from the source channels to not use in the destination channels To do this press the Attributes button By default all check boxes will be checked You can customize this to what
3. Again you can Preview the levels live on stage by pressing S5 and scroll through the cues You have the choice of leaving raw data captured by unchecking S4 Apply As Palette or leave it check to have one cue reference another See Also Command Line Syntax Sub Master Pages Button Array Described Strand Lighting p261 Palette OS v10 Patching Patch Palette uses Channel numbers as the base user addressable unit Conventional desk often refer to these as Channels and moving light desks may call them Spots Because of Palette s very powerful Universal Attribute Control Model regardless of whether it is a Moving Light or Convnetional Lights we call them all channels That way what was once a par can can be converted into a VL1000 just by changing the Channel Type To enter the patch press PATCH or S1 when there are no channels selected The default method of patching is Channel to Output You can reverse this to patching Outputs to Channels by pressing S11 Note The softkeys are sensitive to your current channel selection i e if you have moving lights selected S1 will not be Patch To enter the patch regardless of what the softkeys are displaying use the mouse to select the Setup icon EEIN above the Cue List Directory The default selection is Patch by Channel Patching Methods There are two ways to use the patch either using the Graphical tools or alternatively by usin
4. GROUP 1 ENTER Selects the channels recorded in Look 1 GROUP 1 FULL Sets all intensity attributes of the channels in Look 1 to 100 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 ENTER Selects the channels in Look 1 and Look 2 GROUP 1 5 ENTER Selects the channels in Look 1 and sets their intensities to 50 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 ENTER Selects the all channels in Look 1 less any of those in Look 1 that also belong to Look 2 The order in which you select channels in the command line while recording groups is retained and used for the or TO syntax shown below and for Fanning Strand Lighting p130 Palette OS v10 For traditional Group Level syntax see Using Looks below Mixing Groups and Channels You can build selection sets from a combination of both groups and channels Note As there is no Channel or Fixture button make sure you press GROUP each time you want to specify a Group GROUP 1 20 ENTER Selects all channels in Look 1 and channel 20 GROUP 1 5 ENTER Selects all channels in Look 1 and de selects channel 5 1 GROUP 8 ENTER Selects channel 1 and all channels in Look 8 1 THRU 5 GROUP 8 5 Selects channels 1 through 5 and all channels in ENTER Look 8 and puts them all to 50 Using Looks Looks are complete recorded channel selections and their attributes You can use recorded Looks to bring back a group of channels to a desired level o
5. If your Slider Panel hardware is setup to control Looks rather than channels press REC then a bump button to quickly record a look to a master Groups in Palette are stored as Looks even if you don t use the levels Go to Show Options to assign what Sub Master Page will be used when this button is pressed See Also Command Line Syntax O p108 Palette OS v10 Action Keys Arrow Buttons PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX Dance ae ee E A z i Ei Break SR Enter Strand Lighting 5 a See The arrow keys move the Blue Box in the cue list Time Events and Patch displays To change a value press the EDIT button Holding down the SHIFT key and pressing the up or down arrows selects a range Once a range is selected typing in a new value will change all cells to that value If you are editing a numeric column like time after pressing EDIT you can use the WHEEL to change the values If multiple cells are selected the values will change relative to each other In the example below if you used the WHEEL to change the 3 toa 4 the 2 would change to a 3 and the 1 would change to a 2 Holding down SHIFT while rolling the WHEEL on any numeric field will change the value by 0 1 While in BLIND moving the Blue Box with the Arrow keys automatically LOADS cues You can tell which cue list loaded by looking to the Status Bubbles os p109 Palette OS v10
6. LOOK syntax Light Blue 0 35 Attributes with text and a double green arrow show that the attribute has changed since the last cue The text could be hard values or the name of a palette Strand Lighting p125 Palette OS v10 _ Light Blue 0 35 _ Attributes with text surrounded with tildes and a double green arrow show that the attribute is moving towards a new value i e the cue is running The text could be hard values or the name of a palette Light Blue 4 Attributes followed by a circle with a slash through it show that the specified palette reference is empty The attribute will not move when the cue is initiated so the output value will track although the palette name will appear in the attribute grid Light Blues Attributes followed by a double black arrow show that the specified palette reference includes a nested circular reference that cannot be resolved or q Dust Breakup Magenta levels with the circular symbol or hole represent Channel levels that did not change Tracked from the last cue That means that there is no information in the current cue for that attribute 26 80 or gt we Magenta levels with the white block symbol represent Channel levels that did not change from the last cue but had redundant cue information i e a hard level in the current cue the same as the tracking level Magenta levels with the green magenta symbol represent intensity levels that di
7. Palette OS v10 Hardware Setup Button Array F1 Bank A F2 Bank BS FA Bank n S FS Look Page ok Sub Page 1 Select then amp poly Sub Page 2 Sub Page 3 Group i LIOR pa chor First Hulton Nimhe _ If you have the optional Button Array when the top left green Fixture LED is not on the function of the four banks of twenty five buttons are determined by this dialog box If you don t have the physical hardware you will access the array using the Tools button and pressing virtual buttons on your screen using a mouse or touch screen Each bank of twenty five buttons A through Y can have a series of Look Pages assigned to them in a stack that are accessible using the up and down arrows above each bank Button Action As you select different Look Pages to add and their First Button Number offset you can decide what the action of the button is Apply Palette The selected channels will have the Look applied to them as a Palette and the affected attributes will be marked with deltas ready to record If the selected channels were not recorded in the Look nothing happens when this button is pressed Select Fixtures The channels recorded in the Look will become selected No attributes will become captured Apply Level The selected channels will have their attribute and intensity levels set to the values recorded in the Look and the affected attributes will be marked with deltas ready to record
8. Strand Lighting p320 Palette OS v10 Select 1 Apply 2 Upon the first press the channels recorded in the Look will become selected No attributes will become captured If you double press the buttons the channels will become selected and their attributes will have the Look applied to them as a Palette Typically recording groups at levels and setting a Button Bank up as a Group Select nicely takes advantage of this Button Action That way pressing the button once just selects the channels but if you double press it you have them selected and set to their pre recorded level See Also Tools used to display virtual 5x5 s Recording Looks Recording and Using Groups Button Array Described Apply Levels Palettes Hardware Setup Strand Lighting p321 Palette OS v10 Button Array Described The button array can be a physical piece of hardware like the one depicted below or a virtual pop up version that is accessed using the Tools button BH Gee ABA BAB The optional Button Array Wing has two major functions Ch ann el S e ect only available with the physical hardware Sr ee a SO QE a When the top left button s green LED is on the Button Wing Panel is in Channel Select mode The eleven remaining buttons bank the remaining 100 buttons by hundreds For example if the second top button from the left is illuminated yellow the buttons select channels 1 through 100 The next yellow button along
9. m racksheet B1 Cuelet veg O OOOO O y Fisture 4 out 45 FE 46 lade 47 FE 48 fade S0 verse S1 set 524Bing 53 bong 54 oul 55 bing 1 VLI000 TIO 50 4 20 T100 4 0 t 100 9 100 0 E 2 VLI000 TIO E 3 VLIO00 TSO amp 4 VLI000 TSG t 100 100 50 5 VLi000 TSO E 6 VLIO00 TSO Tt 100 A 1100 50 Fan 3 3 37 S18 i aas A i Titt 78 37 1a a ______ 75 50 Color A ff 0 CS i Red Reed 50 Color B 9 0 e amai Rd _ 0 Red 60 Color C 100 Y 6 5 _ Red _ 9 Fe 550 Gobo Dist Breakup Rol CH 0 2 RPM 6 5 Edge 100 6 5 __ 100 _ __ 100 50 Zoom 8 5E E5 8 FO 50 Shutter A 6 5 1 n 0 Os 6 02 0 0 Shutter B O 6 5 9 a0 0 _ _ 40 0 0 Shutter HA 7 13 i E a EL Shutter D 6 5 9 0 i 0 0 50 Shutter lt gt lt 0 6 5 _ K 90 ee i ogy Frost i 6 5 701 i 1 0 M Pos Time If you see the green magenta track symbol in a moving light s intensity row this is a clue that you might want to expand to see what attributes are changing All other symbols in the grid
10. 3 Type in a new value to completely replace the text highlighted in blue Notes e After you press EDIT and the whole text gets highlighted an want to change one word press the left Arrow Key to unhighlight the cell Boy Enters USL ong allow you to move freely around Delete characters with BACKSPACE but you only e If you want to make the text BOLD prepend the label with the exclamation point e If you want the text to appear ITALICIZED prepend the label with the forward slash e All Button cues or cues with zero time will appear BOLD automatically in the Next column of the Cue List Directory just to let you know something dramatic is going to happen when you hit GO 4 When you are finished press ENTER to close the edit box Tips To quickly label a bunch of cues move the Blue Box to the first cell press EDIT type in a new Strand Lighting p206 Palette OS v10 label but rather than pressing ENTER press the Down Arrow Key to move you to the next cell The cell will automatically be open for editing Changing a Cue s Time The Cue List has multiple columns for time including Cue Time which all attributes will use unless specified Down Time Position Time Color Time Gobo Time Lens Time Special Time and SMPTE Time The SMPTE Time does not relate to the fade but rather to when the cue should be executed Label Cue Time Down Time Action Pos Time Preset A Band F Enter 3 1
11. ENTER Part cues Complex shows need more advanced timing options If you split a cue into different Parts you can have different timing for different groups of Channels without writing additional cues When working on a show you build a cue which is a singular look on stage and later you decide how you are going to get from one cue to another Goto the cue in which you want to alter the timing parameters Select the Channels that need to be assigned to a different part ee SY aS Press the S11 Cue Parts button to open the cue part dialog box Select the button for the desired part The Channels will show a superscript letter showing the part Continue with Steps 2 through 5 until you have assigned all Channels to their correct part Press UPDT ENTER 6 6 7 7 8 Strand Lighting p44 Palette OS v10 8 Use the Blue Box to alter timing on the main part or any additional parts a 3 Dinner 2 3 Fae Note o The main cue part is always Part A in this case labeled Dinner o Cues need not be made up of parts in specific order You can have a cue that has just Part A and Part G o Palette supports 26 parts Press S12 and roll the wheel to select parts greater than Part K then press ENTER to close the dialog box Independent Timing The limitations of the above two methods are that all the Channels in each cue part must use the same attribute family timing and further still individ
12. For regular live performance situations leave this option unchecked That way if you encounter a power failure or crash you can gracefully recover and the audience will be none the wiser See Enable Outputs Recovery for more details Level Entry Mode When working on the Command Line you can choose to terminate channel selection and level set commands with or without using the ENTER key The options are to use Enter Single Digit or Two Digit entry With single digit entry the syntax 1 THRU 10 5 will take 1 through 10 to 50 With Two Digit entry you would type 1 THRU 10 5 0 If you wanted 5 in single digit entry type 1 THRU 10 0 5 ENTER Note Typing 1 THRU 10 127 ENTER will set channels 1 through 10 to 50 in any mode USB DMX Flavor Use this options to change the refresh rate or flavor of the DMX coming out the back of the console You may need to alter the default to satisfy some third party legacy devices Ethernet DMX settings must be configured with third party Ethernet to DMX management software See Also General Hardware Setup Release Keyboard Shortcuts Strand Lighting p329 Palette OS v10 Browser Control Enable Outputs Recovery Strand Lighting p330 Palette OS v10 MIDI SMPTE Interface MIDI and SMPTE can be connected through the optional MIDI SMPTE adapter to support Midi Show Control Midi Notes and SMPTE in and out for synchro
13. Note o While the edit box is open you can press S12 to open the Cue List Properties dialog box o See the topic called Profiles for images of what each profile looks like Clearing Independent Timing If some of the channels recorded in the cue are using Independent Timing the Cue Time field will have a clock icon in it Cue Label Cue Time Down Time a i Housetohalf A3 2 6 If you move the Blue Box to this field and press EDIT the Cue Profiles softkeys see above are displayed If you want to remove all Independent Timing in the cue press S11 If you do a confirmation dialog box will be displayed Are you sure you want to clear all ndependent times for the elected cues If you are sure you want to have all channels follow the times as set out in the Cue List columns press ENTER If you want to cancel the operation press UNDO Note The S11 Clear Ind Time softkey is only visible when you are editing the Cue Time field in the cue list Asserting or Going to a Cue Strand Lighting p210 Palette OS v10 If you move the blue box to the first column of the cue list positioning it over the Cue List Pointer and press EDIT you will assert the desired cue O Strand Lighting p211 Palette OS v10 Profiles As Palette executes cues you have an awful lot of control over how you get from Point A to Point B whether that be intensity levels or position on stage or from one colo
14. The Cue Number box is active by default so you can just enter a number and press ENTER Also see note below about recording ranges of cues The following properties are optional S1 If needed select the Cue List to record to The default is the cue list you currently have selected S3 Change the Record option if needed The default option is to record your Changed 26 A Attributes or those marked by the delta symbol Read what the other Record Options are and when to use them here Read about other channel states here S4 Enter a Cue Label This label will appear in the Cue List next to the cue optional S5 Change the Default Cue Time This box will automatically be stuffed with the value from the Default Cue List Options S6 If you don t enter a Down Time the Down Time will be the Cue time If you do enter a Down Time the Cue Time is equivalent to the Up Time If you need the cue to wait a specified amount of time before it starts to fade either Up or Down use the Wait Fade syntax in the time field S7 If you are recording to an existing cue and want to Update in the changes select Update Updating means that the new data will be overlaid on the existing cue not destroying data that is currently there If you are recording to an existing cue and don t select Update you will see the dialog box shown below after you press ENTER S8 Check Exclude Sub Masters if you don t want to suck
15. The channels will either return to their default levels or to the levels set by any other Cue List or Sub Master that has control of them They will fade out using the Cue List s release time Console Equivalent REL PB QWERTY Equivalent Use with SHIFT to release all cue lists The Goto Cue button activates the highlighted cue on the Cue List in the default time Console Equivalent SHIFT GOTO CUE QWERTY Equivalent SHIFT Q ENTER Un Check S6 Goto and Do Not Execute Follows The Goto and Run button fades to the highlighted cue in the recorded time Console Equivalent SHIFT GOTO CUE QWERTY Equivalent SHIFT Q Check S6 Goto and Execute Follows Cue Properties are accessed via the Cue Properties dialog box VIEW CUE ENTER QWERTY Equivalent V F10 ENTER Channel Grid Toolbar Er When in Live mode the levels you see in the Channel Grid show what is being output to the stage Any levels with a blue background are not controlled by the Selected Cue List Get in and out of Live mode by pressing SHIFT BLIND or on the QWERTY keyboard with B When in Blind mode the Channel Grid has a grey background See the status window to see what is currently loaded in Blind Get in and out of Blind mode by pressing SHIFT BLIND or on the QWERTY keyboard with B See Blind While in Blind if you use the arrow keys to move the Blue Box the highlighted cue will automatically be
16. 2 Change Windows __LAN or High Speed Internet Firewall settings wt Disable this network 7 1394 Connection device a e Connected Fireyyalled Dy Repair this connection Lh 1334 Net Adapter ia Rename this connection 7 Local Area Connection View status oF this Connected Firewalled connection e Si5 900 PCI Fast Ethernet Ada Change settings of this 3 connection Ty Local 4rea Connection 2 Network cable unplugged Fite iew or change settings For this connection such as adapter protocol or modem configuration settings Other Places e Acad ee Control Panel Click the Local Area Connection not Local Area Connection 2 icon to expand the Network Tasks menu Click on Change settings of this connection to open the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box Strand Lighting p400 Palette OS v10 Local Area Connection Properties a EEE oo General Authentication Advanced Connect using BH SiS 900 PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter Configure This connection uses the following tems M Microsoft TCPAP version 6 HAM Link NetBIOS a AW Link IPFeSPe NetBlOS Compatible Transport Prot pam Ibtemet Protocol TCP IP 1 Lal lt m cy lastall Liagtall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocollnternet Protocol The defautt Wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnect
17. 600 idle 700 showd 800 lights 900 idle Fix Chk Strand Lighting p332 Palette OS v10 For more information visit www etdimming com O Strand Lighting p333 Palette OS v10 Macros amp Show Control Macro Editor amp Commands Macros can contain Commands or Scripts Macros are not keystroke recorders Macros Commands are very powerful user definable routines that Palette runs when assigned to cues time events macro buttons Variables or triggers If you need more advanced show control automation and logical branching check out Macro Editor and Scripts When a Command is assigned to the Cue Action of a cue you will see the macro icon in the Action column Cue Label Cue Time Down Time Action Warmers e AN o h You can add a Command to a cue by moving the Blue Box to the Action column and pressing Edit or Insert A Cue Action dialog box will open BAF Time A oF F 1 rm Lr f m a a a LA m Jt A i ere Heat Cue Sa Mum Loops CueListGo Main Cue List 7 Laim e mmfeeste fie ll I L te IIG i i rE ln Black Time 3 OB delay fade Click on Macro or press S5 to add a Macro Command The Macro Editor will appear Strand Lighting p334 Palette OS v10 Command Comment PowePomtGotoS ide FixtureCheckF onward FivtureCheckB ack The main S11 tab on the left should be set to Command showing the commands available in the list
18. Command Line Syntax Fixture Title Captured Attributes Selecting and Setting Channels Using the Mouse to Select Channels and Set Levels Controlling Moving Lights Controlling Colour Independent Timing Effects Release select Softkeys Recording and Editing Cues Recording Cues Record Options Updating Cues Load Blind Edits Track Forward Track Sheets Move In Black Cue Lists Cue List Directory Cue List Cue List Properties Cue List Pointer Autoscroll Cue List Blue Box Profiles Releasing amp Asserting Cue Lists Strand Lighting p2 Palette OS v10 Step Forward and Back Cue Numbering Scheme Renumber Cues Blocking and Unblocking of cues Cue Properties Deleting Cues Goto Cue Follow Cues Linking Cues Playback Loops Action on GO within Cue Loop Part Cues SMPTE Timecode on Cue Lists Recording and Using Looks and Groups Looks Sub Master Types Recording Looks Busking Recording and Using Groups Apply Levels Palettes Patching Patch scrollers Individual Attributes Tools Tools SMPTE Learn Mode Flip Fanning Highlight Lowlight Rem Dim Colour Picker Channel Check Flash Fixture or Output General Information General Show Options Default Cue List Options Venue Setup Location Show Save Options Move Copy ShowNet Pathport One to One Patch Power Patch Printing Hardware Setup Hardware Setup Dialog Box Priorities A B C D Grand Master and Black Out Button
19. Delete Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX DELETE e Use this button to delete cues Highlight the desired cue or cues with the Blue Box using the ARROW KEYS then press this button e You can also type in a range in the Delete Cue dialog box i e 1 10 e To delete a Look press VIEW BUMP then select S10 Delete O Strand Lighting p110 Palette OS v10 Edit Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX EDIT i Dance Pressing this button allows you to change the highlighted cells in the cue list times labels follows etc Time Events or Patch displays Move the blue highlighted cells using the Arrow Keys If a range is selected typing in a new value will change all cells to that value If you are editing a numeric column like time after pressing EDIT you can use the WHEEL to change the values If multiple cells are selected the values will change relative to each other In the example below if you used the WHEEL to change the 3 to a 4 the 2 would change to a 3 and the 1 would change to a 2 If you highlight cells in the Action column in the Cue List or Settings column in the Patch a dialog box will open allowing you to change one or more properties at once Holding down SHIFT while rolling the WHEEL while editing cells will change numeric values by 0 1 m ry a San Strand Lighting plll Palette OS v10 Load Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX LOAD Stran
20. Pressing the corresponding softkey puts the attribute on the command line where you can type in a new value or press and hold the key to roll in the value Pressing S10 will bank you through pages of effect attributes Some of the attributes will not be exposed until you select specific modes typically determined by encoders to the left of the attribute Pressing S10 will bank you through the pages of effect attributes as there may be more than 4 perimeters to your effect Some of these attributes will not be exposed until you select specific Strand Lighting p157 Palette OS v10 modes typically determined by encoders to the left of the attributes To add an effect to any attribute press SHIFT and Double Press the attribute s softkey A Similar popup list will be presented with appropriate effects available To edit a running effect double press S10 to get a list of running effects and highlight the desired one in the popup list You can also highlight the desired effect with the mouse in the Effects Grid The effect attributes will appear on S1 through S4 and by pressing S10 again you will be shown more attributes of the effect The banks are labeled to the left of the first bubble Effects always start off with the MAIN bank of tweekers These four attributes of the effect will appear on other banks as well If you keep pressing the Effect softkey you will eventually wrap around to see the MAIN attributes again Pressing down
21. Strand Lighting p207 Palette OS v10 Note The Blue Box will follow the Green Light cue running indicator if the Autoscroll Cue List pin is out Independent Timing If you want to adjust the time of particular attributes independent of the time specified in the cue press SHIFT EDIT to change the Channel and Attribute grid to the AER display Press SHIFT EDIT again to return to the display Changing Multiple Cells to the Same Label or Time 1 1 Move the Blue Box to the first cell you want to change using the arrow keys 2 2 Hold down SHIFT 3 3 Continue to press the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW to increase the size of the Blue Box to highlight all wanted cells 4 4 Let go of SHIFT 5 5 Press EDIT on the console or INSERT on the QWERTY keyboard and follow Steps 3 4 above changing Multiple Cells Values Relative to Each Other 1 Move the Blue Box to the first cell you want to change using the arrow keys Hold down SHIFT eo PY gt Continue to press the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW to increase the size of the Blue Box to highlight all wanted cells Dance oh Enter 4 Let go of SHIFT Strand Lighting p208 Palette OS v10 Press EDIT on the console or INSERT on the QWERTY keyboard moO An edit box will open on the last cell you selected Roll the WHEEL to change its value up or down Press ENTER to close the edit box Note how all values ch
22. Strand Lighting p3 Palette OS v10 Button Array Button Array Described Triggers Trigger Wiring Console MIDI SMPTE Interface Remote Focus Unit Macros amp Show Control Macro Editor amp Commands Macro Editor amp Scripts User Interface Macros Variables Button Stations amp MIDI Notes Vision Net Time Events Browser Control Media Player Control PowerPoint Automation Serial Out Macros Telnet and Serial Communications MIDI Show Control Palette Control Panel Palette Control Panel Upgrading Palette Software Console Group Launch Palette Button Hardware Test Release Notes System Group Date Time amp Input Language Screen Resolution ELO Touch Screens On Screen Keyboard Mouse Keyboard Accessibility Network MonitorPower Network Printers Shutdown Applications Group Explorer MediaPlayer Internet Explorer Outlook Express Notepad Paint Additional Applications system Up Time Backup Support and Contact Information Tracking Backup Strand Lighting p4 Palette OS v10 Recovery amp Enable Outputs Recalibrating Striking and Dousing Fixtures Software Revision History Console Connections Palette Light Palette Rack Palette Appendix License Offices and Service Centres Keyboard Shortcuts Strand Lighting p5 422 424 425 426 426 432 435 435 437 438 Palette OS v10 Concepts and Overview Welcome Page SS lal Date Februray 2008 Strana Lighting z Genlyt e company
23. The Slow Start curve can be used on dimmers or mechanical attributes of moving lights such as Position Apply it when you want to subtly start a change slow End w Of Recorded Value LT T Oi C m RI m 40 Bi ol 100 Y Through Fade Often used when repositioning a moving light the Slow End very subtly slows and stops the channel at the end of the fade Strand Lighting p215 Palette OS v10 Fast Start 100 _______ T 8 E 3 a i uE S i E a S gt E oZ 4 F 0 20 At BU ol 100 w Through Fade Similar to the EIS curve the Fast Start is useful when you want to make a real statement at the beginning of a fade Fast End CE co OI O Of Recorded Value LT SI co fr J AQ BD w Through Fade En mm 100 The Fast End curve can be used as a sort of exclamation mark at the end of a fade really asserting the final position Think of a light fading out at the end of a long and dramatic death scene Strand Lighting p216 Palette OS v10 Damped Profile 100 Se so 1 P ae Fo E So no E Eo E 5 E i 10 i es T 20 Al H0 mii 100 v Through Fade Best used for moving light repositioning the Damped profile gives a more organic movement more like that of a follow spot operator The problem with the Linear fade being used on Pan Tilt moves is that the channel is moving at the same rate all the way from point A
24. Un Shifted the button is the Cue button Holding down SHIFT while pressing this button opens the Goto Cue dialog box CUE 10 ENTER CUE 10 50 ENTER 1 THRU 5 CUE 10 ENTER Selects the channels recorded in Cue 10 and puts all of their attributes to their recorded level This may not necessarily be the total cumulative look of Cue 10 it is only the channels that are in Cue 10 with the attributes recorded in Cue 10 If you want the cumulative look of Cue 10 Load Cue 10 and check the STATE checkbox Selects all the channels recorded in Cue 10 and puts all of their attributes to their recorded level not their tracking level and scales their intensity attributes by 50 Selects channels 1 through 5 and puts ALL of their attributes to the level they were recorded at in Cue 10 The Apply Levels dialog box will open and you can choose to put in raw data or reference Cue 10 as a palette Doing so would mean that if you record these values in a new cue that cue s affect would change if Cue 10 were to change When you do this the levels will be marked with a blue triangle with a C in it If you precede the command line with either CUE LOOK or GROUP the Softkeys change to give you additional methods of manipulating and or recording items CUE 1 REC CUE 1 S9 6 REC CUE 1 S9 6 10 REC CUE 10 S9 6 ENTER CUE 10 S5 Records Cue 1 in the selec
25. When you have finished setting attributes and times record the new cue or update an existing cue Be sure to include the S11 Time filter in the Attributes masking Time on the Command Line As you directly enter attribute values on the Command Line you can specify times as well Not only will these times be placed in the Independent Time grid as described above but Palette will also use the time to fade the attribute from its current value to its new value For example you could type 1 THRU 10 50 5 ENTER and the command line would look like this Fixture 1 thru 10 At 50 In Time 5 If you want to Release a Channel and all of its attributes in time or sneak it back to cue level use the syntax 1 SHIFT REL 5 ENTER This appears on the command line like this Fixture 5 Release In Time 5 A more complex example of using time on the command line is 1 THRU 10 S2 90 90 0 5 1 which would look like this Fixture 1 thru 10 Fan 90 to 90 In Time Oto 5 1 This is crazy but looks very cool What it does it takes Channels 1 through 10 and fans them out to make a perfect half circle but it does it over 5 seconds starting by moving Channel 1 in one second and ends after six seconds with Channel 10 Using the A B or C D faders to specify time There is an option in the Hardware Setup A B C D that allows either of the split fader pairs to control the live fade time If yo
26. _ ee a A 510 Status String E vo X Cancel Once you are sure the desired action happens correctly copy the text from the right hand edit area and paste it as the URL in the link in your web authoring software Strand Lighting p357 Palette OS v10 Edit Hyperlink Link to Text to display Selector in DoGument gt Screentip She ie Or sel Browse for http 0 script mq HC CueListRelease C 020 902 File http 0 script mg HC CueListRelease A 4020 5 http 0 script mgq HC CueListoo C 20 200 Web Page http 0 script mg HC CueListo Main http www horizoncontrol com marquee Remove Link o Cancel You need to pre pend the URL with the text http 0 script mq then add the copied text verbatim For example GO on Cuelist A B would be http 0 script mq HC CueListGo A B A three second fade to Full on Look 1 on the Main look page http 0 script mq HC LookFade Main 1 100 3 Compose your custom web page or an entire site that has linked pages and graphics and buttons etc and save the published version including subfolders to the machine running Palette as described above Note The main page must be called index html In the Hardware Setup Console page check off S6 Enable Web Server Strand Lighting p358 Palette OS v10 Palette will then serve up this web page or site when the user types in
27. are the same symbols used in the channel grid A full description of what they mean can be found in the topic called Channel Colors and Symbols The Track Sheet is a display only view See Also Tracking Channel Colors and Symbols Strand Lighting p192 Palette OS v10 eMove In Black MIB Half of the trick of using multi parameter channels is not showing the audience how you use them Each time a light is needed to illuminate some piece of scenery or an actor they need to be setup i e positioned correctly colored right have the right gobo in it and finely tuned the edge so it s just the right sharpness This process is sometimes called marking the light or locating the light Palette does all of this work for you automagically and it s called Move in Black How does it happen The rules are o The channel must have 0 intensity in the cue before it is used o The channel must have an intensity greater than 0 recorded in the next cue the cue it will be seen again o There must be time for the MIB to occur AFTER the last cue completes and BEFORE you GO into the cue it is used o The MIB attributes discussed below belong to the cue that the light comes up in although the affect will be seen before the cue is run Here is a scenario 1 Channel A is on the cyc in blue in Cue 1 It tracks for the next 4 cues then fades out intensity only in Cue 5 It does nothing for Cues 6 through 9 so essentially if
28. buttons Their syntax is described below channelss If the command line is clear and you press 1 it will appear like this For the selection of channels Palette can use the common 500 series Single and Double Digit syntax or the Lightpalette command line or Enter syntax Intensity levels are expressed in percentages and assigned to selected fixtures with the key More on level setting below The command line is not executed until you press enter although Palette will select the channels as you type on the command line and before you press ENTER For example if you typed 1 THRU 10 when you press THRU channel 1 is Selected not Captured For information of what that means check out the topic called Channels different States If you were to type 1 2 3 each time you press the channels preceding it will be selected This is important to understand for when you are backspacing on the command line and channels become de selected For example if you typed 1 10 100 then started using the backspace key to correct yourself the first BKSP would delete the last but the next would de select Channel 100 not remove the last zero of the 100 making it 10 The next BKSP would delete the next and the next would de select Channel 10 etc Also see the topic Recording Cues to see how to use the command line to record cues i e Cue 1 REC The following are some examples of how
29. oe 15 316 05 7 56 11 AM 315 05 7 09 45 PM 2rd 05 6 56 13 PM ef 14 05 3 37 47 AM ef 15405 2 23 30 PM af 14 05 3 0717 AM 3715405 7 37 46 PM 3715 05 7 35 36 PM 304 05 6 18 19 PM ef 14405 8 53 48 4M ef 14 05 0 53 12 4M 2f2a405 9 13 04 AM 2 14 05 9 03 06 AM ef 14 05 3 02 41 AM 316405 3 02 22 AM ef 14 05 10 02 27 AM 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 rf Cancel Once you select the appropriate type Select OK to return to the Power Patch dialog box and select S5 to set the first Attribute Output You can them press S6 to Apply the changes and continue with other channels or OK to apply the patch and exit Power Patch Hint You can use the wheel to change the first output number See Also Patch One to One Patch Strand Lighting p308 Palette OS v10 Printing Palette prints to PDF Portable Document Format files that can be e mailed archived or printed on any printer Cue ListA B Show Name Joe s Coat Designer Big Al Show File Joe March 1 mqs Programmer Same old lump Last Saved Mar 02 2005 03 19 PM Master Elec Bobs Output File Joe March 1 pdf Venue Hotel California Cue Label Fade Time Action Cues 1 thru 5a 1 Preset Gs 15 Preset Cont d o a 2 BLKOUT G8 3 1 FAR AWAY 9 4 D5 Part 6 C2 Gel a Dream Doo 8 P 6 Gil a Kids AC 8 D210 a4 Pull Down 5 D 6 a0 Jacob Setup 6 3 a 4 6 eS 3 g 3 7 Od o amp 3 4 Crd amp 3 66 16
30. statements or agreements written or oral regarding CONTROL SOFTWARE No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding on HCI without HCI s consent HCI may modify this License at any time for any reason Headings The section headings used herein are for convenience of reference only and do not form a part of these terms and conditions and no construction or inference shall be derived therefrom If you have questions about the CONTROL SOFTWARE License please send email to Sales horizoncontrol com prior to using Strand Lighting p436 Palette OS v10 Offices and Service Centers Strand Lighting Strand Lighting Asia 20 F Delta House 3 On Yiu Street Shatin N T Hong Kong Tel 852 2757 3033 Fax 852 2757 1767 Strand Lighting Europe Limited Unit 2 Royce Road Fleming Way Crawley West Sussex United Kingdom RH10 9JY Tel 44 1293 554010 Fax 44 1293 554 019 Strand Lighting Inc 6603 Darin Way Cypress CA 90630 USA Tel 1 714 230 8200 Fax 1 714 230 8173 The material in this manual is for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice Strand Lighting assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions which may appear in this manual For comments and suggestions regarding corrections and or updates to this manual please contact your nearest Strand Lighting office El contenido de este manual es solamente para informacion y esta sujeto a cambios sin previo aviso Strand L
31. uncheck Use Cue Time and enter the desired time here Pressing S4 to uncheck the Use Cue Time box will move you to this box automatically You can also press S5 directly and it will uncheck S4 for you Goto Cue and Execute Follows By default this check box is checked meaning that once you Goto the desired cue any Follows on the recorded cue will be executed If you want to go to a cue and sit there uncheck this box If there are no follows on the cue this box has no affect Tip You can move the Blue Box to the first column of any cue and press EDIT and you will GOTO that cue This is equivalent to double clicking on the light in the first column See Also Releasing amp Asserting Cue Lists Follow Cues Strand Lighting p232 Palette OS v10 Follow Cues Follow enables you to program cues to run automatically A Follow time on a cue is the length of time the system pauses after the cue s activation before automatically starting the next cue A Follow uses the next cue on the Cue List unless the cue with the follow time is Linked to a different cue number Follow cues are shown indented on the cue list as a visual reminder that they don t need to be executed by the board operator SKB DD wal ETS ad Cue Label Cue Time Down Time Action q Preset 1 dq 2 Curtian 10 3 ai gt Band 2 1 6 dg 4 Enter iD d 65 Dance l Setting a Follow Time for a New or Existing Cue 1 1 Usi
32. 34 3b 36 O a 4 a il Il f 41 42 43 44 45 46 e Each Channel in the system is represented in the Channel grid in two lines o The top line represents Channel numbers o The second line can either show levels or fade and wait times See Independent Timing e Channel levels are color coded to indicate the status of the Channel See Channel Colors and Symbols e Channels with a small red triangle by their number are Channels that have more attributes than just intensity The other attributes can be found in the Attribute Grid Adjusting the Size of the Channel Grid Display 1 Move the mouse over the line separating the Channel Grid from the Cue List until it alll turns into this symbol el 2 Click on the vertical line and hold down the mouse button to adjust the width of the Channel Grid display OR alll 3 Right click once the il symbol appears and select a set Channel Grid size from the right click menu 65 66 67 68 69 Set Grid 12 Across Set Grid 15 Across Seb Grid 20 Across Set Grid 25 Across 1413 1444 115 116 117 Moving around the Channel Grid using the Strand Lighting p63 Palette OS v10 Wheel While no Channels are selected you can hold down SHIFT and roll the Wheel to scroll the Channel grid If you have channels selected and you don t want to release them use the BKSP key to clear the command line Moving around the Channel Grid Display with the trackpad Th
33. AV Contact Closure devices can communicate with Palette ILS devices must be addressed between 1 and 255 o ILS 6 Button stations can also be assigned to IR Remote rooms A through D for triggering Palette using the infrared hand held device o ILS button events down and up are transmitted to Palette over the ILS network and can be used by Palette s Variable Display Variables Palette can have multiple Variable Pages o ILS devices can be patched to Variable Pages The syntax is B where B is the capital letter B and is the ILS device ID i Eies booka Saup Variable Page Patch Control Room M He T der Name Last Change Macro Type Badin Group Detaul ORL Show Aiow 0T 16 0e37 Shs Radio A VWork 2hNow O007 16 06 38 EF Radia B Auer UT 2A Moweoo Tecue 4a hy Togale Extemal ae HH Toagle Flame Test r T Momen OFF i 26 Now2007 160643 SE Radio e Multiple button stations can be patched to a variable page by separating devices by a comma Strand Lighting p345 Palette OS v10 i e B1 B2 The order field can also contain comma delineated text such as B1 1 B2 5 which would bind together button number 1 on Button Station 1 and button 5 on Button Station 2 As buttons go down the corresponding variable Order field will be set to a value of T As buttons go up the corresponding variable will be set to a value of 0 If a variable s value is
34. CLOSE THIS BOX e By default typing on an empty Command Line these buttons will select Channels e Use in conjunction with the other keys Thru etc close to these to select ranges of Channels e While in dialog boxes these keys fill in numeric fields e To change cue times use these buttons in conjunction with the Arrow Keys and the EDIT button See Also Command Line Syntax plls Strand Lighting Palette OS v10 Undo Release Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX RELEASE UNDO See Also Release Hardware Setup Console Strand Lighting The Undo Key is also marked as Release on some consoles and is one of the most useful buttons on the console It can be used in two ways Pressing the Undo key results in UNDO appearing on the command line Once Undo has been entered you can press UNDO This undoes the last level change You can also Undo individuaal Attributes such as Pan Tilt UNDO RECORD Record Undo Record This reverses the last record action Hndy if you accidentally over recorded a cue by mistake UNDO UNDO RELEASE to release all selected channels Press SHIFT UNDO to bring back previously released items If a dialog box is open the LED is flashing Pressing UNDO will close the dialog box without changes being committed If channels are selected the LED is flashing If channels have been changed but are not selected the LED will flash in a st
35. DOES NOT WARRANT THAT CONTROL SOFTWARE WILL MEET ALL OF YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATIONS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT ANY DEFECT WITHIN CONTROL SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED FURTHERMORE HCI DOES NOT WARRANT NOR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION REGARDING THE RESULTS OF YOUR USE OF CONTROL SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF CAPABILITY CORRECTNESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION REPRESENTATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HCI OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF HCI SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY Remedies In the event of a breach of the express warranty provided in Section 4 above HCI will replace CONTROL SOFTWARE with another copy of CONTROL SOFTWARE if available provided that you return the defective copy of CONTROL SOFTWARE to HCI within thirty 30 days of the date you receive it You acknowledge that this Section sets forth Your SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE remedy and HCI s SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE liability for breach of warranty or any other duty Limitation of Liability YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT HCI IS PROVIDING CONTROL SOFTWARE AS IS UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NEGLIGENCE SHALL HCI BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES IN TORT CONTRACT PRODUCT LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER THEORY OF LAW RESULTING FROM THE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL OF CONTROL SOFTWARE OR YOUR USE Strand Lighting p435 Palette OS v10 OR INABILITY TO USE CONTROL SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT
36. E Monday Notes Notepad Sees File Edit Format wiew Help focus FOH gobos check shutter cuts on chins put in cyc gel order window gobo add 2 to crew on Wed Note You can save your txt document anywhere on the D drive except in the Horizon folder Feel free to make your own directory structures to suite your organizational style Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p416 Palette OS v10 MS Paint The basic Paint package can be launched from the Palette Control Panel to view and look at BMP JPG GIF TIFF and PNG image files This can be handy if you have digital stills of your production or mockups that you may want to refer to Fountain jpg Paint Sele File Edit wiew Image Colors Help lt IL S0SSe0e80e ce I E See OB Se Note You can save your image files anywhere on the D drive except in the Horizon folder Feel free to make your own directory structures to suite your organizational style Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p417 Palette OS v10 Additional Applications Strand Lighting may choose to install additional applications and make them available to you via this button When you click on the button in the Palette Control Panel a dialog box will open presenting you with a list of additional applications that have been installed Choose application to run Adobe Actobate Reader ET Guardian Either double click on the desired ap
37. Hardware Setup For simplicity describing how release works is done two different ways Conventional Lights use a two stage release whereas mixed selections including Moving Lights use a multi stage release Conventional Lights o Ist press releases the Selected channel s o Next press releases all Captured channels o Press SHIFT UNDO to undo these actions in two stage Selections including Moving Lights o Ist press releases the last Changed attribute Next press releases the entire attribute family if the first press did not release the entire attribute family o Next press releases the selected Channel s including all of its Captured Attributes Final press releases all other Captured channels and their attributes Press SHIFT UNDO to undo these actions in all stage Release in Time Regardless if a channel is a moving light or a conventional dimmer if you want to release it or a selection of channels in time or sneak it back to cue level use the syntax 1 SHIFT REL 5 ENTER This appears on the command line like this Fixture 5 Release In Time 5 Note o This syntax will release the channel s and all of its attributes o You can setup your A B or C D fader pairs to control the amount of time from 0 to 10 seconds that attributes fade to their captured levels and release This is very handy if Strand Lighting p164 Palette OS v10 you have pre programmed a large number of looks or palettes and wan
38. Hardware Setup A B C D Cue List Time Cells and the Blue Box Most shows will be satisfied with the flexibility offered by editing times in the Cue List There are multiple timing columns editable here the main one is labeled Cue Time Visible here is also the Down Time column but not seen are Position Time Color Time Gobo Time Lens Time and Special Time which will only be available if you have moving lights patched in your show Follow these steps to change the timing of your cue 1 1 Using the ARROW KEYS move the Blue Box to the time column you want to change 2 p 2 Press the EDIT button to put the Blue Box into edit mode 8 Note The QWERTY equivalent of EDIT is INSERT 3 3 Either type in a new value to completely replace the text highlighted in blue or use the Wheel to roll the values up or down Note Each detent on the wheel will change the value up or down by one second Holding down SHIFT will change the value by 0 1 of a second If you want the attributes to hold their level for a piece of time after you press the GO Strand Lighting p43 Palette OS v10 button enter the time using the Wait Fade syntax 5 5 When you are finished press ENTER to close the edit box Note All attributes of all the Channels recorded in the cue will fade in Cue Time unless a time Is entered in the appropriate column If you want to remove individual attribute timings edit the cell and press DEL
39. If you want to re number existing cues see the topic called Renumber Cues for information on how to use the Move command Strand Lighting p220 Palette OS v10 Renumber Cues To renumber cues within the same cue list the process is done using the Move command 1 Highlight the cues you want to move using the Blue Box Use SHIFT and the Up and Down Arrows to extend the range of the Blue Box 2 Press SHIFT MOVE or M on the QWERTY keyboard to open the Move dialog box Move Cues 6 thru 9 to 51 Cue List Yertiga 52 Cue 7 mid two 510 Fisture 2 floor two HO back 17 mid two 12 floor tao 53 First Cue Number 10 a m 1 E pis 55 New Cue Increment S6 Move Cue State 59 Attributes All Attributes 512 Look 2 Vogl X Cancel 3 Note the cues you highlighted appear in the title of the dialog box Enter a new Starting cue number You can use the wheel to scroll through the list looking for the gap in which you want to move these cues Note If you select existing cues to move your cues to you will be warned Delete Destination Range Destination Cue Range is not empty delete cues and w Yes X No You can either cancel out at this point by pressing UNDO or press ENTER to delete the old cues and move these cues into their spot Be careful O continue If desired change the Cue Increment By default this value is 1 This is handy if you ve
40. It will close any open dialog box or it will release selected channels if no dialog box is open Press SHIFT REL to bring back what you just cleared e DON T USE THE TRACKPAD or MOUSE you don t have to Almost every function can be achieved using dedicated keys the Softkeys S1 12 the NEXT PREV button the wheel or the arrow buttons e f you put the forward slash character at the beginning of a cue label the text will appear italicized If you use an exclamation point it will be bold e You can drag columns around in the Cue List to suite your needs Double clicking on column separators will automatically size the column for you e You can move any selected channels in a cue to a separate part by pressing the PART softkey and then update the cue Move the Blue Box in the cue list to change cue part timing Palette Supports 26 different parts plus individual independent timing for every attribute if you need that flexibility e The Grand Master can either include or exclude captured channels Choose your option in S3 HARDWARE SETUP e The NEXT PREV button moves you through dialog boxes Use it with SHIFT to move backwards through a dialog box e You can delete cue parts by highlighting any cell part s line with the blue box and press the DEL key The channels in that part can either be moved to the main cue or removed from the cue altogether e While you are in a dialog box the SOFTKEYS will take you to the individua
41. LIMITATION DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE PROFITS DATA OR BUSINESS AND DAMAGE TO YOUR INTERNAL COMPUTER SYSTEMS EVEN IF HCI OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF HCI HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS EFFECTIVE EVEN IF THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY STATED IN SECTION 5 ABOVE FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE Controlling Law and Severability This License shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the United States and the State of Pennsylvania If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this License or a portion thereof to be unenforceable that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to affect the intent of the parties and the remainder of this License shall remain in full force and effect Any cause of action with respect to CONTROL SOFTWARE must be instituted within one year after the claim or cause of action has arisen or be barred Confidentiality CONTROL SOFTWARE and all Materials provided by HCI under this License are confidential and proprietary to HCI You agree to hold them in confidence not to use them other than in connection with CONTROL SOFTWARE and the performance of this License Complete License This License constitutes the entire agreement between You and HCI with respect to CONTROL SOFTWARE and all Materials provided to You by HCI and supersedes any prior or contemporaneous understandings representations
42. Lett Click Select ow iW Enable taps Tap Click Settings Use Detaults 2 To adjust the relative acceleration and speed of the trackpad select the Motion tab Strand Lighting p394 Palette OS v10 lt GlidePoint On USB1 Port Properties _ Hardware Scraling 7 Gestures Options Devices Stas a ae Taps and Buttons Pointers Motion Relative speed Adjust relative pointer speed Normal Acceleration Adjust p inter acceleration Appi 3 3 To turn on or off edge scrolling select the Scrolling tab Strand Lighting p395 Palette OS v10 GlidePoint On USB1 Port Properties Taps and Buttons Pointers Motion Wheel Hardware crolling ne Gestures Options Devices Scrolling method Scroll For use in most Windows applications C Seroll 9 Office 97 2000 compatible scrolling f None Sethinige Scrolling types Scrolling sounds lv Vertical F Yertical and horizontal M Zoom i Zoom M Back foward W Back forward Back surf Zoom fin some gt gt a ak s r r kE z i ere eo 97 applications Ponien cites Horizontal seroll Vertical scroll Tip If you enable Vertical scrolling the very right hand side of the trackpad emulates the level wheel You can select channels by positioning the mouse pointer tapping on the trackpad and then push along the right hand edge to set the level Back to P
43. Load is Shift Blind Warmers Preset House to Half 4 Barnd Note The Cue Number box is active when you enter this dialog If you roll the wheel you can scroll through the list to select a cue The Cue Number is pre stuffed with the cue number where the Blue Box was sitting so it is fastest to move the Blue Box to the cue you want to load before pressing Load 1 If desired press S4 to clear all Captured channels before loading your selected cue If you don t do this whatever is Captured or Loaded before you load this cue will stay Captured allowing you to layer bits and pieces from different objects before Re Recording or Updating 2 If desired press S5 to load the cue s State or the cumulative effect of all cues up to that point in the cue list as hard values 3 If desired press S9 to load filter Attributes from the Loaded item Note If you don t do any Attribute filtering the item Loaded get shown in the Loaded Status Bubble If you do subsequent loads in Blind before making any changes and Clear on Load is checked the first item gets released and the new item gets loaded You can layer ideas if you Load one item make a change and don t update before loading another make sure to clear the S4 check mark 1 Press ENTER to load the Cue 2 Note the Loaded Status Bubble shows which cue is loaded The Cue List is on the top line and the cue number or label if set is below Loaded AFB Sunise
44. Look Note O Strand Lighting p255 Palette OS v10 o You can use the Command Line to record Looks too Adjust your levels then type LOOK REC The Look will be recorded to the current Look Page and Merge data if the look already exists Other Sub Masters levels will not be included in the record operation o If you want to modify a Look Live and use the UPDT button the Look Handle must be at 100 See Updating Cues Modifying Cues in the Live Display See Also Recording and Using Groups Command Line Syntax Apply Levels Selecting and Setting Channels Record Options Sub Master Pages Sub Master Types Additive Inhibitive and Attributes Channel s different states Strand Lighting p256 Palette OS v10 Busking One of the very powerful features of Palette is the ability to very quickly record ideas to Looks i e REC BUMP that can later be called back by the command line or referenced by cues as palettes or even played back on Sub Masters as easily as pushing up a slider Using multiple Sub Masters in a live situation to layer pre recorded ideas is what we call Busking Palette s Fade Resolution allows you to continue writing to the stage with many many different playbacks and Sub Masters and it keeps track of them all even if only the latest or highest is winning You can pile look upon look continually and then pull it all apart again not just in reverse order but in any order With the flexibility
45. Meetna 2oiNow Fy Radia Event Banquet 2oiNows Fia a Radio Event Luneh 2SiNow Fy Radia Event OFF J 29Now Toggle kalise 2 Lower Ze Otho a vr Men aovi Sh MMamen Select the desired Variable Page using the mouse then use the and EDIT to change Strand Lighting ps6 Palette OS v10 any of the parameters of the variables The name and the value of the variable true or false or zero or none zero show as normal or pushed in can be seen if the Variable Page is selected Icons also show if a button is a radio toggle or momentary button Momentary Buttons If a variable s type is Momentary the corresponding Macro Button will have a red mushroom button icon These buttons are only down as long as you Nave your finger on them When it goes down Button Down Off Zero or Value Change actions will occur and the variable s value will change from zero to 1 or 100 depending on what is patched to it When you release your finger the variable s value will return to zero and any Up Action or On Zero or Value Change actions will be executed Toggle Buttons Toggle variables denoted by a rocker switch make the down action of a button stick Pressing the button again pops the button back up Again macros are fired on Button Down Button Up and Value Change events where applicable Radio Buttons Similar to an old car radio only one radio button or station can be down or tuned in ata time Pressing another bu
46. Note on Redundant Data it is more desirable to record State than it is to record All Recording the state gives you a snapshot of what is on stage right now vis a vie the current cue list It also includes any Changes or Captured channels that you may currently be working with You would choose this option when the designer says Right love this make sure we can come back to this The reason you choose to record State vs recording using Changed is that recording State gives you what you have and also Blocks the cue The Block it does is better than using the Block command because it only puts hard values in for channels that you have used in this cue list If you are running a multiple cue list show you don t want to record the entire rig into this cue list Doing so would necessarily steal channels away from other cues lists when you run this cue This may be desirable when working in a theatre but imagine you are programming a museum J ust because the designer said I love this Snapshot it you have to appreciate he s only in one room right now There could be many other things happening on other cue lists that are not involved in what he is looking at right now For that reason you record State It s not a stretch to come up with other scenarios that are applicable to a stage show Make note that when you Move Copy or Load Cues you have the State option too Selected Fixtures all attributes Imagine that you as th
47. Palette OS v10 Variable Page Sod Variable P Delete Variable Page Having added the variable you can give it a name by double clicking on it and setting what it refers to in the Patch column The Patch Column entry is in the form of Bx where x refers to the Vision Net Room for the Panel So for example if the button that we needed to interface to was in Room 5 we would enter B5 in the patch Vanable Page Variabl Vision Net In the above example the Variable Page has been assigned the to Room 1 Having created that link we need to add a separate variable for each button Adding a new Variable is done using the Add Variable softkey displayed at the bottom of the screen By adding a variable to the page it is assigned an Order and a Name In the case of Vision Net the Order number is the button number that you want to link to The name is a name to reffer to the value coming from this panel in Macros Scripts etc Order Name Value 8 Order Name l Value Lo Reels When you add variables to a page they will automatically start at One and increment You can modify the Order value just by double clicking In the above example the Order has been changed to 8 to correspond to button Number 8 in the patched Room Room 1 B1 from this example It has also been give the name of VN Button8 so that we can use this variable inside Strand Lighting p349 Palette OS v10 macros Ass
48. Palette OS v10 Softkeys The two rows of twelve buttons at the bottom of the screen are context sensitive to what you are doing such that at any stage of operation you are presented with a dozen or less choices The softkeys are Marked as S1 S12 for the lower set of keys and M1 M12 for the upper set of keys For instance if the Record Cue dialog box was open the softkeys would be as follows Ze FS Cue Tire FE Dice Tire E D F7 Upise G Note The sofkeys 1 through 12 on the console are mapped to F1 through F12 on the QWERTY keyboard The upper softkeys in Green are mapped to ALT F1 throught ALT F12 Popups If you are selecting from a combo list similar to S1 above you can either repeatedly press the softkey to change the selection or you can double press S1 to get a pop up list When you get this list S1 through S4 become Strand Lighting p77 Palette OS v10 51 52 53 54 Hain Cue AES ES Sie i You can also use the Softkeys Arrow Keys or the Wheel to select the desired choice Once you have highlighted the right one press ENTER Additional Softkeys Some dialog boxes such as the Record dialog box have buttons that have the symbol after the text like this Pressing and holding the SHIFT key gives you additional softkeys such as the following In this case pressing any of these softkeys changes the attribute masking without the need to open th
49. Palette OS v10 system Group System Date Time Time Zone DST Keyboard Language System Date Time TZ and DST Changing the system s clock is done via the Date Time control in the Palette Control Panel The Date and Time are set on the first tab you see when you launch the control Date and Time Properties il 12 13 i4 15 16 17 i amp 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 Current time zone Eastern Daylight Time L pK J cancel To adjust the Time Zone which is important if you are using Astronomical Events or want to synchronize your system with World Time Services select the second tab and choose the appropriate time zone Check whether or not your region uses Daylight Savings Time or not Strand Lighting p378 Palette OS v10 Date and Time Properties Date amp Time Time Zone Internet Time SMT 05 00 Eastern Time U5 amp Canada Automatically adjust clack For daylight saving changes ae The last tab determines whether or not Palette will look to World Time Servers on the Internet such as time windows com to synchronize your clock to World Standard Time To do this all of the following must be true e e You must be on the Internet see Network Setup e e The date see above must be set correctly e Your time zone must be correct see above Strand Lighting p379 Palette OS v10 Date and Time Properties Servers time
50. Select the channel where you want to start the channel check Tools Press and hold the Tools Button i T on the QWERTY keyboard Select Channel Check S1 you may need to select lt more gt to see Channel Check on S1 The Current Channel text box will have the first Channel you have selected in it Change it with the Wheel or by typing in a new number if needed Note 1 If you type a value in the Current Channel box and press Enter the Channel will raise to the High Check Value If you then type in a new number and press Enter again the previous number will go to the Low Check Value and the new Channel will go to the High Check Value Select the High Check Value box and enter a percentage level to establish the maximum level at which Channels play during the check Select the Low Check Value box and enter a percentage level to establish the minimum level Channels return to after being checked Use the Go Forward or Go Back button to manually execute each step of the Channel Check Click OK when the check is completed Click the Release button En the Channel grid toolbar twice or press the UNDO key twice to release all Channels controlled by the keypad shown with red levels under the Channel number To Automate Channel Check Strand Lighting p282 Palette OS v10 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 above 2 Enter atime in the Advance Time text box Note 1 The Advance Time establishes the length of time a Channel
51. Using the ARROW KEYS move the Blue Box to the time column you want to change 1 2 Press the EDIT button to put the Blue Box into edit mode Note The QWERTY equivalent of EDIT is INSERT 3 3 Either type in a new value to completely replace the text highlighted in blue or use the Wheel to roll the values up or down Each detent on the wheel will change the value up or down by one second Holding down SHIFT will change the value by 0 1 of a second For SMPTE it is 1 second or 1 frame Note e If you are editing a Wait Fade time the entire cell is highlighted in blue E Directly typing a new value will replace both values If you just want to change the Wait Time press FULL or HOME to take you to the front of the line Be highlighting only the Wait time If you want to change the Fade Time press OUT or END likewise 2a e To enter times in the HH MM SS format use two dots I e to make the colon This format extends from days DD to fractions of a second or frames FF in SMPTE time i e DD HH MM SS FF Note that frames or the 100th of a second appear after a single decimal point 4 When you are finished press ENTER to close the edit box Tips To quickly edit numbers move the Blue Box to the first cell press EDIT type in a new number but rather than pressing ENTER press an Arrow Key to move you to the next cell The cell will automatically be open for editing
52. You must do this before loading and saving your presentation Strand Lighting p362 Palette OS v10 Security n High Only signed macros from trusted sources will be allowed to run Unsigned macros are automatically disabled f Medium You can choose whether or not to run potentially unsafe macros C Low fnot recommended You are not protected From potentially unsafe macros Use this setting only iF you have virus scanning software installed or you are sure all documents vou open are safe Ho virus scanner installed When you are ready to run your show choose TOOLS MACROS Macros from the PowerPoint menus and RUN the macro called Palette HCI PowerPoint Automation Check the Machine_ID then press the Run button The machine running the presentation will now wait for commands from Palette Running the show using this method does not prevent you from navigating the slides using standard methods When the presentation is done press the End button Note The first time you run the Palette macro in PowerPoint you may be presented with a Windows Security Alert Strand Lighting p363 Palette OS v10 Windows Security Alert EW sa J To help protect pour computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program Name Microsoft PowerPoint Publisher Microsoft Corporation Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this
53. a successful connection the show file will be copied to the local machine using the name ShowFile_Tracking Backup spb The spb indicates that it is a Backup file Each time the show file is saved on the main system the spb file will be refreshed All cue execution Sub Master adjustments and variable changes will track from the main system to the backup system so if needed the two systems will be perfectly in sync If the main system goes down or you lose the network connection a dialog box will be displayed Tracking Backup Connection Lost Tracking Backup Connection Lost Go Live Going Live in 3 ff es gt lt No If you let the countdown timer elapse or select Yes the backup system will starting outputting levels to the stage using either its local DMX ports or the network DMX devices Strand Lighting p420 Palette OS v10 If you choose No the dialog box will close with all the cue etc in sync but the outputs will be disabled It will then be up to you when you want to re enable the outputs using the option in the File Menu See also Enable Outputs Recovery File Menu Backup Files and Checkpoint Files Show Save Options Network Setup Strand Lighting p421 Palette OS v10 Recovery amp Enable Outputs If for any reason your system dies read power failure or crash when it restarts it will be restored to the same state as it was just before it went down i e in the right cues l
54. attribute of every channel will get hard data in looks recorded using the Strand Lighting p177 Palette OS v10 All Levels option The exception to this is that any attribute that is at it s default value will be filtered out For intensities on conventional channels this is at a level of 0 As Looks are normally run HTP this just cleans things up If you are going to run a look using LTP and specifically want default values in there you will have to mark them Changed Note The topics Recording Cues and Recording Looks discuss three very important options not described here They are Update Exclude Sub Masters and Attributes See Also A Note on Redundant Data Move Copy Fade Resolution Softkeys Described Strand Lighting p178 Palette OS v10 Updating Cues Cues can be modified in the Live or Blind display modes When you modify a cue in the Live display the channels you alter will be seen on both the screen and the stage Working in the Blind display lets you modify cues without affecting any active stage levels Note These methods described here do not use the Load method Modifying Cues in the Live Display i 2 3 4 Goto the cue you want to alter Select and Modify the attributes of the channels you want to change Press UPDT or U The Update dialog box will open v AB Cue 76 Enter current cue 54 Select All 510 Edits Track Forward 59 Attributes All Attributes If you have just
55. can imagine that trying to make some light cuts can be a time consuming effort of hunting and pecking for the right channel or more likely pair of channels That is why UAC groups related pairs together onto encoders to reduce the search process by half UAC labels the shutters like this Gatton To get to the shutter control the encoder banks group opposite shutters together So the first encoder bank deals with the Top and Bottom Shutters Moreover motors la and 1b are grouped together on the first encoder to thrust the encoder into the aperture of the fixture The next encoder controls the relationship between those two motors giving you one handle for controlling the angle of that shutter Strand Lighting p23 Palette OS v10 lop Thrust lop Angle Bot Thrust bot Angle i F alt mor ale Ao Uo Uo U The following examples show how UAC greatly simplifies the process of getting ideal shutter cuts In this example note the value of Top Thrust It is set to 50 and the top shutter is cutting the beam in half If you cranked the first encoder all the way to the right it is unlikely that it will reach 100 Most moving lights only allow you to put the shutter in part way into the field of light That exact amount is represented here in percent Top Thrust Top Angle Bot Thrust Bot Angle j iB Le 50 0 0 0 Hatta If you adjusted the second encoder to adjust the angle of the Top Shutter note h
56. changed values that were going up or going down in the cue i e not tracking and not palettes the only option will be to update the current cue Select Edits Track Forward if you want the changes to continue to track from this cue onwards Uncheck the box if you want the changes to revert to their old levels in the next cue Press ENTER to update the selected items Strand Lighting p179 Palette OS v10 Note e If you change values that have been tracking you will have the option to change them in the current cue or in the cue they have been tracking from Track Back cue You would do this for example if you were part way into the scene and the designer ask Why is the chandelier so hot You could then make the adjustment and have it track from the beginning of the scene If you change the value of an attribute that was set by a palette you have the option to update the current cue with raw values or update the original palette You will also be presented with Track Back options for palettes too The Attributes button will open the Attribute Masking dialog box allowing you to selectively update portions of your changes Hold down SHIFT to change the softkeys and short circuit opening the Attribute dialog box Anything that does not get updated either by Attribute Masking or by de selecting items in the Update List will not be Released allowing you to make further changes and Subsequent updates If a Sub Master is runn
57. channel because of the state of another It goes further by labelling each control appropriately as to what it is doing at present To get to the plethora of controls on today s moving lights all attributes are assigned into one of five families o Position o Color o Gobo o Lens Oo Special Dedicated buttons or softkeys then bank those attributes onto four encoders and their present purpose is displayed in the blue bubbles Strand Lighting p32 Palette OS v10 In this case a moving light with multiple gobo wheels has been selected and the user has used the Gobo button to bank the encoders to Gobo Wheel 1 s controls More blue bubbles below the encoder labels show the present value of those controls Here the Gobo 1 Wheel Mode is dialed to Select the current Selection is Glacier the Gobo Mode is set to Index which has been Indexed to 15 giWhiMd gi Select gl a fs gt Index _jL___Index___ te It reads somewhat like a book from left to right The key thing here is that the DMX ordering has nothing to do with how the controls are laid out to the user In fact as you will see below in the Gobo examples the number of DMX channels used to achieve all the effects of the attribute do not enter in the equation either _ Glacier If the user were to nudge the first encoder the one labelled Wheel Mode the entire wheel would Spin Forward If so showing you the control that allows you to choose the gobo Selection
58. control whether or not Captured channels are automatically Released after recording a cue in Show Options o There is a Console Option in Hardware Setup that allows you to use Last Action Editing If you choose Last Action Editing channels will remain captured until a cue takes control of them Channels under Playback Control must be Released If you are using Last Action Editing attributes will automatically be Released when a Cue Lists needs to take control of them Under Playback Control 28 28 28 a0 Channel under Sub Master Control must be Released Additive Looks can affect levels similar to Cues either under HTP or LTP control Inhibitive Looks negatively affecting a channel s intensity that is currently either under Cue List Control or Additive Sub Master Control Under Additive Sub Master Control Channel under Cue List Control being inhibited by Cue List Master or Grand Master Flashing channels are Selected It may or may not be Captured See Flash Fixture or Output and Highlight Lowlight Flashing or Highlighted channel Strand Lighting p67 Palette OS v10 Attribute Grid If you have patched moving lights in your show the Attribute Grid will appear below the Channel Grid You can turn on or off the Attribute Grid display by using the Display menu S5 You can also dock a Second Window with just the Attribute Grid in it by selecting Second Window from the Display menu or selecting it from the S5
59. cue list or other properties by editing the Action Column or you may want to adjust more than one property of the cue at once by using the cue s property dialog box All cue properties are described here including the ones found in the Cue Action dialog box To view a cue s property box use the VIEW CUE ENTER syntax or VILFLOJ LENTER on the QWERTY keyboard After hitting the VIEW button the View dialog box will appear Note If you highlight the cue with the Blue Box then press VIEW CUE this dialog box will be pre loaded with correct cue number also highlight the cue with the Blue Box and hit the Properties button Es in the Cue List toolbar Once you select Cue the Cue Number edit box is active Enter a number or use the wheel to scroll through the list of available cues Use S1 to change the cue list if you want to view cues that are not in your currently Selected cue list When you have found the cue you want press ENTER The Cue Properties dialog box will appear Strand Lighting p226 Palette OS v10 E oe pe fs zi C Bu Ss oe JE psa none Use the softkeys move to any box and change the properties that you wish To select a Profile use the softkeys to select a Time field then press NEXT to move over to the Profile combo When you are finished press ENTER Note You can change some of these parameters by moving the Blue Box to the Action column and pr
60. families can be mapped to the handle in different ways The colored triangle on the virtual Sub Masters is there to indicate the Sub Master type o Green up arrows indicate an additive Sub Master o Red down arrows indicate an inhibitive Sub Master A virtual Sub Master Handle appears when you place the Mouse pointer on a Sub Master and left click and hold o To change channel levels hold the left mouse button down while moving the mouse up and down raising and lowering the handle o Release the left mouse button to release the handle It will stay where you left it The order tn which you select channels is preserved when you Record a Look This order ts restored when you use the Look to recall a group of channels and matters when you are using Fanning and effects Strand Lighting p248 Palette OS v10 You can get a Look s Properties by either right clicking on the Virtual Look Display see Display Menu or using the VIEW or the V button on the QWERTY keyboard then selecting S12 Sub Master Label The Label can be any text field you want This text will appear in the bubbles in the Look Display in the Virtual Sub Master Handle cues that reference this Look and in any dialog box that identifies the Look Additive or I nhibitive When you record a Look you can choose whether or not it will be additive pile on or inhibitive reducing the level Levels that are affected by an inhibitive Sub Master appear lik
61. fix the command line o Because Palette s design leverages on consumer based technology such as readily available operating systems USB interfaces and Pentium Processors it allows lower budget theatres with operators who are not full time employees to have the Strand Lighting plo Palette OS v10 sophistication that has previously been reserved for only the biggest of professional theatres using specialized and dedicated equipment o Since a standard operating system is used and the hardware interfaces with USB you already have your backup desk In fact you probably have over a dozen of them in your facility The software is designed written and owned by Horizon Control Inc See Also Universal Attribute Control Tracking Edits Track Forward Blocking and Unblocking of cues License Strand Lighting pll Palette OS v10 System Capacities The Palette system capacities outlined below represent the upper range of capacities the program can support Output Devices Control Channels 32 768 1024 on physical console without external output devices No reasonable limit determined by amount purchased Cues Unlimited Cue Lists Unlimited Looks Unlimited Looks per page Unlimited Look Pages Unlimited Simultaneous Fades Unlimited Priorities Macro Buttons Remote Video 100 different priorities available for every Cue List and Sub Master 12 pageable virtual Five connections via XP machine on LAN runn
62. has even completed Strand Lighting p39 Palette OS v10 There is nothing in Cue 3 that address the cyc channels so pressing GO on Cue 3 still does not affect the progression of the sunrise It is important to remember that Preset style desks cannot offer you this flexibility In Preset desks each and every channel is recorded at its stage level in every cue That would mean that in Cue 2 the cyc would be at its full sunrise level So when you press GO on Cue 2 midway through the subtle sunrise because the actor stepped on stage your sunrise will complete in a not so subtle 2 seconds flat If you really want to you can operate Palette as a Preset desk J ust set the Record combo box to All Levels Block Cue in the record dialog box That way every channel will have a recorded level in every cue This is highly undesirable because you loose the functionality as described above but worse yet you completely deflate the power of having multiple cue lists If you have every channel recorded in every cue each time you press GO on any cue list the entire rig will go to the recorded levels of that cue stealing everything away from the other cue list If this appeals to you you may want to check out how to Block the Entire Cue List Note o If you are updating a cue and don t want the edits to track forward turn OFF Edits Track Forward in the Record dialog box The cue after the cue you are updating will be automagically updated t
63. has the industry evolved to the point where most believe that inter operability is a good thing Horizon Control Inc HCI is at the very leading edge of this new paradigm of lighting control For years now HCI has had members sitting on ESTA s Control Protocols Working Group and we are actively involved in the development of new protocols such as ACN ANSI E1 17 Horizon Control pulls from over a decade of experience writing lighting control software and members of the development team were pivotal in the evolution of computer visualization software People on our staff have worked on some of the largest shows ever mounted with virtually every make and model of popular lighting control systems Our desire to simplify and revolutionize the fundamental methods that are used to control lighting is deep rooted in our collective years of experience The result is one of the most highly effective developments of a technology that we call Universal Attribute Control The descriptions and examples in this document are taken from the implementation of our Universal Attribute Control as used by the Palette Lighting Console Background The earliest forms of computer control though digital at their core output an analog signal between 0 and 10v This in turn controlled the lights from no output to full intensity Inside the console these numbers were generally stored using 8 bit bytes giving 256 steps of resolution With the advent of moving
64. has two functions Un shifted it is the CUE button used when in the Record dialog box or in the command line Shifted it opens the GOTO CUE dialog box where you can select any cue and Goto it in either recorded time or a time you enter in the dialog box e If another cue lists steals away attributes from your cue list press SHIFT GO to Assert your cue list The current cue will not advance e If you hold down SHIFT while you press HALT BACK the cue list will go back to the previous cue in cue time rather than the Halt Back time e Busking Looks is a very powerful feature of Palette Sub Master can be configured to give true Last Action control to moving light attributes e If you want to remove information in a cue LOAD the cue select the channels release them then press the UPDT key to update the cue e To quickly record a Sub Master set the desired levels then press REC then a BUMP button You can later edit the name of the Look by pressing VIEW then BUMP to get the Look s Strand Lighting p57 Palette OS v10 properties If you press REC SHIFT BUMP the record dialog box will remain open to allow you to label the look e If you are editing a numeric column like time after pressing EDIT you can use the WHEEL to change the values If multiple cells are selected the values will change relative to each other e Use Load to load cues or looks You can load multiple items on top of each other to combine ide
65. in any one of the six color spaces mentioned above Strand Lighting p34 Palette OS v10 Regardless of which of the six methods you use to choose your color you also have the option of how the actual crossfade will execute In the following three examples Cue 1 is Blue and Cue 2 is Green but in each case we re going to crossfade in a different color space Apart from the Color Space attribute changing in Cue 2 in each example all other color attributes remain the same RGB Crossfade cl Space Color B Color C DAD nor D Mor rf Fala U A R ID yo m vin 10 090 The fixture used here could be either a CMY subtractive color light or it could be an RGB additive color light If it fades from Blue to Green in either the CMY or RGB color spaces effectively a linear transition occurs on all three control channels This is typical of what traditional lighting console do Subtractive Cue 1 CMY 100 100 0 fades to Cue 2 CMY 100 0 100 The first channel does not move and the other two move from opposite ends The result can either be a not so subtle off white or a somewhat dingy color in the middle of the fade when Magenta and Yellow are both at half and Cyan is at full This is not surprising as there is a lot of colored glass between you and the light Additive Cue 1 RGB 0 0 100 fades to Cue 2 RGB 0 100 0 Half way through the fade we have two LEDs producing equal amounts of energy at half their pote
66. in levels from recorded Looks that are active on stage S9 Opens the Attribute dialog box to allow you to filter what will be recorded in this cue Note e If you double tap S5 or any other softkey it will solo Position That is all other check marks will clear and Position will remain checked e You don t necessarily have to open this box to change the attribute filtering While in the main Record dialog box press SHIFT and the Attribute button will change to this land the softkeys will change to the following Strand Lighting p170 Palette OS v10 Pressing any of these changes the attribute masking without the need to open the Attribute dialog box You can also double tap any attribute family to solo it S10 De select Edits Track Forward if you are updating a cue which is not the last cue in the cue list and you don t want the changes you ve just made to go past this cue This option is ON by default You can change the default in S2 Show Options This option is disabled if you are appending to the cue list 4 4 Press ENTER to close the dialog box If you are attempting to record over an existing cue and you have not selected Update as described in S7 above you will be presented with the following dialog box Do tou want to replace the current Cue with the specified Th Pa cee AES e Update see above is the default Pressing ENTER or S2 will close this dialog box and update the
67. index angle from 90 degrees to 90 degrees from their current position Note the first puts the word Relative on the command line and the directly after it denotes a negative sign rather than the word To The single between the two 90 s puts the word To in the command line For some more examples showing what the command line actually looks like see the help topic Controlling Moving Lights under the heading Command Line Control of Attributes Remember the order in which you type in the command line reflect any ranges i e the or TO syntax you Strand Lighting p133 Palette OS v10 apply levels to See also Fanning and Recording and Using Groups Command Line in the Patch While in the Patch display the command line is used to assign channels of type Dimmer to Outputs or vice a versa Read the topic on Patch to see why using the Blue Box may be faster than using the command line Patch By Fixture S1 425 ENTER Add a new channel to the channel Grid S2 21 THRU 25 ENTER Deletes channels 21 through 25 and leaves a vertical spacer bar between channel 20 and 26 S3 1 ENTER Unpatches channel 1 s outputs S3 1 THRU 5 ENTER Unpatches channel 1 through 5 1 8 ENTER Patches channel 1 intensity only to output 8 Patch By Output S1 1 ENTER Unpatches output 1 S1 1 THRU 5 ENTER Unpatches output 1 through 5 1 8 ENTER Patches output 1 to channel 8 s in
68. just written a bunch of cues using point numbering and you want to clean it up In other cases you may have to squeeze a bunch of cues between two existing cues and may want to use a number less than 1 Remember there can be 999 point cues between two whole numbers o Select Move Cue State if the cue numbering is actually moving the cues out of Strand Lighting p221 Palette OS v10 sequence not simply renumbering them Then the first cue will Move using its cumulative state from its old running order which was the cumulative effect of cues 1 through 10 i e if you move Cue 10 to Cue 100 and there are cues in between when you get to the new Cue 100 it will look the same as it did when it was cue 10 This is the default option but that may not always be the desired intent See Also Move Copy Cue Number Scheme Strand Lighting p222 Palette OS v10 Blocking and Unblocking of Cues and Cue Lists Blocked data in cues looks like this or 7 NE Knowing when it is appropriate to have these symbols is key to understand how to use a tracking console properly It is fully explained in the topic called A Note on Redundant Data Block cues are best explained as a dam that does not let things pass through them If you are working on a long cue list and are jumping around while you are editing it it is handy to put block cues at the top of each scene Imagine this o You re building a traditional theatrical GO show in
69. line is empty holding down SHIFT and rolling the wheel will scroll the channel grid Use after pressing REC and before pressing BUMP or SELECT or 5X5 to keep Record dialog box open for labeling or attribute masking Use with THRU for Thru On syntax When moving lights are selected hold down SHIFT while double pressing S1 through S4 to add an Effect to the corresponding attribute p121 Palette OS v10 Soft Keys PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX S1 The Softkeys are context sensitive to what you are doing always giving you less than a dozen choices at any stage of operation You can always see what each button will do by reading the bubbles at the bottom of the screen The highlighted softkey s LED will blink showing you what control currently has focus When no dialog boxes are open or no moving lights are selected the softkeys give additional functionality that is not available with the hard buttons on the console To show the default softkeys press Backspace to deselect the selected moving lights When a dialog box is open the softkeys are used to jump to specific controls lists check boxes etc These would be the softkeys when the Record Cue dialog box is open See Also Softkeys Described Keyboard Shortcuts Select Softkeys Command Line Syntax Controlling Moving Lights Strand Lighting p122 Palette OS v10 Up Down Buttons PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX UP e Use these butto
70. loaded When you press LOAD or SHIFT B the Load dialog box will be automatically stuffed with the highlighted cue number Track _ When the Tracking button is down in Blind the levels that have tracked into the Loaded cue are shown even though those levels are not recorded in the loaded cue This button is only Shown when in Blind 5 The Record button accesses the Record dialog box 7 Update will open the Update dialog box presenting a list of possible playback items to update EEN elz Changes the Channel and Attribute Grid displays to show Intensity Levels and Attribute Values The Moving Light Attribute Grid see below must be displayed to see Attribute values such as Pan Tilt and Color Changes the Channel and Attribute Grid displays to show Wait Fade Times The keyboard shortcut to toggle between Levels and Times is SHIFT EDIT ce The first click of the Release button release the last altered attribute The second click releases selected channels and the third releases all captured channels Strand Lighting pol Palette OS v10 Cue List Directory Toolbar Looks Setup Use the Cue List Directory toolbar to switch between displaying Cue Lists Patch and Time Events See Also Keyboard Shortcuts Softkeys Described Strand Lighting p62 Palette OS v10 Channel Grid The Channel Grid is the field of numbers located in the top right pane of the display 31 32 33
71. male 9 pin D type Strand Lighting p432 Palette OS v10 Request to send Clear to send Ring indicator General purpose RS232 baud rates 1200 to 38400 VGA VGA female 15 pin high density D type 1 and 2 Description Analog Red 0 0 7V Analog Green 0 0 7V Analog Blue 0 0 7V 5 U J 3 No connection Self Test Red ground Green ground Blue ground No connection key Ground Ground No connection H sync TTL V sync TTL No connection 1024x768 pixels 256 colours 60 75Hz refresh This port is compatible with VGA SVGA and XGA monitors PS2 PS2 Ports Y Description Data No connection Ground 5V DC Clock No connection Ethernet Ethernet 10 100BT RJ 45 A a A rand Lighting Palette OS v10 S Midi Optional MIDI male 5 pin DIN Asynchronous serial 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity 31250 baud SMPTE Optional SMPTE Input Strand Lighting p434 Palette OS v10 Appendix Software License SET OUT BELOW ARE THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH YOU ARE PERMITTED TO USE THE BUNDLE OF SOFTWARE COLLECTIVELY CALLED THE Palette and or PALETTE SOFTWARE CONTROL SOFTWARE PLEASE READ THIS INFORMATION CAREFULLY IF YOU USE CONTROL SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND AS SUCH THIS DOCUMENT WILL CONSTITUTE A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN Horizon Control Inc HCI AND YOU AND SUCH ENTITY collectively referred to a
72. may need to select lt more gt to see Flash Channelon S2 Using the S2 or S3 buttons to step forward or backwards from the current channel The channel that is shown in the edit box will appear like this in the Channel Grid showing that is flashing If you are flashing Outputs DMX there is no change to the channel grid Hint Use the Wheel to roll through the channels o Once you select the Flash tool once you can toggle this tool on and off by pressing the TOOLS button or T on the QWERTY keyboard o Select the channel first then press Tools to automatically fill the Channel edit box o Once you press Enter to close the dialog box or toggle the Tools button the last channel in the edit box will be Selected o After typing in new values into the number box if you press Enter the selected channel or output will flash You can then enter another number and press enter again and the dialog box will not close If you press Enter twice the dialog box will close See Also Channel Check Tools Strand Lighting p284 Palette OS v10 General Information General Show Options Touching S3 will open the Show Options dialog box S9 though S12 switch you between the different setup options See Also Default Cue List Options Venue Setup Show Save Options S1 Cue Only Mode When you are recording cues in the middle of your cue list not appending to the end of the cue list the Record dial
73. menu you will find Shuffle and Repeat options e Using the Taskbar to the very left of the display you can connect to Internet Radio Radio Tuner if you are connected to the Internet Note Strand Lighting p412 Palette OS v10 If you need to make finer adjustments of the audio level hold down Ctrl and click the Media Player icon The Windows volume control will open ii olume Control Options Help Volume Control Wi ave Line In Balance Balance l Balance AT e NRE esti ede Seton dee Volume Volume Volume Mute all _ Mute Avance AC 97 Audio See Also SMPTE Time Code on Cue Lists Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p413 Palette OS v10 nternet Explorer If your Palette console is connected to a Local Area Network that is connected to the Internet you can surf the web right on your console Launch Internet Explorer from the Palette Control Panel or press the WWW button on the processor s keyboard Horizon Control Imi Microsolt internet Explor ef Fle Edit View Favorites Toos Help Q WA Pst ferme O G e Wk Os Address B http twwwe shrandighting corn Strand Lighting a Geniyte company PRODUCTS SUPPORT SALES You can go directly to the Download section of the Strand Lighting web site and get software or library update directly J ust click on the update and select SAVE TO D Read more here You will not be able to download other so
74. of using multiple cue lists look handles and bump buttons all used in combination with Priorities and Look Attribute Behaviors described below Palette makes a great live desk After recording Looks to Sub Master Pages Palette gives you many possibilities of how to bring that Look back up on stage These are discussed fully in the topic called Looks under the section about the Look s properties but it is worth showing the Look Properties options here to exemplify two possible ways of using Looks in a live situation Podium If when recording a Look using moving lights the intensities are included in the Record Options the look will automatically receive the properties as shown above That means that as you push up a Look Slider all the moving light attributes will quickly set themselves into position and leave you with just the intensity level on the slider Moving the handle in the opposite direction as the slider reaches zero all the attributes will be released and will return to whichever playback or other look was controlling them before this look was brought up Strand Lighting p257 Palette OS v10 Look 1 Properties 81 Label Aud WhaHoo Additive S2 HTP Intensity 53 Priority 1 Attribute Behavior S4 Intensity Manual 55 Position Wanual 56 Color Snap off ero S7 Gobo Snap off Zero 35 Lens Snap otf ero 59 Special Snap at Full 510 Delete Look P wW OK P Cancel If y
75. p28 Palette OS v10 disconcerting for a designer who is watching the stage None of those behaviours were asked for but were necessary to achieve the desired effect With UAC you just nudge the second encoder one tick to change the value from CW to CCW The fourth encoder which controls the speed is not changed The DMX values would jump from the value needed for clockwise rotation at 4 RPM directly to the counterclockwise 4 RPM value whatever that is Fast a ia 4 RPM Slow Stopped Slow S Fast Sut fe a FN A DO R i a6 TAT d e At Q L ht K V V at i iv Attribute Substitutions Copying and swapping attributes among fixtures that share scalar properties like Position and Zoom is only the tip of the iceberg when using UAC The real power of UAC can be seen when you start using similar but not identical attributes and how UAC can work with them Color is a great example There are three primary automated color systems in use today Strand Lighting p29 Palette OS v10 Subtractive Color Systems like CMY Additive Color Systems like RGB and Fixed Color Systems that use gel like scrollers or dichroic glass like color wheels UAC can work with any combination of these three and make intelligent substitutions between them if required a T Coor6 Colorc 100 Y One of the most common modes of color control in automated lighting today is CMY color mixing Various mechanisms are used to
76. p427 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p428 Palette OS v10 Light Palette DMX DMX female 5 pin XLR DMX512 output up to 512 channels USB Serial Port Serial Ports Com 1 male 9 pin D type Data carrier detect Strand Lighting p429 Palette OS v10 Request to send Clear to send Ring indicator General purpose RS232 baud rates 1200 to 38400 VGA VGA female 15 pin high density D type 1 and 2 Description Analog Red 0 0 7V Analog Green 0 0 7V Analog Blue 0 0 7V 5 U J 3 No connection Self Test Red ground Green ground Blue ground No connection key Ground Ground No connection H sync TTL V sync TTL No connection 1280 x 1024 pixels 32M colors 60 75Hz refresh This port is compatible with VGA SVGA and XVGA monitors Port 1 is the Main Console display output Port 2 is the additional display output in Extended Desktop mode PS2 PS2 Ports Description V 5 Data No connection Ground 5V DC Clock No connection Strand Lighting p430 Palette OS v10 Ethernet Ethernet 10 100BT RJ 45 AJN a a E Midi Optional MIDI male 5 pin DIN Asynchronous serial 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity 31250 baud SMPTE Optional SMPTE Input O1 Strand Lighting p431 Palette OS v10 Rack Palette DMX DMX female 5 pin XLR DMX512 output up to 512 channels USB Serial Port Serial Ports Com 1
77. pl4 Palette OS v10 Definition The heart of this technology is our Universal Attribute Control Model or UAC for short It is our method of standardizing the language of communication with respect to intelligent lighting control Elevating the means of control to an higher layer allows designers to once again think of their lighting fixtures as merely tools available to get the job done As the theatre embraced moving light fixtures it reluctantly accepted all of the idiosyncratic methods needed to control them The designers found themselves constantly adapting to the language imposed on them by the manufacturer Gone were the days of simply asking for lights and photons would land on the stage Lets go back to the advent of computer controlled lighting to examine the issues that plagued communication in the theatre Before computers entered the theatre the most popular dimmer controllers were known as road boards These large devices had individual handles for each dimmer and designers would ask operators to move a handle to a position to set the light level These move instructions were written down as cues and with each one executed in succession you had a show The advantage of this system which was only realized fully after the obsolescence of road boards was that each move could be controlled at different rates and multiple moves could be executed simultaneously by different operators Computer control first appeared on Broadway in
78. popup The Channel Grid shows that a channel has more attributes than just intensity by displaying a red triangle in its upper left corner The additional attributes can be seen in the Attribute Grid VLENOD 33 VL500D gt TAVENI I L50000 az L500D 43 YLO The channels are listed in rows and the attributes are show in columns The first two columns are fixed such that when you scroll the pane horizontally you can always see which channel is on which row and you can see its current intensity The other columns will shift left an right if you move the horizontal scroll bar or automatically when you address individual attributes such that the one you are working with is visible The column order cannot be switched but you can size the columns by placing the cursor between two column headings clicking and dragging The column width will be persistent between show files as it is not saved in with the show When you select a moving light the row in which it appears will be highlighted with a grey background Note Just by selecting a moving light you do not Capture the individual attributes They are still being controlled by cues and looks until you actually adjust their values Check out the topic called Channel Colors and Symbols to see what the different symbols mean The grey highlighted background shows you which attributes are available for that channel In the image above you can clearly see that the VL10
79. power of this command line would be 1 THRU 20 2 O0 ENTER which would look like this Fixture 1 thru 20 Intensity Time Relative 2 to 0 This will leave the current Wait times alone while Relatively Shifting the Fade times down using a fanned range 2 3 j 1 3 eee I 2as 27s 25 12 13 14 3 9 J 4 25 4 45 135 1 14s 0 55 8 45 E All these examples only used Intensity Time on the command line This was achieved by using the key If you wanted to use any other attribute or attribute family you would use or S1 through S10 as described above or in the topic called Command Line Syntax Note that S10 is All Time Strand Lighting p154 Palette OS v10 S11 Cue Time described below is used for removing independent timing Time Display When Running Cues If you run cues while in the Times display you will see live countdowns on both the waits and fades When the cue has completed the white numbers on the screen represent the recorded independent times whereas the grey numbers are the times that come from the time columns in the Cue List Only the most recent fades appear that is tracking attributes do not show Wait or Fade times Times shown with a dark blue background are from currently un selected cue lists See Channel Colors and Symbols Deltas in the Time Display If you are in the Times display and you adjust an attribute value you will see a white delta triangle If
80. program from accepting connections trom the Internet or a network you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock t Wher should unblock a program This is Windows telling you that it notices you want to listen to Palette Choose Unblock See Also Macro Editor Strand Lighting p364 Palette OS v10 Serial Out Macros The Macro Editor has macros that you can assign to macro buttons or cues that will send serial data out the back of the processors DB9 serial connection These can be used to trigger other Show control devices such as video switchers MP3 players or even other lighting consoles It is a good idea to initially set up the communication parameters before sending any data This can be done by adding a macro to the first cue in a cue list and making the cue list automatically run at load time You will have to check with the device you are sending data to to configure the parameters properly Edit Macro Macro SenalSetup 1 to 8 3600 M 8 1 Description Seral Port Setup 51 Comment 2 Arguments Argument Yalue part setup sting SBUON 6 1 w OK Fas Cancel Make sure you specify the correct Port number The DB9 connector on the back of the processors is Port 1 The setup string consists of four parts BAUD RATE PARITY DATA BITS STOP BITS The default is 9600 N 8 1 If your device is expecting these settings you will not need to run this macro If you must
81. released and fade under control of the cue list If you keep a channel Selected running cue lists will not steal away attribute levels If you want to truly Release the channels rather than keeping them captured press SHIFT UNDO Strand Lighting p328 Palette OS v10 QWERTY Keyboard Cue List Control By default the QWERTY Keyboard on the Palette Processor can control the displayed Cue List For example the Spacebar executes a Go the Z key does a Pause or Halt the Slash will Release the Cue List For the full QWERTY mappings see the topic Keyboard Shortcuts If you uncheck this option any method of controlling the cue list from the keyboard will be disabled including pressing EDIT in the first column of the Cue List To run cues you either need to press the dedicated buttons on the console or use the Cue List Toolbar buttons with the mouse Enable Wed Server If you want to control your console from a browser you must author your own web based controls using hyperlinks embedded with Macro Scripts See Browser Control for more details Force Outputs at Startup on Recovery When this option is checked the DMX and Ethernet outputs will be live upon startup regardless of a proper or improper shutdown This mode is preferable in architectural situations that can not rely on user intervention to get back up an running In these environments appropriate cue lists Should be marked as AutoRun in the Cue List Properties
82. softkeys Double pressing any attribute family will solo it Palette s Move In Black will automatically set up your moving lights ready for the next cue their used in MIB features can be customized on a pre cue basis using the cue Action dialog box Palette s ability to busk moving lights is very powerful You can change the attribute behaviour of your moving lights by VIEWing the properties of a Sub Master The Show Options has a field where you can set the level for the FULL button Double pressing the FULL button will always give you 100 Palette supports 100 Priority levels for Looks and Cue Lists The highest priority is 1 and the default priority for Cue Lists is 10 Press Edit in the Action column of any cue to add a Macro to a cue Macros can trigger other cues or even control your Media Player or console work lights To enter times in the HH MM SS format use two dots i e to make the colon This format extends from days DD to fractions of a second or frames FF in SMPTE time i e DD HH MM SS FF Note that frames or the 100th of a second appear after a single decimal point Strand Lighting p54 Palette OS v10 e Moving Head fixtures can hit the same place on stage using two different sets of pan and tilt Use the FLIP TOOL to try cues out using either e S10 is the Select softkey Pressing it gives you twelve methods of selecting channels in your rig including Evens Odds Previous Levels Going Up
83. stays at the High Check Value before automatically fading down to the low check value At the same time the next Channel fades up to the High Check level and so on 2 Click Stop if you want to pause on a Channel 3 Press either the Go Forward or Go Back button to continue in the desired direction 4 Select OK or press Enter when your done Note e The High Check Value can be lower than the Low Check Value e There are macro in the Macro Editor that will advance or backup the Channel check If you assign these macros to the console s trigger buttons you can easily make a pendant that you can use on stage for doing Channel check e The last Tool you used is assigned to the TOOLS button If you select a Channel before you enter ChannelCheck that is the Channel that the Channel Check will start at So when used in combination with the last Tool button the syntax becomes TOOLS O Strand Lighting p283 Palette OS v10 Flash Fixture or Output When you are hunting for a specific intensity channel sometimes it is easier to flash through a bunch of them until you identify the one you want on stage Using this Tool allows you to quickly flash lights on the stage and not affect channels that are currently captured by setting them to Full and Out repeatedly Access the Flash tools by pressing and holding the TOOLS button or T on the QWERTY keyboard then select either S2 for Flash Channel or S3 for Flash Output you
84. that can fire macros o Button Up o Button Down o On Value when a variable reaches a certain value i e 0 or 100 or 25 Strand Lighting p346 Palette OS v10 o Off Value when a variable changes from a certain value i e when a look handle leaves 0 o Up Through when the look is fading up and passes by the specified value o Down Through when the look is fading down and passes by the specified value o Pass Through when the look crosses a certain value in either direction o Value Change is trigged any time the value changes You can attach any number of macro actions to a variable Macros can contain Lua Scripts that provide for IF THEN ELSE type programming capabilities While Palette is attached to the ILS network it can send two ILS commands using macros o ILSSetScene sends a Scene Set command to a specified device ID useful for setting house lights to half o ILSLockCommand lock or unlocks a specified button station useful to lock out public buttons stations at show time The ILS devices must be in proper ILS mode i e not Remote Keypad mode to make use of these commands Macro Editor 57 Available PowerPointNextShide 52 Commands Command Comment PowerPomtGotoShde i ee FivtureCheckF orveard aN FixtureCheckBack Eii onmand MediaPlayer lay a MediaPlayerS top Edit Macra MediaPlayeFause ammmauminl
85. the number of universes that you wish to send over ShowNet Here you can select up to 20 universes 10240 DMX channels Setup I pe dae eee USB DMX 1 to 1024 2 Universes Showhlet ShowNet DM Start Arnet Antet Dki Start 1 to 11242 Liniverses gt Pathport 1 to 1636 3 Universes L Pathoort XOM Start 1 to 2048 4 Universes L Blind Data Pathoort ta 2560 5 Universes E Channel Allacation to 30 2 6 Universes Fi i to 3504 7 Universes gt PT PRES Moving Lights In the ShowNet XDMX Start cell enter the starting point where this information will appear on Strand Lighting p301 Palette OS v10 the network This information is entered as logical network universe numbers rather than as discrete NetSlots XDMX Start ShowNet XDMX Start ShowNet XDMX Start ShowNet NetSlot 1 1 10 2 513 11 3 1025 12 4 1537 13 5 2049 14 6 2561 15 7 3073 16 8 3585 17 9 4097 18 Note O NetSlot 4609 5121 5633 6145 6657 7169 7681 8193 8705 commencing at ShowNet Netslot 1 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 NetSlot 9217 9729 10241 10753 11265 11777 12289 12801 13313 XDMX Start ShowNet 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 NetSlot 13825 14337 14849 15361 15873 16385 16897 17409 17921 Where the XDMX start address is omitted the system defaults to sending the levels o Where you are to be using multiple consoles on a ShowNet network you should select different Sho
86. their default values are under the control of a cue or look you will see a black HL When you toggle Highlight off all attributes except Pan and Tilt will return to their previous value If you highlight conventional channels their intensity it taken to full as well Used in combination with the NEXT PREV key you can quickly find channels Lights with scrollers on them will be temporarily forced to Open White or the first color in the gel string LowLight takes the selected channel to Full and all other channels in the current cue list to 20 It does not affect any other attributes See Also Tools Flash Fixture or Output Controlling Moving Lights Channel Check Strand Lighting p278 Palette OS v10 RemDim or Remainder Dim Access the RemDim tool by pressing and holding the TOOLS button or T on the QWERTY keyboard then select S10 you may need to select lt more gt if RemDim is not visible Live Select Tool o o oo If RemDim was your last Tool then just pressing and releasing TOOLS will perform a RemDim If channel 1 is at 0 typing 1 REMDI M will take channel 1 to 100 or the Full level as set in Show Options and all other channels above 0 in the current cue list to 0 The second press of REMDIM will take all channels regardless of playback to 0 If channel 1 is at some level set by the current cue list typing 1 REMDIM will set all other channels above 0 in the current cue list t
87. these real world values in this case degrees that are used when fading cues not the DMX values The example below will demonstrate this with two cues Cue 1 and Cue 2 are programmed with a fixture that is capable of panning 540 degrees 270 to 270 Cue 1 takes the fixture to its pan stop at 270 degrees Cue 2 has it move in 10 seconds to a position of pan 90 degrees Strand Lighting pls Palette OS v10 O deg 270 deg 90 deg If we were to substitute this fixture out for a fixture that only has a total pan capability of 360 degrees and run the cue a Surprising but predictable thing happens When Cue 1 is active the fixture can t reach 270 degrees so it stops at its pan stop 180 degrees Then Cue 2 is executed which is a 10 second fade to 90 degrees For the first 5 seconds of Cue 2 the fixture doesn t move But when the Live display on the screen reads 180 degrees which is half way through the cue the fixture will start to move When Cue 2 is complete the fixture will be resting at 90 degrees 2 0 deg 30 deg phyacal limt of 180 hit Since the Universal Attribute Control Model doesn t figure out DMX values until the very last second it can also alter the way in which the conversion is done at run time producing new and exciting methods of transition during the fade from cue to cue Various attributes such as position and color lend themselves very nicely to working in different ways Color Space is descr
88. they run cues When working with color mixing capable lights UAC allows you to choose and crossfade in six different color spaces These are CMY RGB HSL Hue Saturation Luminance HSL Hue Saturation Luminance Prime and depicted in lower case so as not to confuse it with HSL hsv Hue Saturation Value and hsv Hue Saturation Value Prime The difference between the two Hue based color spaces and what the Prime means is explained below Lighting designers think of light as having three distinct properties color intensity of color and brightness This is not a discussion on shape and movement In the additive RGB color Space to change the color you need to change the ratio between the Red Green and Blue components If you wanted to change the intensity of the light you would have to project the vector of the new RGB value toward the largest valued primary color red green or blue With respect to color the same could be done with CMY but to simplify the example we don t want to get into the effects of a dimmer in the equation If you want to make a color brighter in RGB color space you need to keep the ratios between the Red Green and Blue the Same but increase them Changing any of these properties on the fly would take some clever mathematics on behalf of the programmer Horizon Control s UAC uses functions that manipulate the native color channels for you This math transforms the data at run time allowing you to program and fade
89. tilt mode 14 park 262 parts 43 patch 262 Patch Button 96 path 212 Pathport 262 PDF 309 pecking order 50 pendant 332 persist on override 50 phantom abstract attributes 14 pile on 201 pin 205 playback bubbles Playback Keys 97 playback master 100 plus 10 123 pointer 98 polar movement 14 popups 77 pots 248 power failure recovery 422 power off 408 power patch 307 power scheme 404 PowerPoint automation 362 precedence 50 preset groups 260 Strand Lighting p446 Palette OS v10 preset mode 10 preview 187 previous 166 print 406 print headers 290 print screen 417 priorities 248 processor 3 0 profiles 262 properties 169 88 purple track symbol 124 QWERTY 328 QWERTY control 328 R Raceway 304 radio buttons 86 rainbow 157 random selection 166 ranges of cues 169 rate 201 re order columns 196 recal 424 record 169 record options 174 recovery 328 red hat 317 redundant backup 420 redundant data 223 reference cues 260 refresh rate 328 relative times 151 release 328 release history software 425 release key 328 release notes control panel 376 release on record 287 release playback 103 Releasing 103 releasing channels automatically 285 rem dim 166 Rem Dim Button 120 remdim 279 remote focus unit 332 remote triggers 327 remote video 89 removing attributes from cues 164 removing cues 229 renumber 113 Renumber cues 113 221 report headers 290 resolution 65 retain cue dat
90. to point B The Damped profile slowly starts it up and then slowly parks it at the end Use it with the Linear Movement function provided by the Universal Attribute Control Model for real human like moves ZigZag Profile M7 wo D o w of Recorded Value H 4 DI OI z i m 20 AQ zi a 100 w Through Fade This silly ZigZag Profile provides a sense of humorous indecision when used on an intensity or movement transition See Also Blue Box Independent Timing Cue Properties Strand Lighting p217 Palette OS v10 Releasing amp Asserting Cue Lists Cue Lists can be active controlling channels by running cues or sitting in a cue or released not talking to any channels Release a Cue List There are multiple was to release cue lists o SELECT a cue list then press REL PB o Press on the QWERTY keyboard Click the Release button dillon the Cue List Tool Bar Press SHIFT REL PB or SHIFT to release all cue lists o Usea Macro to release a specified cue list Asserting a Cue List Asserting a Cue List means making it fully active again You will want to do this if another Cue Lists steals channels away from you and you want to regain control of them To do this press SHIFT GO or SHIFT SPACE The Cue List Pointer will not move but the all channels including tracking channels will fade to their correct value in the time set in Show Options Note You can also double click In the f
91. to pressing this button If this console is your backup and you want to launch a Tracking Backup session hold down CTRL before clicking this button Check the Up Time to see how long or if Palette is running If you see this icon the Control Panel is installing new software and you cannot launch Palette at this time Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p373 Palette OS v10 BlHardw are Test Use this button in the Palette Control Panel to start a hardware test The Palette software cannot be running while you perform the test so you must exit Palette before selecting this option Once you click on this button you will be presented with an image of your console Click it to Start the test Then choose the appropriate button in the top left of the screen to choose the section of the console you wish to test KBX Console Lights Ee Left Right alle As you enter the test screen all the LEDs on your console should be flashing Pressing a button will turn the square around the button blue and buttons or slider that you have visited will remain green If you have LEDs not flashing buttons that are not responding or buttons and Sliders that turn green before you touch them contact Entertainment Technology If you have console lights that are not responding check the bulb and then call ET if that doesn t fix it Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p374 Palette OS v10 Strand
92. to use the command line These examples assume that the console is setup in the Hardware Setup Console dialog box to use the ENTER SYNTAX Selecting Fixtures You can select and set levels on one line see Setting Levels below or you can make multiple selections pressing ENTER multiple times i e 1 ENTER 2 ENTER As long as you don t set an attribute the selection set will grow Once you change a level a new selection set will automatically be created and the previous selection set will be de selected but remain Captured 1 ENTER Selects channel 1 1 2 ENTER Selects channel 1 and 2 1 THRU 10 ENTER Selects channels 1 through 10 1 THRU 4 6 THRU 10 ENTER Selects channels 1 through 4 and 6 through 10 1 THRU 10 5 ENTER Selects channels 1 through 4 and 6 through 10 1 THRU 10 5 6 ENTER Selects channels 1 through 4 and 7 through 10 1 THRU 10 5 THRU 8 ENTER Selects channels 1 through 4 and 9 and 10 1 SHIFT THRU 100 ENTER Selects any channel with an intensity greater than 0 between channels 1 and 100 thru on 1 NEXT NEXT NEXT Selects channels 1 through 4 Strand Lighting p128 Palette OS v10 4 PREV PREV PREV Selects channels 1 through 4 After selecting channels you can roll the Wheel to adjust the level If you hold down SHIFT while rolling the wheel the level will change in finer steps for example
93. to use when you start your computer English United States US Installed services Select the services that you want for each input language shown in the list Use the Add and Remove buttons to modify this list FR English Canada Gay Keyboard US S9 English United States Preferences Language Bar Key Settings Input language English United Keyboard layout IME Back to Palette Control Panel O Strand Lighting p382 Palette OS v10 Screen Resolution and Screen Saver When you receive you console the screen resolution is set to 1024x768 and the screen saver is set for 15 minutes Changing the screen resolution If you find the display difficult to read you will want to lower the screen resolution If you have a good monitor that can support higher resolutions you may with to raise the screen resolution 1 1 From the Palette Control Panel choose the Screen Resolution button Display Properties z wn Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance settings ted ee ee L Display Plug and Play Monitor on 515 650 651 MESO Meas 740 Screen resolution Color quality Highest 32 bit e no Troubleshoot 2 2 Using the trackpad adjust the Screen resolution slider to the desired position 3 Strand Lighting p383 Palette OS v10 3 Click the OK button The screen m
94. turn red and show you the active fanning method Tool ran Center The TOOLS button LED will be on and whenever you adjust multiple channels attributes or times their values will be fanned To turn fanning off and change the adjustment method back to normal press the TOOLS button again The Tool bubble will turn pink and display the last active fanning tool used Tool Fan Center If at any time you want to use fanning again just press and release the TOOLS button If you want to change the fanning method press and hold the Tools button and press S7 to display the large pop up of all the fanning methods By default the fanning is spread out across all the selected channels evenly When the fan tool is active the fan effect can be m ultiplied by holding down SHIFT when rolling the wheel You then see how many times the fan is spread out across your selection set For example if you have twenty fixtures on two pipes if you Fan Pan Center you may get this Strand Lighting p275 Palette OS v10 effect If you then hold down SHIFT and roll the wheel until the Pan value shows as 2x the resultant effect is two fans across twenty fixtures Note The order in which you select channels matters when you use fanning Channel selection order is preserved when you record Looks and use them as Groups The Fan tool will automatically turn off when you change attribute families or release the selecte
95. two ways either using the com mand line or using the Blue Box Using the Command Line To patch using the command line first type a single channel number followed by then the output number Complete the command by pressing Enter Patch Fixture 1 to Output 55 Using the Blue Box Because of the very fast editing style of the Blue Box if you are typing more than one patch entry at a time with paperwork in front of you or someone reading you numbers this method is preferred The Patch by Channel display is already sorted by channel number so entering output numbers in a sequential fashion using the Blue Box is very fast Using the arrow keys position the Blue Box in the Intensity column of the patch display on the same line as the first channel number you have in your paperwork Press EDIT or Insert to open the box for editing Type the appropriate Patching Moving Lights to Outputs Adding moving lights to your show is as easy as patching dimmers J ust decide on which channel numbers are going to be your moving lights then change the Type from Dimmer to whatever you have in your rig Do this by moving the Blue Box to the Type column and pressing EDIT or Insert Strand Lighting p263 Palette OS v10 F1 Fisture Manufacturer Type FLCC LE rele aes m 1 silir PLP iy http mvarlite com F2 Fixture Model Manufacturer Press S1 to select the Fixture Manufacturer and S2 to select the Mod
96. use this option This option is more appropriate when the whole world should listen to you when you hit GO on this cue Every light in the house will be at your command Strand Lighting p175 Palette OS v10 Recording with this option is identical to using the Block command in the cue list If you record with this option on every time you have just turned Palette into a Preset desk Please note if you are using multiple cue lists recording with the All options is rarely desirable You will steal away every light from EVERY other cue list when you go into this cue Captured Attributes Captured lights are essentially under the programmer s control They cannot be controlled by Cues or Looks until they are released Captured channel may be marked as Changed and be ready for recording or they may just be Captured and not changed A good example of how a light can be Captured and not Changed is when you don t do a Release after doing a Record This is a Cue List Option One example of when you may want to record using the Captured option is when you have just completed a record command but also want to record the same stuff to a different place Record Option for Recording Looks The options for recording Looks are as follows Changed Attributes deltas This is the default record option when recording looks This is probably the option that will keep you out of trouble because you won t be dragging in a bunch of stu
97. when to use them here Read about other channel states here S4 Enter a Sub Master label in the text box S5 Check of Inhibitive tf you want this to be Master to be inhibitive See Look Types for details S7 If you are recording to an existing Look and want to Merge in the changes select Merge Merging in data means that the new data will be recorded to an existing cue not destroying data that is currently there If you are recording to an existing look and don t select Merge you will see the dialog box shown below after you press ENTER Strand Lighting p254 Palette OS v10 S8 Use the Exclude Sub Masters check box to select if you don t want to record levels set by other active Sub Masters This option is ON by default S9 The Attribute button opens a dialog box that allows you to filter what will be recorded in this look double press any key to solo that attribute o If you double tap S5 or any other softkey it will solo Position That is all other check marks will clear and Position will remain checked o While in the main Record dialog box if you press SHIFT the Attribute button will look like this HET land the softkeys will change to the following Pressing any of these changes the attribute masking without the need to open the Attribute dialog box You can also double tap any attribute family to solo it 6 6 Click OK or push Enter on the keypad to record the
98. when you turn a light back on it may not be in the position you thought you left it Do not run shows with this option set MIB Cue List Property If you prefer not to use MIB or only call for it when desired the easiest thing to do is adjust the Cue List Properties to Suppress MIB on the entire Cue List If you choose this option the Suppress Move In Black check box in the Cue Action dialog box becomes Use MIB and it not checked by default In Show Options Cue List there is an option to turn on Suppress MIB for all new Cue Lists See Also Controlling Moving Lights Strand Lighting p195 Palette OS v10 Cue Lists Cue List Directory The cue list directory in the upper left pane of the screen is the place where you manage your cue lists Curent f Remain Follow Fading o l Spot 2 Slow F Movea 2 0 Deg ort E 300 ash Sweep Bright b 3500 Entertr 2 43 Deg ot Audien 2 Strobe 1000 s Blues e ris Yvert Gate Chann 1 Allup Vert Focus Faint Edge of Stage 1 The columns provide you with live feedback on what each cue list is doing If you right click on a row you get a menu to move the position of the cue list get its properties or add and delete them Era Delete Move Up Move Down Properties Add Look Page Each columns in the cue list is described below Current The Cue Number and Label if labeled shown in this column is where the Cue List Point
99. which would appear Strand Lighting p152 Palette OS v10 as Fixture 1 thru 20 Intensity Time Relative 1 This would make the cue shown in the grid above appear like this lyre Oe be eek See Ps de is 1 38 1 5s 18s 21s 23s 26s 28s 31s 3 45 11 Te 13 E 15 16 I7 18 19 Pd l 3 634 3 43 ee 4 43 a 4 4 3 224 5 5al a 3h bs i Taking this one step further you can stagger the relative offset by typing 1 THRU 20 2 0 ENTER which would appear as Fixture 1 thru 20 Intensity Time Relative 2 to 0 If you used the grid above as a base the result would be eee te CAL See Poe an 3s 322 3 3s 3 5s 3 65 38 3 9s 4 15 4 35 4 45 1m Aiz 13 14 1h Th edit th amp 20 4 6sf 4 fs a lst 52s 5 5al 5 7 5 8 bs Note how Channel 1 had 2 seconds added to it and Channel 20 had nothing added to its time You can also shift a range of channels in the negative directions using the syntax 1 THRU 20 3 ENTER This ts a little odd to type because you have a followed immediately by a but on the command line it looks like this Fiture 1 thru 20 Intensity Time Relative 3 That would make the above grid look like this re ea A Us Gk ese Sy Pas db Os o 2s o 3s o5s o6s oss O 9s 11s 1 35 1 45 11 12 13 14 15 16 I7 18 19 ra 1 64 1 72 1 93 2 ls 2 23 24s 25s 27sl 2 85 os Adding Wait Times to Fade Timing The Independent Time command line syntax
100. will bank the lower buttons up 100 to select channels 101 through 200 and so on up to 1100 To select a channel press the corresponding button The red LED will begin to flash To deselect it press the button again Note You do not need to deselect channels if you change the preceding selection s attributes before making a new selection To select a range of channels press and hold the first channel in the range then press the last This works for deselecting ranges in the middle of selected channels Strand Lighting p322 Palette OS v10 Any channel that is currently being controlled by a Cue List or Sub Master and has an intensity level greater than 0 will show a solid red LED Palette Mode When the top left green LED is not on the Button Wing Panel is sectioned into four groups of 25 palettes A through Y The top left button which is labeled Channels is a toggle Press it once to change the mode to Channel Select press it again to put the Wing Panel into Palette Mode m s Ss Aag 4 f i F R i i _ oo i hh wW j i i f Ei i Fi d ii J i f F ion To assign Look Pages or Group Selects to the Banks A through D left to right check out the topic Hardware Setup Button Array Each bank has 25 palettes in it A through Y and is pageable to provide as many buttons as necessary using the up and down arrow buttons above each bank The amber LEDs on the arrow buttons will te
101. will be close enough Today s Astronomical Events For the location chosen you can see when each of the four astronomical events will occur based on the current time of you system To set Palette s clock and daylight savings time parameters check out Date and Time in Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p291 Palette OS v10 Show Save Options Touching S3 will open the Show Options dialog box S9 though S12 switch you between the different setup options See Also Show Options Default Cue List Options Venue Setup si Show Checkpoint Time If this value is non zero whenever a change to the show file has been made a checkpoint file spc will be saved to disk at regular intervals The Checkpoint file is saved in the same locations as the show file The FILE OPEN dialog box will allow you to open a Checkpoint file by changing the Files of Type combo If you do open a Checkpoint file you will do a SAVEAS the first time you choose SAVE The Uber Status will show you when the last Checkpoint file was written If your system crashes or you lose power when you recover the Checkpoint file will be opened rather than the show file Checkpoint File Found Checkpoint File is newer than show file open the Checkpoint File instead of the Show File w Yes K No Strand Lighting p292 Palette OS v10 You will need to verify you want to continue working with the Checkpoint file or the real sh
102. 0 1 e Press S4 CONTROL PANEL to change your Screen Saver Changing the Settings of My Pictures Slideshow allows you to point to your own directory of images that you place on the hard drive e Create a chase easily by selecting a range of cues ACTIONs with the Blue Box touch EDIT and select Follow After Fade Then select the NEXT CUE to be linked to the first e When controlling moving lights group multiple attributes together and control them simultaneously by holding down combinations of S1 S4 and rolling the wheel e Palettes can be nested If you build Position A from raw values then build Position B using Position A updating Position A will affect Position B e You can Flip moving head channels easily by using the FLIP Tool Do this and update the cue when the light took the long way round when running cues Strand Lighting p59 Palette OS v10 screen Layout Toolbars Palette has three different toolbars If you are not sure about any tool s function position the mouse pointer on a toolbar button without clicking The tool is highlighted and the Tool Tip display indicates the function lI Looks i Setup The functions of the Toolbars are detailed below Most of these functions have QWERTY keyboard equivalents Cue List Toolbar ep alee felt bel The Cue List Toolbar is located directly above the Cue List on the left side of the display The Autoscroll button turns the Autoscroll Cue List funct
103. 0 Unwerses 4 Universes 10 Whiverses 1 to 5632 17 Unwerses ta 6144 12 Universes to B656 13 Universes to 7168114 Universes to 7680 15 Universes ta 8192 1b Universes ta ar04 1 Universes to 276 18 Universes to 4720 7 4 Universes Choose how many XDMX universes you want to output to and return to the Live display These setting are saved in the show file Your Pathport network will now show Active DMX on Pathport Output nodes that are configured to listen on the selected universes In Pathport Manager you must set up the Output nodes to either listen on these XDMX addresses OR on these Quick Patch universes For more information on patching within XDMX universes see ShowNet See Also Patch ShowNet Strand Lighting p305 Palette OS v10 One to One Patch The default One to One Patch assigns output 1 to Channel 1 s Intensity etc Using this dialog box available via the Softkeys in the Patch Display you can patch ranges of channels 1 1 very quickly Tip o Use the Wheel to adjust the values o Use S4 to do the patch without closing the dialog box allowing you to do more than one range at a time See Also Patch Strand Lighting p306 Palette OS v10 Power Patch Power Patch allows you to patch large groups of consecutive channels at once For example say you want to patch channels 97 through 125 with outputs starting at 193 one output each Fixture Type Dimmer Enter t
104. 00 does not have a Color Wheel and the VL2000 Wash does not have a Gobo Wheel The attribute control windows at the bottom of the screen show you individual control of the various aspects of the selected attributes Sometimes two or more of these controls are string concatenated into a full description of what the attribute is doing within a single column The Gobo wheel on the VL1000 shown above is a great example When you selected Gobo after selecting the VL1OOO there at three controls that affect how the Gobo Wheel is going to behave gb Select gbMode gbSpeed Pinwheel _ RotCW 6RPM The first bubble Selects the specific gobo from the gobo wheel in this case Pinwheel Adjusting the Gobo Mode determines how the individual gobos will behave in this case the gobo will rotate Clockwise and the third bubble shows specifically how the behaviour is configured in this Strand Lighting pos Palette OS v10 case it shows Revolutions Per Minute but if the behaviour was to index the gobo it would show the angle in degrees from the home position You can read these bubbles from left to right like this The Pinwheel gobo will Rotate Clockwise at 6 RPM In the attribute grid it appears concatenated like this Pinwheel Rot Cv b RPM For more information on the relationship of control handles and attributes check out the topic Universal Attribute Control Model See Also Channel Grid Channel Colors and Symbols Cont
105. 12 will display You can use the console s softkeys directly or navigate the popup using the mouse the arrow keys or the wheel to select the desired value then press ENTER to choose It Pressing UNDO will close the list without changing the value While the popup is open you cannot use the mouse or touchscreen to click the softkeys Command Line Control of Attributes The first four softkeys that give you wheel control of the moving lights may also put text in the Strand Lighting p144 Palette OS v10 command line We say may because some parameters like Color Space Strobe values or Gobo Mode attributes must be adjusted by the wheel or Attribute Pop ups Here are some examples of attribute command line syntax O 1 S6 Color S2 Color A Cyan 50 ENTER appears as Live 1 Color A 50 1 THRU 10 S2 Pan 90 ENTER appears as and sets the Cyan value of channel 1 to 50 Live 1 thru 10 Pan 90 of channels 1 through 10 1 S2 Pan 90 ENTER appears as Live 1 Pan Relative 90 will pan channel 1 positive 90 degrees from its current location 1 THRU 10 S2 Pan 90 90 ENTER appears as Live L th ru 10 Pan 90 to J0 and enters scaled pan values evenly Spaced from 90 degrees to 90 degrees for channels 1 through 10 1 THRU 10 S2 Color Select 1 10 ENTER appears as Live L th ru L 0 Color L to 1 8 ond selects colors 1 through 10 on the color wheel such tha
106. 1975 when Tharon Musser used the Electronics Diversified LS 8 console on A Chorus Line This new technology allowed for unprecedented repeatability and a huge number of cues executed in record time As processing power was very limited decisions had to be made on how to execute these fades The technology and code development tools of the day dictated that each channel would be recorded in each cue This greatly simplified the process of playing back a show or more specifically jumping from scene to scene during rehearsals Remember in the old days of road boards getting to any place at random in the show almost always meant starting from the beginning and executing each cue to ensure accuracy LS 8 and others could do this with ease Kliegl quickly followed with the Performance and Strand with Multi Q and Broadway converted to computer control seemingly overnight People were blown away with the apparent new flexibility that these computers offered These early computer control systems did not emulate road boards but rather manual preset boards What designers eventually figured out given a bit of experience on these consoles was that they could not achieve the complex cue timing that two or three road board operators did in the past As these preset consoles recorded every channel in every cue they only moved from state to state This resulted in robotic or non organic fades It was only when Strand introduced the Light Palette that the technolo
107. 34 concept 10 Conclusion 38 conditional abstract attributes 14 console lights 328 control panel Controlling Colour 149 copy 113 crash recovery 422 crossfaders 313 cue 198 169 cue 0 103 Cue Button 106 Strand Lighting p441 Palette OS v10 cue list 100 cue list defaults 287 cue list properties 201 cue lists 206 cue numbers 220 cue only 190 cue profiles 212 cue properties 226 cue only 229 cues 1 9 D date 378 daylight savings time 378 days 206 DB9 connector 365 DBO 97 Dead Black Out 317 default values 142 defaults 285 Definition 15 delay time 241 deleting cues 110 designer s remote 89 DHCP 399 dim display 424 dimmer check 262 directory 196 disconnect remote video 70 display 65 DMX 262 DMX flavor 328 double black arrow 124 douse lamp 424 dual video 383 a ee e mail 415 edit 111 edit menu 221 editing blind 187 edits track foward 285 effects 157 ELO Touchscreens 391 enable outputs 328 enter syntax 328 Ethernet 301 evens 166 exclude look masters 253 external trackball 142 external triggers 327 fade profile 212 fade time 241 fader last one moved fader positions Strand Lighting p442 Palette OS v10 faders 312 fan low 424 fanned timing 151 file 70 file types 70 find fixture 278 fine movement 121 flat fixture model 14 flexi channel 262 flip 274 florescent ballasts 262 follow 226 follows 206 forward button 219 full key 116 function buttons Ge gap
108. 37 testing the hardware 374 text editor 416 thru 116 tilt invert 262 time 206 233 time events 290 time of day time zone 378 timing 151 tips 74 title 135 toggle buttons 86 tool bar 60 tools 275 touchpad setup 394 touchscreens 393 track sheets 191 trackball 142 tracking 169 tracking backup 420 trackpad setup 394 tricks 54 trigger wiring 326 triggers 326 turn off 408 twilight 290 two digit entry 328 two scene mode U uber status unblock cue 41 up time for system 419 update history 425 updating cues 105 upgrading software 372 USB DMX flavor 328 user interface macros 343 Strand Lighting p449 Palette OS v10 V variables 86 venue options 290 video 362 view 91 view properties 115 virtual palette access 322 Vision Net 348 volume 411 W wait time 241 wav 411 web 414 web page interface 357 web server 328 what to record 174 wheel 140 white block symbol 124 sN g XDMX 301 Strand Lighting p450 Strand Lighting strana LIGht BItG LIC Strand Lighting Asia 20 F Delta House 3 On Yiu Street Shatin N T Hong Kong Tel 852 2757 3033 Fax 852 2757 1767 Strand Lighting Europe Limited Unit 2 Royce Road Fleming Way Crawley RH10 SJY England Tel 44 0 1293 554 010 Fax 44 0 1293 554 019 DDI 44 0 1293 554 011 Strand Lighting Inc 6603 Darin Way Cypress CA 90630 USA Tel 1 714 230 8200 Fax 1 714 230 8173 www strandlighting com 2007 Genl
109. 5 DeleteTrack m1 SelCap 6 DelQOnly m2 SelDown 7 DelRetain m3 SelectCaptured 8 DelRetainData m4 SelectDn 9 DeleteTrack m5 SelectDown DelTrack m6 SelectEven l DelTracking m7 Selectl nvert DelAndTrack ms SelectOdd displayattributes m9 SelectOn lt displayblind m10 SelectPrevious displaylevels m11 SelectUp Cue displaylive m12 SelEven level displaypatch MIB Sell nv Q displaytimes MIBTime SelOdd AtCue end move SelOn atlevel enter next SelPrev backspace FirstCue out SelUp block FlashDMX pagedown Spec Strand Lighting p343 Palette OS v10 Clear ClearCommandLine col color colour copy cue cuetime del delay Note FlashFixture FlashOutput follow gobo group highlight home InTime LastCue Ppageup pgdn pgup pos position prev rec record rel special stepback stepforward thruon unblock update updt wait There is no keystroke recorder for macros You must manually form the HC UI Macro script Strand Lighting 0 p344 Palette OS v10 Variables Button Stations amp MIDI Notes To patch an ILS button station to a variable page enter the button station ID in the patch edit box using the syntax B for example B2 would connect the variable page to Button Station 2 the B must be capitalized ILS button stations should be in Remote Keypad mode o The optional VisionNet Interface card connects a Palette product to an VisionNet network o VisionNet 6 Button 8 Button and
110. 7 Goba 511 Time P wW OK Ps Cancel Note The Effects check box is disabled as Effects are owned by the cues not the selected channels Check off the Attribute Families that you want to capture and select OK The selected channels attribute families will become captured at their current levels and they will be marked with a delta symbol ready to be recorded Also check out the Record Options called Cue List State and All Levels Block Cue Sometimes those options may be more appropriate if you want to address all channels in the cue on mass S6 When discussing automated lighting looks you often refer to channels by the state they are currently in It would not be odd to hear Take all the blue dot gobos and make them stars Using Select Using Palettes is the easiest way to select and alter these channels The syntax is SELECT USING PALETTE BLUE which will select the blue channels then you would apply the Strand Lighting p166 Palette OS v10 STARS palette Pressing Select Using Palettes opens a dialog box Select Using Look Palette 51 Look Page Colar 52 Look Look 1 D a ys Look 2 511 Cue Look 4 Look amp LT BLUE Look 6 PINK Look 7 GREEN Look 8 MAG a ah 53 Look Number 2 w OF Pas Cancel Select the desired palette and select OK to select channels using that palette Live S7 Reserved S8 The Store and Recall selection set is a
111. A red level identifies captured attributes 28 or ENE To return a channel to normal control select the channel and Release it Note o If you are using the Hardware Setup Console option called Last Action Editing pressing Release will only deselect the channel The attributes will remain captured until a cue list asserts them or you press SHIFT UNDO o Simply selecting a channel does not make it Captured You must change the level of an attribute to capture it o You can easily capture the LIVE values of any selected Moving Light s attributes using the Select Softkey called Attribute Family See Also Release Channel s different states Selecting and Setting Channels Select Softkeys Record Options Hardware Setup Console Strand Lighting p136 Palette OS v10 Selecting and Setting Channels Intensity information for channels is shown in the Channel Grid with the channel number on the top row of numbers and the level on the bottom row Selecting a channel is the first step towards setting or modifying levels Channels may be selected with either the mouse or with keystrokes or you may use the LightPalette VL Button Wing Panel Note Moving Light Attributes are shown in the Attribute Grid Also see Controlling Moving Lights Selected channels are identified in the channel grid by a red highlight around the channel number and level or in the attribute grid as text with a light blue background 28 or t 50 T
112. Chair Set 0 0 Fi Way Way Back 0 32 Launch the Print command from the File Menu and you will be presented with the Print to PDF dialog box Print to PDF 51 ltem To Print EJA rB Summary 52 Fage Size C 1 C D Summary Patch By Fixture Patch By Output 53 Onentation 54 Select All C QurShow pdf US Letter 8 1 2 11 in v Portrait K Cancel Choose the Items you want to print and select a PDF File destination You can also change whether the document will be formatted horizontally or vertically and what size of paper it should ultimately be printed on If you console is hooked to the Internet and you have set up a Outlook Express account you will Strand Lighting p309 Palette OS v10 be able to e mail these documents right from the PDF reader s toolbar SE gle Edit View Document Tools Window Help Open rm Save a Copy Print a Email You should also check out the topic Network Printers in the Palette Control Panel O Strand Lighting p310 Palette OS v10 Hardware Setup Hardware Setup Selecting Hardware Setup from the main softkey menu allows you to configure how different bits of your console operate Palette is highly configurable and it is well worth reading and understanding all of the options available to you To find out more about each option click on the Specific area below Strand Lighting p311 Palette OS v10 Hardware Setup Priority Selecting Har
113. Channels Using Palettes etc You can even store your own selection set similar to Memory Store and Memory Recall on a calculator e Using the command line you can alter intensity levels relative to their current position using the 1 THRU 10 15 ENTER syntax The command line will read Up when you press Similarly you can press for Down If you re controlling moving light attributes the puts the word Relative in the command line e Opening the Hardware Setup allows you to assign Macros to the back panel triggers J ust Short out Pins 1 amp 2 or 1 amp 3 to fire the macros e The Universal Attribute Control Model gives you six different Color Spaces to select and fade your color mixing Channels e The Fan tool allows you to evenly spread out attribute values using one of the following functions Center Right Left Ends Random Random Positive Sine and Tangent You can also repeat the fan throughout your selection set e If you have the Light Palette VL with the Button Array Wing Panel you can make the buttons first select the channels then apply their recorded levels with a second press e When controlling moving lights double hit the softkey for an attribute to display a large pop up with fixed attribute values The softkeys 1 through 12 map to these values for very quick access e The command line supports relative movement of moving light attributes For example you can type 1 T
114. Channels to Record Channel Resolution Show Option Released channels are channels that are not captured for use in a pending record operation These channels may be at their default level i e not controlled by anything or they may be set to a level by a currently active Cue List or Sub Master Examples of Released channels 28 28 28 80 Selected channels are channels that have been addressed and are pending immediate hands on control Selected channels that have not Changed and are not Captured can still be controlled by active Playbacks or Sub Masters Selected channel Only Strand Lighting p65 Palette OS v10 Selected and Changed Changed channels are currently or recently under control after being selected but not yet recorded These channels are necessarily Captured Changed Selected and Captured Captured channels have likely have changed and are pending a record If you are in the LIVE display these channels will not be controlled by Cue Lists or Sub Masters If you do a record the Changed delta symbol is removed but the channels are still Captured meaning that Cue Lists and Sub Masters will not control their level until they are released Captured channel not Selected but Changed 28 A Captured channel Selected and Changed 28 80 Captured Not Changed not Selected probably just Recorded but not released Strand Lighting p66 Palette OS v10 28 Note o You can
115. Cue List Pointer for running cues in the Cue Time column if scroll lock is off This allows you to easily change the fade time on the last cue run if necessary If this icon shows Scroll Lock is on Autoscroll is off i e You ve stuck the cue list to where you want it to be where you re working You can use the Blue Box or the scroll bar at the right of the Cue List to scroll through the cues manually The softkey will look like this 59 Scroll Lock When you turn Scroll Lock off the cue list will refresh to show you the current cue third from the top Note If you move the Blue Box with the arrow keys the Scroll Lock will turn on automatically so that the current cue does not keep trying to refresh the position of the cue list See Also Toolbars Cue List Strand Lighting p205 Palette OS v10 Blue Box The lower left pane of the main window displays the currently selected Cue List The arrow keys will always move the Blue Box between cells It is with this Blue Box that you will do most of the cue management including labeling cues change cue properties such as times inserting follow commands adding macros moving and deleting cues and cue parts See Also Timing Part Cues Independent Timing Labeling a Cue Using the ARROW KEYS move the Blue Box to the cell you want to change N 2 Press the EDIT button to put the Blue Box into edit mode Note The QWERTY equivalent of EDIT is INSERT 3
116. D things will be just as you left them e To see how to work with Looks in Blind enter Blind and follow the instruction discussed in the Load topic To View and Or Change the Contents of A Look in Blind 1 Select the Blind display by either method shown above 2 Press LOAD or SHIFT B to open the Load dialog box 3 Press LOOK or S12 to display the Look tab SubPaget OOOO o 3 Amber Fronts 4 Blue Wash 3 Pink Sides B6 alie Sides t Podium 8 OM Wash 19 Gobo Wash 4 Choose the desired Look Page and Look and select OK The contents of the look are shown on the Channel Grid 5 Alter the look by Selecting and Setting Channels or Releasing Attributes making any changes you like to its contents 6 Press UPDT or U to update the loaded Look Note e To record the changes to a different Look or Cue use the Record button rather than Update e You can return to LIVE even when you are working on things in BLIND When you come back to BLIND things will be just as you left them e To quickly load a Look press LOAD BUMP See Also Load Updating Cues Recording A Cue Edits Track Forward Strand Lighting p188 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p189 Palette OS v10 Edits Track Forward When updating an existing cue that is not at the end of your Cue List you can uncheck the Edits Track Forward option in the Record dialog box This will mean that any changes you make in this cue w
117. HRU 10 PAN 90 ENTER e If you want one group of channels to move at a different rate than others in the same cue you can either move those channels to a different part or use the Independent Timing where each and every attribute of every channel can have its own wait and fade time This is handy if you want staggered times and are not concerned about managing parts in the cue list To access Independent Timing press SHIFT EDIT e The four round buttons below the encoders on the Light Palette open large popup lists for the attribute values currently assigned to those encoders Spinning the encoder will highlight different values and pressing the button again will put those values live to stage e If you enter a range of cues in the Record Cue dialog box you have the option to record values in all cues in the range or to just record in the first cue and track through the rest e Time Events can trigger on specific days of the week or month and have hourly or daily repeat frequencies e Cues can steal away from active Sub Masters if both are at the same priority but by default Sub Masters are recorded with Priority 9 whereas Cues are Priority 10 e Use SHIFT with the arrow keys to select multiple cells with the blue box in the Cue List This is handy for changing many cues times all at once This is also how you select multiple cues to delete move or copy before touching the DEL MOVE or COPY keys Loops are easily creat
118. Highlight or Lowlight Tools Captured Channel attributes on the keypad with red levels nhibitive Look levels intensities only in order of Priority ao eS YS Additive Look levels intensities and attributes in order of Priority and Cue List levels Latest Takes Precedence or Highest Takes Precedence in order of Priority Note o The affect of the Grand Master and Black Out Button can occur before or after Captured intensity attributes based on how it is setup o Palette s Latest Takes Precedence cue lists do not get automatically released when other cues take full control of all the attributes used in them Their values are still valid and if the domineering more recent cue list gets released the values from the original cue list will get a chance to write to the stage again Some may refer to this domineering behaviour as Stomping and the behaviour of re writing to the stage after the release as Persist on Override o It s interesting to note that intensities recorded in Looks often thought of as traditional submasters do not always win over cue lists at the same priority By default the attributes are resolved on an LTP bases unless the Look has specifically been marked HTP This ensures that the recorded look will appear on stage when the look handle reaches the top of its travel even if it must reduce the level of some Channels See Also Channel s different states Channel Colors and Symbols Priorities HTP v
119. I SMPTE Interface The MSC format is as follows FO 7F lt device_ ID gt 02 lt command_format gt lt command gt lt data gt F7 Note O o Palette is lt device D gt 0 by default O o Nomore than one command can be transmitted in a Sysex System Exclusive command The total number of bytes in a Show Control message should not exceed 24 o Sysex s must always be closed with an F7H as soon as all currently prepared information has been transmitted Q_ number and Q list are expressed as ASCII numbers 0 9 encoded as 30H 39H with the ASCII decimal point character 2EH used to delineate subsections Palette uses a best match method to determine the cue list name based on the label used in Cue List Properties For example a cue list named 01 Main would be referenced by MSC as Cue List 1 or 31H Example On Device 0 a GO on Cue 235 6 in cue list 36 6 would be represented by the hex data FO 7F 00 02 01 01 32 33 35 2E 36 00 33 36 2E 36 F7 The MSC commands supported by Palette include 01 GO Starts a transition or fade to a cue Transition time is determined by the cue in the Palette If no Cue Number is specified the next cue in numerical sequence GOes If a Cue Number is specified that cue GOes Transitions run until complete If the Controller wishes to define the transition time TIMED GO see below should be sent 01 GO lt Q Number gt optional required if Q_list is sent 00 delimiter lt Q list gt optio
120. L2000 Spot 7 100 100 76 15 VL2000 Spat t 40 amp 40 76 H 16 VL2000 Spot T 100 100 76 BE 1 VL2000 Spat tids 0 B VL2000 Spot 0 tins 40 19 VL2000 Spat 100 4 0 t 100 100 76 B 20 VLa000 Spot 4 0 tins 40 Tt 100 0 100 76 BF 21 L2000 Wash T 40 Ii i When you enter the dialog box the Cue List combo box will be empty Press S1 to select the desired Cue List As the cues are read into the Track Sheet the progress and total number of cues retrieved will be displayed to the right of the Cue List combo All the channels in your show are displayed along in the rows and the recorded cue in the selected Cue List are displayed in the columns If a column header s text ends in then there is more text to the cue s label than can t be displayed because of the width of the column Either re size the column by double clicking on the column separators or hover over the text and a tool tip will display the entire cue label You can move around the display by using the horizontal and vertical scroll bars at the bottom and right hand side Channel that have a plus symbol to their left have more attributes than just intensity The intensity is displayed on the row but if you want to examine the movements of the other attributes just click on the plus symbol The channel will explode to show you the additional attributes Strand Lighting p191 Palette OS v10
121. Lighting p341 Palette OS v10 limit the top 110F will be the hottest temp math min temp 130 normalize between 1 and 12 rounding down cue 1 math floor temp 11 130 run the cue sequence HC CueListGotoAndExecuteFollows Temperature cue See Also www lua org Macro Editor and Commands User Interface Macros Macro Buttons Time Events Triggers Cue Properties Blue Box PowerPoint Automation Strand Lighting p342 Palette OS v10 User Interface Macros The Scripts in the Macro Editor are very powerful but especially powerful is the HC UIMacro call Using this call alone properly formatted you can almost completely automate a console as if Someone was pressing the buttons very quickly If you have not already familiarized yourself with the syntax and operation of Scripts it would be good to review the topic Macro Editor and Scripts Once you have an handle on that writing the HC UI Macros is a snap The format is HC UI Macro macro info macro info For example HC UIMacro 1 10 5 enter HC UI Macro 1 5 enter selectodd O0 enter HC UI Macro M1 The accepted characters that do not have to be enclosed in s are 0 through 9 and the characters lt and The text inside the braces is case insensitive 0 delete lens release 1 DeleteCueOnly link ReleaseAllPB 2 DeleteQOnly load ReleaselnTime 3 DeleteRetain look RellnTime 4 DeleteRetainData loop remdim
122. Lighting p375 Palette OS v10 Read Release Notes Each and every software update to Palette will have accompanying Release Notes to tell you what is new or what has changed in the latest software release After you install the software a dialog box will pop up showing you the release notes If you want to go back and read them ata later date use this button in the Palette Control Panel Also see Release History If there is only one set of release notes initial install clicking this button will open up the notes directly Otherwise you will be presented with a dialog box asking you to choose which notes you want to read Choose release notes The notes will be sorted by date Either double click on the desired one or select it and choose the Show Notes button amp June 9 2004 12 00 Microsoft Internet Explorer a X File Edit View Favorites Tools Help wr es x BE A Ms Search SF Favorites a Media Ea l SE 5 Address D Savedinstalls ReleaseNotes2004 07 05 htm pa ET Go Links N Date June 9 2004 i j EngineVer 0 1 53 UI Ver 0 1 35 horizoncontrol com AFi jiita Ser f wear a Use the scrollbar to the left to browse the notes Click on any links in the notes for further information some links may attempt to connect to the World Wide Web Close this Explorer window when you are done Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p376 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p377
123. Method Download it directly from the Strand Lighting Web Site to D o Media Method Copy it to D from the supplied USB stick using Windows Explorer which you start from the Control Panel Note Remove the media before Step 2 Re boot the system for the changes to take affect After the system starts up the Control Panel may appear and display the message Ibs aN 1 4 Once the new software has been installed the Palette software will run and the process Is finished 5 The EXE file you placed on D will be moved to the folder D SavedlInstalls Tip If at any time you want to roll back to a previous version of Palette software all you needed to do is launch Windows Explorer from the Control Panel and move the appropriate file from D SavedInstalls back to D and re boot the system Alternate Method of Upgrading Software You can simply place the software on a USB stick and re boot the system Palette always looks to removable media upon startup for software updates This is why it is important not to leave the update USB sticks in the system This method does not archive the install but you can always store the USB Stick 0 Strand Lighting p372 Palette OS v10 Console Group Launch Show Palette Use this button in the Palette Control Panel to Launch Palette if it is not running or bring the main window to the front if it is If the Control Panel is visible pressing the Spacebar is equivalent
124. Note Strand Lighting p185 Palette OS v10 You can either see or hide values that are tracking into the loaded cue by toggling the Track Toolbar Button Track Ii you have NOT selected the Clear on Load option i e you are layering ideas or HAVE selected Load Cue s State option i e you are collapsing cues this toggle has no affect 1 Make the changes to the cue as necessary You can remove channels from a cue by selecting them and hitting UNDO or ESC Also see the topic called Release for examples of how to Release individual attributes 2 Press UPDT or U to update the cue After choosing OK the Captured channels will be released and the Loaded Status Bubble will be cleared If the loaded cue is prior to the active cue the changes will fade when you hit GO If the loaded cue is after the current cue when you press UPDT the channels will be released immediately and return to their proper levels as determined by the console s Fadel Resolution Note o To record the changes as a different cue number use the Record button and enter the new number in the appropriate text box o You can return to LIVE even when you are working on things in BLIND When you come back to BLIND things will be just as you left them See Also Updating Cues Blind Status Window Edits Track Forward Strand Lighting p186 Palette OS v10 Blind Display The Blind display lets you load create preview or modify Cues and Look
125. Options 398 action 239 334 active attributes 166 active magic sheets 357 adding look pages 83 additional applications 418 additive look masters additive looks 248 additive submasters 251 adjust 179 all channels block 174 apply levels 260 architectural button stations 345 archive 309 archived show files 292 assert 218 asserting 218 asserting cue lists 198 astronomical events 352 attribute behavior 257 attribute grid 68 attribute substitutions auto 235 auto run 201 auto scroll 60 automate channel check 282 autoscroll 205 198 B back 101 background 201 backup 420 ballyhoo 157 BG 201 bitmap images 417 blackout 97 Strand Lighting p440 Palette OS v10 blind 112 179 Blind Button 95 block cue 41 blue arrow 124 Blue Box 43 blue triangle 124 bold text 206 British release key 328 browser control 328 build cues 169 busking 257 button array 322 320 button stations 86 Cx Capacities 12 Capio 304 captured channels 164 Caputred 174 CD audio 411 century array 322 change 179 change cue number 221 changed 174 channel 282 65 channel grid 63 383 channel title 135 channels to record 174 character sets 378 chase 239 chase down 201 chase up 201 chases 157 checkpoint files 292 choose 100 circle 157 circular reference 124 clear 119 clearing attributes 142 clock icon 151 color 124 color picker 280 color space 285 colors and symbols 124 column width 196 com port 367 commands 3
126. Palette s IP address in their personal browser s address line impale Browser Conte Mirrmali internet Fuplores Ei i ay j yin Bj wiin Tri mt Hi a E Prl y Rounetien g L i ji er Pe E aa a Blin Marquee Browser Control Example A B Cue List Control D iio on AUK F BRelomec IVE C O Cue List Control Poe On CT F Wus G b Look Master Control d Full Chil E Lh Full Chil S bull Chi Fadl Chil Bd Lamel mrene Any links you have to other pages or embedded graphics or animation etc will be visible on the machine surfing the site Any time the user clicks a Palette specific link Palette will execute the script immediately Strand Lighting p359 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p360 Palette OS v10 ms Media Player Control Palette has Macros such as Play File Pause and Stop that allow you to control the Processor s Media Player to play CD s Wave files MP3 s or MPEG s Palette can also read the Time Code off of these files and use it as SMPTE for use in synchronizing Cue Lists to You can read the current media file s play head location in the Status Bubbles my To read Time Code from the Windows Media Player the Palette Media Player Communications Plug in must be enabled Help Download Search for Media Files F3 Plug ins Fi Marquee Me License Management i aah pa Download Plug ins di a Player Commu
127. S1 to select it then S3 to scroll through the Looks until you have highlighted the desired one If you press S5 the currently selected Look will be pumped to the stage for preview purposes If you cancel out of this dialog box the original levels will be restored If you uncheck S4 Apply As Palette the raw data will be applied to the selected attributes like Strand Lighting p260 Palette OS v10 this Intensity Color If you have S4 Apply As Palette checked than the name of the Look gets applied rather than the raw data If you then record this delta value into a cue or another Look when the cue runs it will ask Sea Blue for values before putting them to the stage That way if Sea Blue ever changes you don t have to update the cues using it This practice is particularly useful on touring shows where positions may change from night to night Using Cue Levels Palette not only allows cues to reference stored Looks but you can also use Cues themselves as indirect references That is a Cue can look to another cue for a value or in fact a Look can look to a Cue for a value To open the Apply Levels dialog box using the command line select the desired channels then type CUE F out B back two f Mid Two 0 floor two Sout 10 back two amp Bono 17 mid two eH P F i i ij i rt ee T L WALES l rea P ll Atih Fas as 4 A TDLLES M F E a iil a
128. SE once will drop the last effect added Pressing RELEASE twice will drop the channel intensities and Pressing RELEASE a third time will drop everything that has been changed and not recorded Or 1 You are in a recorded state Thus meaning you are situated in a cue or look state The principal to removing an effect whilst in this state is to always re visit the area which the effect is being controlled by This would be either the colour function for colour effects or the intensity level for new intensity effects etc To remove an intensity effect the channels with the effect need to have their intensity level adjusted To remove a colour effect you need to enter the colour control S6 and adjust the colour In both cases you will see the effect stop automatically Effects Grid Right click in the Effects grid to expose the popup list Strand Lighting pl6l Palette OS v10 Double Press S10 to change highlighted effect or use the mouse to change highlight Highlighted effect s attributes will appear on S1 through S4 and by pressing S10 again you will be shown more attributes of the effect Chase Effects Chase options include Hard Soft and Variable crossfades Forward Backwards Bounce and Random order Chase effects recorded in your main cue list use other pre recorded source cue lists or look pages to pull values from Good practice dictates that you change the source s properties to filter out any unw
129. Status box S8 Save Show is available when the default softkeys are displayed Time The Time of Day and date is displayed You can set the date and time of your console through the Control Panel HW Status This will tell you if your Palette hardware is either On Line or Off Line or whether or not the outputs are enabled Use the Help drop down to view the Hardware Status dialog box to view your Hardware type serial number and what type of processor and what amount of memory your system has The total number of channels your system is authorized for and other additional options such as Remote Focus Unit or Remote Video authorization is also shown Strand Lighting p81 Palette OS v10 here Playbacks A display of playbacks real or virtual is displayed lt none gt 3 lt none gt 3 cenone lt none gt 4 none 6 lt none gt none gt i cenone 9 lt none gt 10 lt none gt 41 lt none gt 12 cenone See Also File Menu checkpoint files and mirrored saving Hardware Setup Grand Master and Black Out Button Load SMPTE Time Code on Cue Lists Enable Outputs Recovery Strand Lighting ps2 Palette OS v10 Look Pages Looks are recorded and arranged on Pages You can see the Look pages by selecting the Looks Display Display Looks or pressing the S5 Display softkey and select Looks from the pop up list es j Setup Look Page l it Looks l Attributes o Sub Page 2 0 All su
130. Version User Interface v10 0 0 Version Congratulations on the purchase of your Strand Lighting Palette Lighting Control Console For general help use the Contents Index or Search tab on the left Check out the Software Revision History Palette is a powerful yet easy to program and operate theatrical control system that truly does marry dimming and automated control like no other desk The key is in the software design using a Graphical User Interface together with a control surface that gives you all the direct access that you have come to expect from a professional lighting console The core fade engine works on the Last Action philosophy meaning levels and attributes stay put until another control moves them freeing you from recording all channels in all cues This lends itself nicely to the multiple cue list environment that Palette also boasts Below are links to full fledged help topics that describe some of the keys features that make Palette a very powerful desk o Universal Attribute Control Model Horizon Control s UAC is a whole new way of thinking about controlling moving lights It frees the designer from the crazy world of DMX charts and lets you think of the lights in your rig as tools to aid you in your design o Adding Effects with Palette is as easy and convenient as making a gobo rotate clockwise Effects can be added to any attribute or attribute family and from that point onward in the show the parameters of the
131. X channel down to individual real world concepts For example if you are rotating a gobo continuously at 5 RPM you don t need to see the control that gives you indexing from O to 360 degrees Instead you have the option to change the RPMs or the direction Clockwise vs Counterclockwise Typically the units of a tweeker are determined by the mode of the bubble directly to its left For example if the gobo mode is to rotate then the units are RPM If the mode is index then the units are Degrees Strand Lighting p146 Palette OS v10 Attribute Filtering on Record When you record cues and looks you have many options including the ability to filter out different attribute families In the record dialog box you will find the S9 button marked Attributes When you select this button you will be presented with the Attribute Fam ilies dialog box Select which families you want included in the record operation and press OK to return to the record dialog box Note o These attribute options are also available when copying and moving cues looks or channel attributes or when updating Looks or Cues o You can easily capture the LIVE values of any selected Moving Light s attributes using the Select Softkey called Attribute Family o Any dialog box that has Attribute Filtering allows you to press and hold SHIFT to change the Attribute button to look like this The attribute family dialog box will not open but the softkeys will
132. Z500 Spot yellow oss 0 B 6 520 B J ser 8 10 622 A717 523 Bile 524 B13 525 6 14 526 6 15527 6 16 525 B 17 529 6 16 530 6 19 537 B20 532 B77 533 Bgg 934 VL2500 Spot Magenta VL2500 Spot Colour Wheel L2500 Spot Edge VLZSUU Spot Stobe L2500 Spot Zoom VL2Z5U0 Spot Gobe 1 VL2500 Spot Gobo 2 Hi VL2500 Spot Gobo 2 Lo VL2500 Spat ins 02 0 0 6 0 5 127 os 0 Br 1B 0 0 06 0 50 127 100 255 10024 255 100 256 VL2500 Spot Col Time 100 255 VL2500 Spol Lens Time VL2SU0 Spot Gopa Time 100 255 Talal F r TOO 254 J7 0 However there are times when you want to change the DMX address for a particular attribute In particular you may do this when working with RGB devices on a cyclorama Step 1 Strand Lighting p269 Palette OS v10 In the Patch by Channel Fixture assign the Type as RGB for the channel Chan Fixture Dimmer Type DMX oMx2 DMS Settings Int VL2500 Spot Enhanced 16 Bit Atr 6 1 575 Irit AGE 3 Channel Col Step 2 In the Patch by Output use the command line to patch the attribute to the required channel Output B 3 7 549 Patch to Fixture 2 Green ar al mj i amp l Strand Lighting p270 Palette OS v10 Tools Tools Tools are handy utilities that make your programming easier The TOOLS button or T button gives you access to the last tool you used and work
133. a MediaPlayerF layF ie TE Seria nen i Macro ILSLockCommandidevice_id 0 1 Senalw nite A Descnption Set the ILS device_id 0 to 255 to Locked 1 or Undocked 0 HandwareConsoleLights ALSSetScere LaLockLommarnd SieBot P5153 Insert 181 Comment 52 Arguments Argument Value 510 Status String d lock 1 unlock 0 D Strand Lighting p347 Palette OS v10 Vision Net Palette OS may be controlled from a Strand Lighting Vision Net System allowing sophisticated integration between an Architectural Lighting system and the control console To enable this function the Vision Net interface on Palette OS needs to be enabled This is done in the Hardware Setup for the console and by assigning a Variable page to receive information from Vision Net Enabling the Vision Net Interface The port used for Vision Net is selected in Console Section of the Hardware Setup followed by Console Change the Vision Net port to COM1 as above Note This is a global setting and only needs to be set once since it is stored separate from the show file Linking Vision Net actions to the console Events from Vision Net panels appear as Variables inside the console To make use of these variables they need to be patched in and connected to actions inside the console Open the Variables Display Display Vaiables and Right Click to add a new Variable Page by selecting Add Variable Page Strand Lighting p348
134. a 229 revision history 425 RFU 332 RGB 14 Strand Lighting p447 Palette OS v10 RGB selector 280 riggers remote 332 RS232 367 RS232 commands 365 3S save 409 scratch pad 416 screen layout 91 screen resolution 383 screen saver 383 screen shot 417 scripts 337 scroll lock 205 Scrollers 267 second monitor 72 select 137 selected 174 selects 322 serial input 367 serial number serial out 365 serialized show files 292 series of cues 169 set 206 setting levels 140 setup 311 shift button 121 shifting times 151 shortcut keys 77 show control 367 show history 292 show options 290 ShowNet 301 shutdown 408 shutter control 142 single digit entery 328 size 383 slide shows control 362 Slider panels 312 311 small movements 142 sneak 164 softkeys 122 software current version 74 software revision history 425 software upgrade process sound cues 411 space bar 438 Spade symbol 124 splayed timing 151 split fade times 206 split up down time squares law 262 stage manager s display 89 staggered timing 151 state 1 74 static IP address 399 status step 102 Strand Lighting p448 Palette OS v10 step back 102 60 step forward 219 60 stomping 51 stop 60 stop button 60 strike lamp 424 submasters 312 suck 166 sunrise amp sunset 352 suppress MIB 226 surfing 414 swap pan tilt 262 symbols 124 synchronize 201 system capacities 12 system setup 370 T telnet 367 telnet connections 3
135. a range of cues either type CUE X THRU Y REC or by pressing REC first to open the Record Dialog box enter the range using the X Y syntax in the S2 field Record Cue 51 Cue Lit AYE i 52 Number 45 gt orstart end 53 Record Changed Attributes deltas vi haza _ ja i 58 Exclude Look Masters 59 Attributes All Attributes 512 Look 510 Edits Track Forward a w OK F Cancel As soon as you type the symbol for Thru the Label Cue Timing and Update control become Inactive When recording through a range of cues new cues will never be created as this type of recording is necessarily an Update operation When you press OK you will be presented with this dialog box Strand Lighting p172 Palette OS v10 Record Confirmation Do you want to merge the new values by blocking them into each cue or use tracking and not black values E 51 Block new values into cue range Ps Cancel If you select Block new values into cue range each cue in the range will get the new values as determined by the Record Options you selected with S3 in the Record dialog box This may result in Redundant Data which may or may not be desirable normally only desirable in multiple cue list environments where you want to be sure each cue will be in total control of those lights regardless of what other cue lists are doing By default S2 Track new values
136. a single cue list o You start out by doing a tiny bit of work on the first scene You know you re going to return to clean it up later o You then do a lot of work on the second scene of the show and are quite pleased with yourself You then go back to Scene 1 and continue working When you get around to running Scene 2 later there are things in there you didn t expect to see They tracked from the first scene To prevent this from happening what you should do is BLOCK the first cue of Scene 2 You can either choose to do it before you start working on Scene 2 or after you re happy with it It doesn t matter Just do it before you go back to work on cues in Scene 1 When you do a horizontal line will be drawn above the cue you blocked No information will track past that line but rest assured the cue below the line has all the information to make sure that there are no Surprises on stage Release Bally Enter Blocking Cues To block a cue click on the desired cue then right click to open the Cue List Right Click menu Strand Lighting p223 Palette OS v10 Unblock Cues Unblock Entire Cue List Block Cues Block Entire Cue List Choose Block Cues Note o You can also select multiple cues using the Blue Box to Block more than one cue at a time o The syntax CUE 75 5 S5 BLOCK is also valid cue ranges are also allowed Warning If you are using multiple cue lists in your show you may want to reconsider blo
137. alette Control Panel O Strand Lighting p396 Palette OS v10 Keyboard Options If you want to change the repeat properties of the keys on your QWERTY keyboard choose Keyboard Options from the Palette Control Panel Keyboard Properties Speed H ardware Character repeat oN Repeat delay Repeat rate Slow Click here and hold down a key to test repeat rate l Cursor blink rate re J Fast Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p397 Palette OS v10 accessibility Options Use the Accessibility options in the Control Panel to change things such as e Sticky Keys one press on Shift then one press on letter to get an upper case letter e Change display to use High Contrast or change the cursor blink rate e Enable MouseKeys to allow the arrow keys to move the cursor Accessibility Options Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General Stickykeys Use StickpRevs it you want to use SHIFT CTRL ALT or Windows logo key by pressing one key at a time Settings Filterk ens Use Filtereys iF you want Windows to ignore brief or repeated keystrokes or slow the repeat rate Use FilterKeys Settings Togalek eys Use Togglekeys if you want to hear tones when pressing CAPS LOCK NUM LOCK and SCROLL LOCK Use ToogleKeys Settings Show extra keyboard help in programs a Back to Palette Control Panel Strand L
138. all have Follow times and a Link back from the last Cue in the Loop to the first Cue in the Loop See Playback Loops 1 View the properties of the Cue List by pressing VIEW SELECT OR right click ona Cue List in the Cue List directory and select Properties The Cue List Properties dialog box will appear 2 To Override the value defined in Show Options check the box to the left of Go Action Inside Loops da Wal jem sro Inha Ld I Pe LO T Override Pee tee 4 F al LUE LIL H Bll LOUCE LMR TTT E We LIED p EeEEgazZE IME ee 3 Select from the list to the right o Next cue Strand Lighting p239 Palette OS v10 o Go to the next Cue within the Loop This is what the Go button does normally in a cue list if you press Go when a fade Is executing Fall out of loop o Execute all remaining cues within the loop in their cue time then execute the cue after the loop Jump out of loop o Execute the first cue after the loop in its cue time If you are running a normal Go Show and a continula loop was built for a specific effect this is the best way to stop the loopedeffect and continue with the show o Restart Execute the first Cue in the Loop i e Goto top See Also Cue List Properties Program List Properties Playback Loops Strand Lighting p240 Palette OS v10 Part Cues Part cues are a method of adding different timing for different groups of channels to use in a single cue Generally you
139. ame t was tripped at os date X on os date x n close the file so other applications can access it f close If you had four sensors one in the Entrance one at the Exit one in the Theater and one in the Great Hall the log file may look like this Entrance was tripped at 11 11 37 on 05 15 06 Exit was tripped at 11 11 51 on 05 15 06 Theater A was tripped at 11 12 40 on 05 15 06 Great Hall was tripped at 11 15 52 on 05 15 06 Theater A was tripped at 11 21 22 on 05 15 06 Exit was tripped at 12 01 46 on 05 15 06 Entrance was tripped at 12 22 17 on 05 15 06 Example Temperature Indicator using Serial Port Communication In this example an external temperature sensor is hooked to Palette using one of the serial ports At specific intervals the current temperature is read and different cues are run to indicate to the public using color or movement the temperature A Time Event with an hourly repeat executes this code open Com1 with proper parameters HC SerialOpen 1 9600 N 8 1 request temperature from gauge hex code HC SerialWrite 1 0x4b A very short while later enough time for the gauge to respond this code is called sucks in temperature as a string temp HC SerialRead 1 close serial port HC SerialClose 1 converts the string temp to a number adding 20 temp temp 20 limit the bottom 20F will be the coldest temp math max temp 0 Strand
140. ange the Track Number and Apply the changes When you open this MP3 file with Palette the SMPTE Hour will relate to this Track Number Note To read Time Code from the Windows Media Player the Palette Media Player Communications Plug in must be enabled Windows Media a Player nanat Search for Meda eS pa a e apean License hikaia u ee ce ovrioad Plug ins Options Options See Also Cue List Properties SMPTE Learn Mode Media Player Control Macro Editor Strand Lighting p246 Palette OS v10 Tools Strand Lighting p247 Palette OS v10 Recording and Using Looks and Groups Looks The virtual Sub Master display can be added to or removed from the display by selecting Display Sub Masters from the Menu Bar or pressing S5 from the main Softkey menu and selecting Sub Masters from the large pop up display Note When dealing with just intensities you may want to think of Sub Masters as conventional Submasters The term Sub Master more accurately describes how these controls adjust intensity attributes while still recording and playing back other attributes such as Pan and Tilt i e when addressing a Look via the command line the Level wheel will adjust the channels intensities while not affecting other attributes Likewise when playing a Look back using the Sub Masters different attribute
141. anged up or down relative to the amount of the change you made to the open cell Tip Holding down SHIFT while rolling the WHEEL changes numeric values by 0 1 It will change SMPTE times by 1 frame Changing a Cue s Action 1 1 Move the Blue Box to the Action column of the cue that you want to add a link follow or macro You may also want to adjust the Move In Black parameters Press EDIT on the console or INSERT on the QWERTY keyboard oe IS Y The Cue Action dialog box will open see Cue Properties low Mode Pilate Ge eee E2 Follow Time Het Cue E4 Hum Loops hame ECCI Epes kiia e j z Pii Bos HT LIAL F mG oS nde apne dg 7 z delaytade ir E k MNI 4 4 Make any changes as necessary and choose OK Cue Label Cue Time Down Time Action a 3 House Out 3 Dii gA F2 This very busy cue has a Link to Cue 4 a follow in 2 seconds a macro and MIB is suppressed Adding a Cue Profile Strand Lighting p209 Palette OS v10 1 1 Using the ARROW KEYS move the Blue Box to the time column you want to add a profile to 2 2 Press the EDIT button to put the Blue Box into edit mode 3 3 Enter a new time if necessary and or press the appropriate softkey to add a profile to the fade 51 52 53 54 5 56 57 58 59 10 Sti 512 4 4 The edit box will close and the fade time along with a profile icon will be displayed in the cue list Warmers Hause to Half
142. ant them to do via the Hardware Setup dialog box There is an Up and Down action for each trigger which each can have multiple macros assigned to it See Also Hardware Setup Triggers Macro Editor Strand Lighting p327 Palette OS v10 Hardware Setup Console The Console options set here are not part of your Palette show file These options will be persistent for all sessions on your console Console Lights On the back of the Palette desk are two 3 pin XLR connectors These fit industry standard work lights The voltage supplied to those lights is determined here These settings are remembered for all sessions and the lights automatically go out when you exit Palette Using the wheel and S1 through S3 you can adjust them individually or as a pair Note There are Macros that allow you to set the level of the console lights These macros can be called by cues so that your console lights dim for cues such as black outs then restore for the rest of the show Hold Active Levels This option affects the way the UNDO key or ESC key releases channels By default on new Show files it is not checked When it is checked the multi stage release and undo of released channels SHIFT UNDO described in the help topic called Release is disabled Instead pressing UNDO just deselects the selected channels keeping them Captured Then if a Cue List is advanced and has fade information for that attribute it will become
143. anted attributes before you start recording chase steps as all attributes in the source will be used by the chase Select the required fixtures Select S10 Effects Select New Intensity Effect Select the last option in the list which is Chase S1 S4 will now show a new set of attributes for this effect Look Page Order l Rate if Xfade Style SubPage3 Forward 100 __ Soft S1 changes where the information for the chase is being abstracted from i e groups looks etc faProp 2 eg OS es eee ey Items Strand Lighting p162 Palette OS v10 S2 Is the order in which the chase is run i e forward backwards random and bounce S3 Is the rate of the chase S4 The style of the fade S10 Next cue list S5 Items All to subs etc Change fromto____ by holding the shift key Then turn the encoder wheel Even if channels 1 through 10 are recorded in the source selecting only channel 1 through 5 and putting a chase FX on them will only affect those channels Strand Lighting p163 Palette OS v10 Undo Release Releasing a Channel means to return it to normal control after Selecting and working with it To release Channels press UNDO or ESC on the QWERTY keyboard You can also use the Release button on the ChannelGrid Tool Bar Note If you have selected Last Action Editing from the Hardware Setup none of this apply Please read the topics in the Console section of
144. are the Tip of the Day tips Use the HELP button to get help on any specific button or in any dialog box To get help on buttons press HELP then the desired button If your hardware is such that the A B faders crossfade you between cues see S3 HARDWARE SETUP holding down SHIFT while moving the faders moves you backwards through the cue list If you double press the softkeys accelerator for a pull down list in a dialog box a large popup will appear allowing you to use the wheel to select a value You can add profiles to any timed fade intensity position color etc AS you use the Blue Box to enter times the softkeys change giving you access to profiles such as slow start damped and zigzag Last Action Editing or the British Release Option is available in Hardware Setup This option does not release attributes to their default level but rather leaves them static and ready to be re asserted by advancing cues The Universal Attribute Control Model allows you to move your moving lights in straight lines rather than arcs Palette can read the SMPTE time off your MP3 files and you can synchronize cue lists to music In the Hardware Setup under the Console tab there is a check box that allows you to mute QWERTY keyboard events for controlling Cue Lists Attribute masking can used when Moving Copying Recording Loading or Updating cues and looks Rather than opening the S9 Attribute dialog box hold down SHIFT and use the
145. around on the optional Button Array e COPY 5X5 BUMP to copy a palette to a Sub Master The MOVE button e Although you can move cues from one Cue List to another while working in one cue list moving cues Is essentially renumber cues Highlight the cues you want to renumber with the Blue Box then press SHIFT MOVE CUE NUMBER ENTER to renumber the selected cue s to new cue s e While the Move dialog box is open you can also select a new numbering scheme e Press MOVE LOOK ENTER to move Looks e Press MOVE BUMP BUMP to quickly move Looks e Use MOVE ENTER to move attributes from one channel to another Attribute filtering is available in the dialog box e MOVE 5X5 5X5 to move palettes around on the optional Button Array Strand Lighting p113 Palette OS v10 Tools Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX TOOLS The sofkeys display which tools are available when you press SHIFT TOOLS e Pressing Tools will toggle the Selected Tool Onand Off The last Tool used is displayed in the Status Bubbles See Also Tools Strand Lighting p114 Palette OS v10 View Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX VIEW e Opens the View Properties dialog box to select properties of Cues Looks Cue Lists etc e Press VIEW ENTER to see a channel s title dialog box e Press VIEW LOOK ENTER to see a Look s properties box e Press VIEW BUMP
146. arts with CUE the softkeys change to Live Cue 7 Ir Jep i s s Times Ni This allows you more traditional manipulation of existing cues if you terminate the command line with ENTER or allows you to specify some attributes of the cue before you record them terminating the command line with REC See Also Keyboard Shortcuts Select Softkeys Profiles Display Palette Control Panel Controlling Moving Lights Command Line Syntax Blue Box Strand Lighting p79 Palette OS v10 Status Window This box in the lower right hand corner of the display shows you various pieices of information What is displayed in this window area is configured with the Status Softkey S10 History In the History window a record is kept of the actions you performed when operating your console The time of the operation is marked and the last two hundred events are shown in the list You can right click to clear the list or copy it to the system clipboard 1950 16 Recorded Cue 5 Main Cue List 19 5016 Assert Cue 19 50 24 Hardware a J all Zi Goto Cue _ Main Cue List Go Main Coe List to 5 Checkpoint file written C Load Cue 5 Main Cue List 2402 4b Load Cue 5 Main Cue List 20 28 01 Load Cue 5 Main Cue List 21 13 11 Checkpoint file written C Some of the actions that are reported in the Status Window include e Show Open New Save delineated with horizontal line placed above e Show Checkpoint e Mirrored Save su
147. as e To quickly move a Sub Master press MOVE then the Sub Master s BUMP button then touch the desired location s BUMP button e Press S4 CONTROL PANEL to change the way your track pad works You can turn on or off features such as the tap clicks e To release all the Playbacks press SHIFT REL PB e Use the File Open File Types combo to open Checkpoint files if you ve made a mistake Scroll up the Uber Status to see when the last Checkpoint file was recorded e To go to the top of a Cue List press and hold SHIFT while pressing the STEP UP button To get to the last cue in a Cue List press SHIFT STEP DOWN e To scroll the channel grid hold down the SHIFT key while rolling the wheel This only works when there are no channels currently selected To deselect all channels without affecting their set level press the BACKSPACE key until the command line is clear e To go to a cue without using the GOTO CUE dialog box use the ARROW KEYS to move the blue box to the first column in the cue list on the desired cue and press EDIT This is equivalent to double clicking on that cell with the mouse e Using S2 SHOW OPTONS you can give each Cue List their own default Step times Back times and Release times e Light Palette s console worklights can have separate levels Choose the desired levels in S3 HARDWARE SETUP e You can right click to Clear or Copy the contents of the Uber Status to the system clipboard You can then paste this
148. ave the option to edit the Cue Action with the Blue Box to Use MIB Note where by default this Cue Action check box says Suppress MIB when the entire cue list is told to Suppress MIB the Cue Action check box is labeled Use MIB Midi Show Control MSC Out Check off this option if you have the optional MIDI SMPTE Interface and want to transmit MSC so other devices follow this cue list You may need to label your cue list so that it stars with a number i e 1 Main as MSC uses numbered cue lists For more information see the topic MIDI Show Control Override Value in Show Options Cue Lists will inherit options set in Show Options If you want to override specific settings click the check box and set its value here For more information on each option see Show Options See Also Fade Resolution Action on GO within Cue Loop SMPTE Time Code on Cue Lists View Properties HTP vs LTP Priorities Strand Lighting p203 Palette OS v10 Cue List Pointer If a Cue List is currently released and you want to start that cue list running at a certain cue you may use the Set Cue Pointer option The Cue List Pointer is shown by a pink light q in the Cue List Using the STEP UP amp STEP DN buttons or and while the cue list is released to move the pointer Pressing GO will execute the current cue in its cue time You may also see a A red light shows that a cue list is active and currently not running l A yel
149. ay blank for a moment or two and may ask you if you want to keep the settings If you monitor cannot handle the new resolution after a short period of time the settings will revert to their original state 4 Inside of the Palette software move the mouse over the line separating the Channel Grid ale from the Cue List until it turns into this symbol HI Click on the vertical line and hold down the mouse button to adjust the width of the Channel Grid display OR alll Right click once the ai symbol appears and select a set Channel Grid size from the right click menu 65 66 67 68 69 Set Grid 10 Across Set Grid 12 Across Set Grid 15 4cross Set Grid 20 Across Set Grid 25 Across 1413 1444 115 116 117 100 101 Setting up a Second Monitor Some older Palette Processors are purchased with the dual video option and have two 15 pin connectors on the rear Other units use a USB VGA adaptor If you don t have the USB adaptor follow these instructions If you do have the USB adaptor start at Step 5 1 1 Exit the Palette software 2 2 From the Palette Control Panel choose the Screen Resolution button Strand Lighting p384 Palette OS v10 Display Properties Display Plug and Play Monitor on 515 650 651_MBS0_ Mba _ 740 Screen resolution Color quality Highest 32 bit a 1280 by 1024 pixels E EE Fa rset 2 2 Select the Advanced button and choose the Utili
150. b Page 3 Group Fosition Colour Other Chan Number Name Look Type 42 House Light 0 Normal assertive r3 FOH 100 Group Master innibitve Blue Parc U Normal assertive 0 Mormal assertive JY Normal assertive Op Normal assertive DS HTF additive JY Normal assertive Uo Narmnal assertive Jo HTP radditivej J Normal assertive 0 Mormal assertive OY Normal assertive Additionally these pages may be laid out on your hardware s sliders via Hardware Setup so that you can quickly playback Looks live via Sub Masters New show files have five Look Pages Sub Page Group Position Color and Other You can add pages by right clicking in the Cue List Directory and selecting the Add Look Page If you want to change the name or other properties of the Look Page press VIEW S11 then press S1 to select the Look Page You can repeatedly press S1 to change the highlight in the list or use the Wheel to scroll the list Once you have highlighted the desired page press ENTER Strand Lighting p83 Palette OS v10 Sub Page 1 You will then be presented with the Look Page Properties box _ SubPaged Ae IF IQUE s FOH Inhibitive Blue Parcans Red Parcans Cyc Groundroaw ML Power Additive Stage Aight mo co oon fe Coen In this dialog box you can change the name of the page The scroll list at the bottom of the window tells you what Looks are recorded on th
151. bject of patents or patent applications Copyright 2008 Strand Lighting Inc All rights reserved Copyright 2008 Horizon Control Inc All rights reserved O p437 Palette OS v10 Keyboard Shortcuts A QWERTY keyboard maps to most functions available on the console Here is a list of keys and what operations they perform Strand Lighting T EF c OODD O Plus Minus At Dot Thru Open Square Brace Close Square Brace Back Slash Blind Load Copy Group Look Move Palette Cue Record Tools Update View Back Arrow Keys Rarbcnara Used in command line for fixture selection and Relative attribute adjustments Used in command line for channel selection and staggered attribute TO syntax Used in command line to set intensity levels or intensity times Is also acceptable Used to set point times or twice to indicate a colon for the HH MM SS time format Used in command line to select a range of channels gt is also acceptable Step Back in cue list Use with SHIFT to take you to the top of a cue list Step Forward in cue list Use with SHIFT to take you to the bottom of a cue list Release Cue Lists SHIFTED releases all cue lists Sets display to Blind mode SHIFTED Load Opens Copy dialog box Used for Group on command line Used for Look on command line Opens Move dialog box Opens Apply Levels dialog box Use when using Cue on command
152. build a cue which is a look on stage and then you decide how you are going to get from one cue to another The Blue Box allows you to change timing of different attribute families without using parts but it does it for all channels in the cue For example using the different columns in the cue list you can have separate times for channels going up in intensity than those going down You can also change times for Position fades vs Color fades etc If you want one group of channels to move at a different rate than others in the same cue you can move those channels to a different part You may also want to use the alternate method called Independent Timing where each and every attribute of every channel can have its own wait and fade time This is handy if you want splayed offsets and are not concerned about managing parts in the cue list You can do this either at record time or when updating the cue Putting channel in a different part when recording a cue 1 _Select the channels that will be in the main part and set their levels This may include applying palettes or manually adjusting attributes These channels need no further attention before recording the cue Select the channels for the next part and adjust their levels Press the S11 Cue Parts button to open the cue part dialog box 4 Select the button for the desired part Note There is a main cue part that is not assigned a letter Cues need not be made up of parts
153. bute basis for recorded cues Encoder Banks Strand Lighting p145 Palette OS v10 As mentioned above multiple press of S5 through S9 will bank you through encoder pages Using a VL3500 as an example this is how the encoder banks would be laid out Bi PiT Mode P1 Position MaE Color cl Space Color A Color B Color C C1 Mixing HSL 35 H 25 S 100 L Color ez Correction Color cl Whi Md cl Select C3 Wheel IES To San Gobo gl Whi Md gl Select gl Mode gl index Gl Wheel 1 Select Open ME 0 Gobo g2 Whi Md q Select G2 Wheel 2 Select Open oom L1 Lens 20 Top amp lop Thrust Top Angle Bot Thrust Bot Angle L2 Bottom 0 Q 0 n Shutters nd E mii wO i Left amp f Left Thrust Left Angle Right Thrust Right Angle L3 Right o 0 o 0 Shutters i All T B Thrust J TIB Angle UR Thrust LR Angle L4 Shutters O 0 O Lontral Intensity S1 Control 2 a 80 2 imi Pos Time Color Time Gobo Time I Lens Time S Timing Tracking Tracking Tracking Tracking Conditional Abstract Attributes The images above only tell half the story on how to control all parameters of the VL3500 or any other channel for example Palette uses Horizon Control s Universal Attribute Control Model and one of the benefits of that is Conditional Abstract Attributes describe fully in the topic called Universal Attribute Control Model Conditional attributes split complex control that is typically Shared on DM
154. ccess or failure e Go Halt Back shown in green text e Assert Cue List e Release Cue List e Blue Box edits e Triggers e Show Options e Hardware Setup e Goto Cue e Goto Top Bottom of Cue List e Move Copy Cue e Move Copy Look e Load Cue e Load Look e Delete Cue Strand Lighting p80 Palette OS v10 e Delete Look e Record Cue red if recording an empty cue e Record Look e Bump Buttons e Sub Masters Moves e DBO shown in red text e Grand Master shown in red text e USB On Line status e Time Events Status In the status Window information about the last selected channel is displayed j pm e L y ira A t LAGH oe ad L itt Intensity Ch HEE a g lI Tool The Tool Selected shows what Tool is currently active or which tool will be active if you press the TOOLS button QWERTY equivalent T button When you first start your session this will display because no Tool has been selected yet Press SHIFT and the TOOLS button and select the tool using the softkeys When a tool is active the LED on the Tools button on the console will illuminate Saved After you save the current show this marks the time at which you did that A timer also Shows you how long it has been since you last saved The Hostory Windows marks a horizontal line where the save occurred If checkpoint files or mirrored saving is enabled their success or failure is also noted in the Uber
155. ce Outputs upon Recovery is checked they will always be enabled which is desirable in architectural situations Disconnect Remote Video If you are monitoring a console using your PC or laptop as a Remote Video terminal you can disconnect from the main console using this options Immediately you will be presented with the Connect dialog box to re connect to the same or other recently used consoles Exit Use to close down the lighting control software Upon exiting the checkpoint file for the current show will be deleted to prevent you from opening a stale show file Note Any time you see a word with an underlined letter on the menu bar or in a pull down menu this means you can access it from the QWERTY keyboard using the ALT key and the underlined letter For example ALT F O will access the File drop down menu from the Menu Bar and then the Open file dialog box will appear See Also Show Save Options Recovery Enable Outputs Display Menu Help Menu Strand Lighting p71 Palette OS v10 Display Menu Used to turn on and off the display of the Cue Lists Live Display Patch Time Events Macro Buttons Virtual Sub Masters Moving Light Attribute Grid Running Effects Grid Second Window and Track Sheets Ue Lists Looks Patch Time Events Variables Virtual Subs w Channels Fixtures olors In Grid w ME Attributes Running Effects ther window Intensities Other Window ML Tracksheek A large
156. ch channels again to de select them Note o Even if a channel is selected running cue lists can still alter its level until you capture it o You can also select moving lights with the mouse by touching them in the Attribute Grid To set levels 1 Select a channel as described above 2 Roll the wheel in the middle of the mouse or the wheel on the console The level changes in the same direction you roll the wheel The channel will get a white triangle 28 B0 delta symbol showing the changes to be recorded It will look like this 3 Each detent or bump on the wheel will adjust the level by 1 Holding down SHIFT while rolling the wheel will give you finer control Note Strand Lighting p140 Palette OS v10 28 A If you then go and select other channels the previous channel will look like this The channel is still Captured and has changes that need to be recorded Running Cue Lists or Sub Masters cannot affect this channeluntil you release it unless you are using Last Action Editing as determined by settings in Hardware Setup Console You may also want to purchase ELO Touch Screens for your console as selecting channels just as easy using your finger See Also Command Line Syntax Channel s different states Channel Colors and Symbols Channel Grid Attribute Grid Selecting and Setting Channels Button Array Described Controlling Moving Lights Strand Lighting pl4l Palette OS v10 Contro
157. change the settings you only need to run the macro once during a session The macro that actually send the data is called SerialOut Strand Lighting p365 Palette OS v10 Edit Macro Macro Serialu to 8 outputMstring Description Seral Port Output Data 51 Comment 2 Arguments Argument Yalue part output string w OK pas Cancel Again make sure you specify the correct Port number The Output String can be any text and does not need to be encompassed in double quotes Note M will send a Carriage Return J sends a Line Feed and l sends a tab See Also Macro Editor and Commands Macro Editor and Scripts Strand Lighting p366 Palette OS v10 Telnet and Serial Communications Text cs Telnet 197 168 0 8 Horizon Control Remote Connection Copyright 2646 Horizon Control Inc ALL Rights Reserved local commanis echo noecho prompt nopronmpt help exit 1C gt print CHC UariableGet Show Control Zea a Po S himu See Also Macro Editor and Scripts Serial Out Macros Strand Lighting p367 Palette OS v10 MIDI Show Control Palette can respond to other consoles or show control devices using the MIDI Show Control MSC protocol There is a Cue List Property that can specify that Palette outputs MSC on a particular cue list so that it can control other devices The connection is made using a standard 5 Pin DIN connector on the optional MID
158. change to the following ree any of these FE the attribute ARA without the need to open the Attribute dialog box You can also double tap any attribute family to solo it Independent Timing Independent Timing is an extremely powerful method of assigning individual wait and or fade times to any attribute regardless of cue or part timing To access the TIMES display press SHIFT EDIT See Also Strand Lighting pl47 Palette OS v10 Universal Attribute Control Model Attribute Grid Controlling Colour Independent Timing Move In Black Tools Flip and Highlight Fanning Patch Part Cues Select Softkeys Strand Lighting p148 Palette OS v10 Controlling Colour Palette provides a number of ways of working with channels that have colour mixing control This can be done either using the rotary encoders or the Colour Picker Tool Most usefull of all is the Palette s ability to choose colours directly from a list of your favourtite Gells Pallette does this by having a library of a range of Colours from manufacturers such as Lee Rosco and Gam Using these colours is achieved using a Text Match softkey which become available when you select the colour control Colour B Colour C 0 M From Text Match a selection of Manufacturers eg Roscolux Roscolene Gam Lee appears and allows the entry of either the Colour Number Name or the ability find the closest colour to where you are Live a4 Colour Le
159. cking cues Blocking a cue puts hard values for every attribute of every channel in your show into the cue If you are running a linear show this is a great way to stop things from tracking from one scene to the next but be aware it may steal channels away from other cues with long fade times that are still running or more dangerously other cue lists You may consider Going to this cue Live and re record it using the Record Option called State Unblocking Cues Get into the habit of cleaning up cues by Unblocking them This makes it easier when you are maintaining the show at a later date Knowing that all the information in the cue is needed to produce the desired look on stage allows you to clear the clutter To Unblock a cue move the Blue Box to the row of the desired cue right click and select Unblock Cues You can also select multiple cues using the Blue Box to Unblock more than one cue at a time The syntax CUE 5 THRU 10 S6 UNBLOCK is also valid Unblocking the Entire Cue List Sometimes it is desirable to clean shop and get rid of all the redundant data that may be cluttering up your cue list To do it all in one fowl swoop right click anywhere in the cue list and select Unblock Entire Cue List If you are running multiple cue lists and each cue list is a specific section of a greater show this is good habit to get into as you ll be sure that Unblocked Cue Lists will not steal away from other cues lis
160. cols defined by the equipment manufacturers 4 Building a set of looks with one group of lights in your rig can be copied to another group regardless of what type of lights they are The cues you have in your show file can be played back with any equipment One of the key things in Point 2 above that bears repeating is that UAC uses numbers and Strand Lighting pl6 Palette OS v10 words to control lighting You may claim that has been done for years with the use of named palettes For example moving lights desks can use labelled position palettes to build cues and the cue displays use these words to make it easier to read Don t lose sight of the fact that palettes like Down Stage Center are just place holders for a combination of values between O and 65535 The words themselves do not mean anything to the desk nor do the numbers They are just displayed on the screen for convenience In contrast with UAC the words do mean very specific things within the cue structure Some of the words used include o 15 degrees of pan o rotate counter clockwise at 6 RPM o strobe at 9 hertz o thrust the shutter into the aperture of the fixture half way o reset the fixture s motor control system At show time these words need to be converted into values that the specified lighting fixtures can use The trick with UAC is that this conversion is figured out each and every time GO is pressed and not before That means that the prot
161. complex cues In very demanding programming environments Palette extends timing options with the very powerful Independent Timing of every attribute in every cue o Palette deals with moving lights using Horizon Control s Universal Attribute Control Model This means that regardless of who manufactured the moving light and what protocol it is using it is presented to the user the same way Cues are stored using descriptions like Blue 3 RPM and 11 Hz This means that not only can you copy attributes from one type of fixture in your rig to another with predictable results you can also swap your entire rig out for another and not have to re program your cues o Palette uses a Graphical User Interface and replaces the hidden command structure of the DOS based tracking consoles with modern computer interfaces like menus and dialog boxes It can easily be understood and programmed by any computer literate operator Since each dialog box control has a softkey accelerator your hands are not tied to the mouse Pure keystroke syntax is not only possible but quite often quicker than competing consoles On the flip side there is no need to memorize a strict syntax as the softkeys are always narrowing your choices to less than a dozen option You can read the dialog box from top to bottom like a book and quickly find the options you are looking for even resorting to the mouse if that suites you Palette will never beep at you and expect you to
162. con B clicking this icon turns on and off this feature Priority The topic called Priorities that explains how there are 100 different priorities with 1 being the highest By default new cue lists have a priority of 10 Attributes The Attributes dialog box determine what attribute families will be recorded by default in cues on this Cue List You may always change from these default in the Record dialog box Selecting None will clear all check marks where selecting AIl will add checks to all attribute families SMPTE Strand Lighting p202 Palette OS v10 If SMPTE is checked this Cue List can have SMPTE Time Code associated with it and will respond to SMPTE time A SMPTE column will appear in the cue list You can use the Blue Box to add SMPTE time stamps to cue or use the Learn SMPTE Time Tool The SMPTE time from the source is displayed in the Status Bubbles SMPTE Offset If you pre program a song using SMPTE but later find that on site the audio guy has re stripped the SMPTE on the track as they often do you can offset the entire cue list using this value For example if you programmed your song starting at SMPTE time 1 00 01 00 and when you hear the first beat of the track the time now reads 2 00 01 00 you would enter a value of 1 00 00 00 in this field and then not have to adjust any cues Suppress MIB Move In Black If you check this option the Cue List will not use Move In Black on new cues You still h
163. customize this any way you like Note O Strand Lighting p299 Palette OS v10 o If you double tap S5 or any other softkey it will solo Position That is all other check marks will clear and Position will remain checked O o While in the main Move Copy dialog box if you press SHIFT the Attribute button will look like this and the softkeys will change to the following Pressing any of these changes the attribute masking without the need to open the Attribute dialog box You can also double tap any attribute family to solo it See Also A Note on Redundant Data Record Options Command Line Syntax Abstract Control Model About Palette Strand Lighting p300 Palette OS v10 Show Net DMX Your console can connect directly with any Strand Lighting ShowNet Network transmitting levels to other Strand Lighting Nodes or Strand Dimmer Racks that are part of that Network Note ShowNet uses Broadcast communications in which IP addresses are not used Regardless it is a good idea to know what Subnet you are broadcasting on See Control Panel Network The ShowNet configuration is setup in the Patch In the top left hand pane you can configure the Output Devices by clicking the sign to expose the Output Device options By default the DMX ports on the back of your console USB DMX are mapped to Outputs 1 through 1024 Double click on the cell to the right of ShowNet From the drop down list select
164. d Lighting Press LOAD then the desired Cue number to load a cue The status window will tell you what is loaded The Cue Number edit box will be pre stuffed with the cue number from where the Blue Box is sitting Press S5 to load the entire State of the cue all the cumulative levels that got you to the look on stage at that point in the cue list Edit the cue by changing levels adding channels or releasing channels Either press UPDT to Update the Loaded cue or press REC to record it as a new Cue or Look Press LOAD LOOK then the desired Look number to load a Look for editing Press LOAD BUMP to quickly load a Look for editing In BLIND the Clear On Load check box will clear any channels that are Captured and anything that is already Loaded as shown in the Loaded Bubble You can Load more than one item at once to combine ideas The first thing loaded will be Updated O p112 Palette OS v10 Move Copy Buttons PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX MOVE The COPY button COPY e Use COPY ENTER to copy attributes from one channel to another Attribute filtering can be applied once the dialog box is open e Highlight the cues you want to copy with the Blue Box then press COPY CUE NUMBER ENTER to copy the selected cue s to new cue s e Press COPY LOOK to open the Copy Look Dialog box e Use COPY BUMP BUMP to copy one Look to another e COPY 5X5 5X5 to move palettes
165. d Line entry of values rather than having to roll the encoders HEB Thrust 1B Angle LAR Thrust LR Angle alalt IKO Aros 40 20 70 20 40 J ae Bottom Gobo Control Individual moving light manufacturers implementation of gobo control has notoriously been annoyingly inconsistent There are so many things these modern machines allow us to do with imagining but there has never been a consistent method of describing what they do UAC attempts to pull in the reins and consolidate on a common language of control The assembly that holds the entire gobo selection is called the Wheel Wheels can Spin Forward or Reverse and can Select gobos The individual choices are called Gobos Gobos can be Indexed in Degrees like hands on a compass or Rotated continuously Clockwise or Counterclockwise Strand Lighting p26 Palette OS v10 te Len oud Au asa Pari Different manufacturers use a variety of control handles to achieve all of these possible behaviors Some use lots of handles which surprisingly makes the control of the gobo wheel easier and other insist on bunching up behaviours on only a couple of channels The examples below are generic and are only used to show how it could be done using linear DMX channels and how it is handled using UAC The first of the pair of these two linear channels is used to position the wheel and select a specific gobo and do one of two things with it either Index it or Rotate it The second channe
166. d fixtures Using different attributes and different fanning methods and multiplying the fan gives you an enormous amount of fine tuned control of your lighting rig Fan Right on Tilt yy ee eee Strand Lighting Palette OS v10 Fan Sine on Tilt Fan Ends on Iris Fan Right on Gobo Index See Also Tools Controlling Moving Lights Strand Lighting p277 Palette OS v10 Highlight Lowlight Access the HighLight or Lowlight tools by pressing and holding the TOOLS button or T on the QWERTY keyboard then select either S8 for Highlight or S9 for Lowlight you may need to select lt more gt if Highlight and Lowlight are not visible These tools allows you identify selected channels for ease of positioning When you use Highlight all Gobo and Color attributes are taken to their highlight value no gobo no color and the intensity is taken to full Note Lens attributes are not affected This allows you to position the channel easily while not destroying cue information to see it The Attribute Grid will show the text HL in place of the value that would normally be going to the stage Fixture Intensity Pan Tilt CTO ColorA Color B Color Color 1 VL3500 Spot WLIUOD S0 3 VLIUU0D TSD Although Highlight alters attributes it does not mark these attributes as changed If the values were changed before Highlight was turned on you will see a red delta HL If the values were at
167. d macros to the event move the Blue Box to this column and press EDIT The Macro Editor will open and you can add one or more actions to this event Enabled This column will either have a check mark in the box or not You can use the mouse or the blue box and EDIT to toggle the check mark Events that should occur for all other reasons except that it s not enabled will appear in red text in the Today column Strand Lighting p352 Palette OS v10 When Individual Time Events can be triggered based on different criteria When attime ag at tive When you select at time the Offset column to its right will be disabled You then set the specific time of day in the Time Offset column two to the right When you select any one of the four astronomical events the Offset column become enabled see below Before you use any astronomical events you must set up your location in Show Options Venue Setup and the correct time and daylight savings time settings using the Palette Control Panel Offset Only when the When column is set to an astronomical event will this column be active Offset no ofset Ha offset betore after Your choice is to fire the event exactly on time no offset or before or after the astronomical event If you choose before or after the Time Offset column to the right will become active Time Offset This column will only be active if either the When column is set to at time or an astronom
168. d not change Tracked from the last cue but moving light attributes did change 28 or bye Dark background or blue text shows that the level is being controlled by a cue list that is not currently Selected Check out the topic called Multiple Cue List Concept Yellow levels with a green handle symbol represent Channels controlled by an Additive Sub Strand Lighting p126 Palette OS v10 Master or Channel Master A red border round the intensity represent Channels being inhibited by an Inhibitive Sub Master a Playback Master or Grand Master A red triangle next to a channel number indicates this is showing the specified moving light s intensity level The intensity level is mirrored in the Attribute Grid below the Channel Grid along with all the channel s other attributes Intensity Cale Gobo Gobo Gobod Edge 1 L1000 TID La Open fl cisi 20 Grey backgrounds on attributes show available attributes for the selected channel Some channels may not have all attributes In this case there are channels patched in the show that do have Color Wheels and multiple Gobo Wheels but the selected VL1000 does not O Strand Lighting p127 Palette OS v10 Command Line Syntax Palette does not have Channel Fixture or Spot buttons Typing numbers alone will select Keywords that appear on the command line include Look Group and Cue but these will only appear when you press the LOOK GROUP or CUE
169. d to change the Cue List s properties to accept SMPTE Time Code I 1 Build a series of cues that will need to be synchronized with SMPTE Time Code 2 2 Activate the Tool SMPTE Learn see the Tools topic for more information on how to use the TOOLS button 3 3 Be sure the Cue List is marked for SMPTE tn the Cue List Properties 4 4 Start the SMPTE source Hit the GO button to execute the cue at the desired time This will automatically record the SMPTE time with each Cue 5 5 Run the SMPTE Time from the beginning and each Cue will execute at the recorded SMPTE time See Also SMPTE Time Code on Cue Lists Media Player Control Tools Strand Lighting p273 Palette OS v10 Fil The S6 tool on the of the Tools softkeys allows you to Flip moving head channels 55 Flip If you just ran a cue and the moving head channels went to their new position the wrong way you may want to Flip them As moving heads have two ways to reach every point on stage this sometimes happens when you re positioning a channel and you don t consider where it came from There is no sure fire way to avoid this happening it is only evident after you run the cues One rule of thumb is to always tilt the channel towards you first before you position it Following this one rule normally keeps you out of trouble If you do find that the cue did not position the channel elegantly i e they went the wrong way around just select the channel
170. down DBO The Dead Black out has multiple functions Whenever it is enabled it is like pulling the grandmaster slider down to 0 in zero time There are macros that allow you to control this feature programmatically Disabled Select this option if you don t want to accidentally plunge your stage into darkness by pressing the DBO button Momentary If you select this option pressing the button will black out the stage only while you have your finger on the button Use this if you want to bump the stage out for effect If you want to keep it in darkness press and hold the DBO while lowering the slider to 0 Toggle If the DBO is set as a toggle pressing it once will black the stage out and pressing it again will restore it to the level set by the grandmaster slider While the DBO is on or the slider is at 0 the red LED will flash rapidly Notes e The red LED on the DBO button will flash slowly if the level of the handle is between 1 and 99 It will be off if the handle is at full It will flash rapidly if the handle is at the bottom or the DBO is active Check out Status Bubbles for display information on the GM e There are Macros that allow you to set the level of the console lights These macros can be called by cues so that your console lights dim for cues such as black outs then restore for the rest of the show See Also General Hardware Setup Strand Lighting p318 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p319
171. ds Fintur Intensity ColwA rancor t p 1003 0 100 C checker be 4 f P 1005 07 TUE sila t p100 e00 white note fp 100 0 100 C frogger t 7 100 0 100 C VHF noise t P 100 0 1002C iniedi GB ft Pp 100 100 1003CC Se ye i stop int FX fT 100 000 100 C If the main system exits or re loads a show file the remote machine will be presented with a dialog box explaining that you must close and re connect to the main system You can also disconnect using the File Disconnect Remote Video option to disconnect any time and or connect to another system on your network Strand Lighting p90 Palette OS v10 Screen Layout The layout of the Palette screen is flexible and allows you to look at the information you need when you need it When Palette starts the screen is not a busy as this Plaphach Cuei Nemi Raman Fastrer Fanii E F4 i 6 o 40 Open nice Fame IK 8 erig i wo Slmt E a i a So awe 6 Lag 7 18 0 0 21 2 2 Na S a n 29 J re Brits i Eir A F Lae ee Aui roi BuU SVP a a 4 a G E BG H E Pm 5 p D Gi G2 ices Tins Ieee Tema Ac 6B 6 TO Fi f2 73 76 T T BS 6 E7 BE a1 93 G4 104 106 107 108 109 110 120 121 122 123 124 125 128 Provious ue 3s Thies Capo 3s Hori Cup 35 f Cues Running Fixture BE 18 17 Flurries 18 tk intensity Changed Cue 17 Tool Selected lt none gt Shc nol savad Quipus Disabled 17 59 56 To add or remove screen comp
172. dware Setup from the main softkey menu allows you to configure how different parts of your console operate Priority tem Priority Grandmaster 20 Grandmaster E ell Hew Exclusive Look 30 Captured Aq Channel Master AO Hew LTP Look BL Hew HTP Look Fa Default Submasters Grandmasters and Channel Control priorities can be setup using the Priority Tab of the Hardware setup See Also General Hardware Setup Variables amp Button Stations Priorities Strand Lighting p312 Palette OS v10 Hardware Setup A B C D I Disabled Preset 4 68 Two Scene Haste Cue List A B PB Maser Crocelacdet my O Cue Lect A B Split Cioestader D lider Bark Looks positive p pa The A B and C D faders have multiple purposes On a new show file the A B are configured as Preset A B Two Scene Masters controlling intensity attributes on the Top and Bottom Slider banks see Slider Panels and the C is configured as the Intensity Master for the Cue List assigned to that Playback and D is configured as a manual crossfader for that cue list All the modes are described below Note Regardless of configuration of the A B and C D faders the SELECT HALT BACK and GO buttons will function as normal on the appropriate cue list Disabled If you chose this option the sliders will do nothing If you are just doing a GO SHOW this is the safest mode of operation as inadvertent moves on these faders will have no affec
173. e Variables can be thought of as a meeting place for different pieces of hardware and virtual console elements Variable Pages can be hard patched to Look Pages Cue Lists or physical Button Stations in the show file The Macro buttons are just one method of tying user buttons to Variable Pages for the purpose of seeing the variables current values and to provide a method to change them You can show virtual Macro Buttons by selecting Macro Buttons in the Display menu or by pressing S5 from the main softkey menu and selecting from the pop up list Hall n ON Jvveading Meeting banquet Lunch D Cit A Lowa Ma Z iai ae a T ee cl Z gy ls gt The combo box to the left shows which the macros buttons are assigned to If you have multiple Variable pages use the mouse to choose which one you want to see To operate a Macro Button left click on it with the mouse or using the QWERTY keyboard hold down ALT while pressing F1 through F12 To change the function of the macro buttons you must change the Variables it is tied to Do this by accessing Variables in the Display menu or press the traffic light icon in the Cue List Directory or press S5 from the main softkey menu and select Variables from the pop up list Yarable Page Patch hy B1 coum m e n Entrance B4 Kitchen B5 Order Name Value askna Macta Tipe Hadi io Group p Detault ey 1 ON 0 29 Now 2 Radio Event VWwedding i 2oMNOW Sha Radio Event
174. e and order Confusing mode channels that change the purpose of other channels have been eliminated and new and uniquely useful control handles have been added such as an intensity control for LED based fixtures UAC allows the designer to look at the lighting rig as a unified tool to aid in the design process The designer will no longer need to conform to the language of the manufacturers and this allows them to diversify the lighting rig without the worry of adding complexity to the programming process Every fixture now speaks the same language and increased communication and understanding will only lead to better lighting Strand Lighting p38 Palette OS v10 Tracking Palette is by nature a Tracking console With Tracking when a cue brings a channel to a level the channel stays at that level until it receives a specific instruction to change levels This level tracks through all subsequent cues in the cue list until the level is increased or decreased in another cue Levels which have tracked in a cue are displayed on the channel grid in magenta with a circular arrow symbol beside the level If you record a hard level in Cue 2 that is exactly the same level that is in Cue 1 you will get a 26 80 magenta level with a white block showing there is a redundant command A good way to understand tracking is to think of how you use lights every day o When you enter a room you turn on a room light o Then you may turn on your d
175. e but other attributes in the cue rely on it to be in a certain state For example in a CMY colour mix system if you are fading from pure Cyan 100 0 0 to pure Green 100 0 100 the Cyan value does not change in the second cue When running the second cue you would see the Block Symbol This is definitely not redundant date because having Cyan at 100 is a necessary condition to making Green If it were not there with a Block Symbol it would still produce Green but the important thing to consider is what if we change the first cue such that is does not have Cyan at 100 Then our second cue would not be Green Palette automatically marks co dependant attributes with deltas when you are editing so you don t have to worry too much about this J ust don t get fussed if you do see block symbols in your attribute grid even if you have just perform an Un Blocked cue operation UNDESIRABLE o When you are running a show from top to bottom and attributes are marked with block symbols it means that those attributes will get unnecessary and sometimes harmful fades initiated on them for no good reason For example in the Tracking topic there is a detailed example of a long Sunrise cue followed by an actor s entrance cue If the cyc channels that were involved in the sunrise were blocked in the second cue the long sunrise would be quickly collapsed by the actor s entrance cue when it is Strand Lighting p41 Palette OS v10 executed o W
176. e open the Checkpoint File instead of the Show File w Yes pas No You will need to verify you want to continue working with the Checkpoint file or the real show file If you choose Yes to open the Checkpoint file you will do a SaveAs the first time you choose Save You can manually Open checkpoint files by changing the Files of Type combo in the File Open dialog box to Palette Checkpoint Set the time interval of how often checkpoint files Strand Lighting p 0 Palette OS v10 are written in Show Options Check out Mirrored Saves also found in Show Options Checkpoint files are automatically deleted if you exit Palette manually Save As Use to record the current show under another name and continue working under that name Backup Use to make a backup copy spb of the current show to another location and continue working under the original name Set your backup configurations in Show Save Options Print to PDF Opens the Print dialog box to allow you to customize what sort of document you want to create using the current show Recent files will be listed by number Using the QWERTY keyboard press that number to load it Enable Outputs This option is a indicated by a check mark If you disable the outputs the console s DMX ports and Ethernet outputs will remain static until you re enable them Upon recovery from an improper shut down you can choose to enable or disable outputs If the Console Option For
177. e Attribute dialog box Note o While holding down SHIFT the other softkey accelerators in the dialog box will disappear i e S2 Cue List just becomes Cue List Although it may look odd when entering labels that include capital letters it does not prevent you from utilizing other Shifted functions such as holding down SHIFT and rolling the wheel to change numerical fields by 0 1 rather than whole numbers o If you double press any of S4 through S11 you can solo that attribute family This is quicker than pressing S2 then reselecting the single desired one Moving Light Softkeys If your show has moving lights patched as you select channels the softkeys will change to give you direct access to the moving light attributes For more information on manipulating moving light attributes check out the topic Controlling Moving Lights Default Softkeys When no dialog boxes are open and you have no moving lights selected you can use your mouse to press the softkey buttons The default softkeys give additional functionality that is not available with the hard buttons on the console Strand Lighting p s Palette OS v10 If you want to access the Default Softkeys while moving lights are selected rather than releasing the channels just press backspace The attributes will remain captured but the selection will clear and you can then see the Default Softkeys Cue Softkeys If the Command Line st
178. e Scroll Bar is located along the right edge of the cue list display as well as the Channel display and it identifies whether the display is near the top middle or bottom Fy See Also Attribute Grid Screen Resolution Toolbars Channels Colors and Symbols Strand Lighting p64 Inside the Scroll Bar is the Thumb which indicates the section displayed If it is near the top of the scroll bar you are near the top of the display Click above or below the thumb to move the Channelgrid will move up or down a page To move up or down line by line click on the arrow at the top or bottom of the scroll bar Each click will move the display one line If you hold down the mouse button while the mouse pointer is over the arrow the screen will continue moving line by line To move in big steps put the mouse pointer on the thumb hold down the mouse button and the drag the thumb up or down in the scroll bar Palette OS v10 Description of the different states of channels When you are programming your show the channels you select and work with can be described as existing in different states Understand the definitions of what changes these states helps explain why Palette may treat them differently at different times Channels can be o Released Selected Changed Captured Under Playback control O O O Under Sub Master control o Under Flash Highlight Lowlight control See Also Channel Colors and Symbols
179. e Solor Match aes Lee Ly Clear Egit Mir Durham Fre oe Plus 1 4 Minus Lavender 1 No Colour lee Sub Sub Sub Pagel jl Pages Pages Live 54 Colour Lee Tru L196 M L7oa MOREE Electric Liz Straw L 2 3 Sub Sub Sub Moraga i F RADE a Colour FRoscolux Roscatene iam II P Fag3 Select by Name Strand Lighting p149 Palette OS v10 Live cs Datur Lee 10 Sub Sub Sub Pagel Page 2 Jl Page 3 Select aE Number Pressing M1 M12 then selects the colour Pressing and holding SHIFT allows you to try out the colour on the output without deselecting the colour selection mode 0 Strand Lighting p150 Palette OS v10 Independent Timing The topic Timing discusses three methods of setting cues times Independent timing is the most exacting way of giving each attribute of each channel its own fade and wait times This method although not complicated is most often used in advanced programming situations Timing Methods Generally when you write a cue each attribute family will use fade and wait times as specified in the cue list columns If any attribute family does not have a time such as the Lens family shown in this example then these attributes will use Cue Time Although this timing method is very convenient its limitations are that all attributes of all channels in the cue must use the time specified Alternately you can use Part Cues to separate g
180. e combined to create playback loops If you are running a Cue List and press GO you can jump out of the loop and go to the next cue Other actions can happen if you press GO too Check out the topic called Action on GO within Cue Loop Creating a Loop Within a Cue List To create a loop you need to link the last cue of the loop to a cue higher in the list and make all cues Follow on from each other The easiest way to do this is use the Blue Box to highlight the Action cells of the cues in the loop 1 Move the Blue Box to the cue with the lowest number 2 Hold down SHIFT and press the DOWN ARROW until you reach the last cue in the loop I 4 rt ee EOR Hoi ouse to Half Band Enter Exit 3 Then press EDIT to open the Cue Action dialog box Watton or F2 Folke Time Lae m th Je fy 4 Select the Follow Mode and uncheck S3 Run Next Cue 5 Roll the wheel or type in the Next Cue number The cue label will appear to the right Strand Lighting p237 Palette OS v10 as you roll the wheel 6 Select OK The cue list will now looks something like this House ta Half Band Enter Exit See Also Follow Cues Linking Cues Action on GO within Cue Loop Blue Box Strand Lighting p238 Palette OS v10 Action on GO Within Cue Loop When the GO button Is pressed while a loop of Cues is going the Cue List can be configured to behave differently A loop is defined as a series of Cues that
181. e previous cue in the time determined by the Back Time in Default Cue List Options If you want the cue you are going back to to run in its own cue time press SHIFT HALT BACK Auto Scroll Cue List The Pin The Cue List can be set to scroll automatically as Cues are executed To enable or disable this function click the Autoscroll Cue List button in the Cue List Toolbar The Autoscroll button changes appearance as it turns the Autoscroll Cue List function on or off The S11 softkey mimics the state of this pin Rearranging and Hiding Columns You can re size the columns in the cue list by clicking between two columns and dragging left or right When you click down the cursor will change from an arrow to a double arrow like this H Strand Lighting p199 Palette OS v10 If you double click the column will size to fit the cell with the largest text You can change the order of the columns in the cue list by clicking on the column header and dragging it left or right When you click down the cursor will change from an arrow to a box with a double arrow like this L_ The first two column cannot be moved You can hide individual columns by right clicking and unchecking the desired one in the list Label Cue Time Down Time Acton Pos Time Color Time Gobo Time Lens Time spec Time SMPTE k amp HR EAA The order and size of columns will be persistent between sessions This information is not stored in the sh
182. e programmer are working away at some cue that you just have not managed to crack The designer promised to leave you alone to sort it out and walks on stage After a very short period of time he asks you to bring up some lights You politely do knowing that you can just release them after he s had a quick look After some time you realize that he really wants what he asked for recorded somewhere You can either select and release everything you were working on to record his pet project or you can release his stuff and deal with it later The third option is to Record Selected Being as you just grabbed his lights and set them to a level they are still Selected If you then wish to record them either to a Look a new cue or even Merging them into an existing cue choose the Selected option Only the channels and their attributes with this symbol will be recorded You can then release them and carry on with what you were doing This is very handy for doing what is colloquially know as surgery on cues It is worth checking out the topic called Blind Palette has two programmers one for the stage and one for Blind and you can have channels Selected in each independent of each other All Levels Block Cue This is the big dam Nothing gets past it Every attribute of every channel will get hard data in cues recorded using the All option For many of the reasons you may want to record State as described above you may also want to
183. e ready start the required effect and then manipulate the perimeters until the desired look onstage is complete Pressing the UPDATE key twice will now update that effect into the cue you are currently working on or you can choose the following syntax UPDATE CUE RECORDING AN EFFECT that is taken from states onstage i e steps 1 Create a new cue list You have the option to rename the cue list if required using the view function Go into the new cue list Take the first batch of channels to their required levels Record cue changing the record type to block levels if you do not want the levels to track into each other 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have all of your steps recorded Strand Lighting p158 Palette OS v10 6 Go into the cue stack starting in cue 1 double click the action column 7 The dialog box above should appear where you can change the follow mode from Wait for Go to the required action Repeat for all of your cues 8 When editing the last cue in the action dialogue box change the follow mode but instead of having F3 checked untick the box and choose cue 1 to link back to the beginning of the chase if required Now you have you separate effect you are able to link this to your main cue allowing you to start your effect on any desired cue form your main cue list This is done by following the next set of steps 1 Enter the main cue list and go to the cue which you want to gene
184. e the Display Menu or the S5 softkey to change the display to Time Events You can also press the Eicon in the Cue List Directory toolbar To return to the Live Display press S12 Note that the upper left pane where the Cue List Directory normally lives now contains pages of Time Events By default the first pages is called Time Events and is Enabled The lower left pane is where individual Time Events are added and edited There are twenty one column in total ten shown here and eleven shown below Name Macro Enabled When Offset Time Offset gt Morning clear Releaselue is before 00 20 00 gt OnHour Go A B at time 00 00 00 gt Fecal Goal at time ee U0 00 D Blackout DBOMBO A on C at time E 20 00 00 Testing Events The first column of the time events list has the GO icon If you move the Blue Box over this icon and press EDIT the Macro s for this time event will run immediately for testing purposes Adding Deleting and Naming Events To add an event press S1 Add Event The new event will be named New Time Event To change its name move the Blue Box to the name column and press EDIT If you want to delete one or more events position the blue box to highlight the events and press DEL A confirmation box will be displayed Verify Time Event Deletion Delete selected time events wW Yes Fas No Press ENTER to confirm deletion or UNDO to abort the operation Macro To ad
185. e this Strand Lighting p249 Palette OS v10 Note Assuming you are dealing with Looks with similar Priorities unless you choose HTP Intensity the last look activated will take all levels to their new recorded level even if that means lowering their level Inhibitive Looks can hold cue levels lower than their recorded level HTP Intensity Intensities can either be LTP or HTP By default when you record a Look the Sub Master will control the intensities in an LTP fashion allowing you to Busk looks taking levels up or down with the last one winning You can also make Looks resolve in a Highest Takes Precedence fashion by checking this box An HTP Look will not lose its intensity to other LTP Looks unless the LTP Looks have a higher priority Priority You change the priority of this Look to any value between 1 and 100 highest priority is Priority 1 Higher Priority Looks lower numbers win The exception is if another Sub Master or Cue List with the same priority sets the attribute to a different level again resolved HTP or LTP as determined by the properties of that other control The default priority is 9 such that Looks win over Cue Lists which have a default priority of 10 Attribute Behaviour Each Attribute Family can have a different behaviour when this Look is activated By default Intensity attributes are set to Manual control meaning that the level will be scaled by the handle s position from 0 to 100 Othe
186. echnical Support Strand Lighting p402 Palette OS v10 Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p403 Palette OS v10 Monitor Power Saver If you leave your system running 24 7 it may be a good idea to not only use the Screen Saver but to also turn off your monitor Launch the Power Options Properties from the Palette Control Panel Power Options Properties Power Schemes Advanced Hibernate UPS_ el Select the power scheme with the most appropriate settings for this computer Note that changing the settings below will modify the selected scheme Power schemes Presentation Settings for Presentation power scheme Turm off monitor After 1 hour Turn off hard disks Never Sistem standby The safest way to turn on the monitor after it has automatically turned off is to touch the SHIFT key on your console That is assured not to change any levels on the stage either by running cues or adjusting subs Touching any key or handle on the console will disable the screen saver and turn the monitor back on e It is not suggested that you adjust the hard disk power scheme Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p404 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p405 Palette OS v10 Network Printer Setup Printing is achieved by connec
187. ed by highlighting multiple Action cells and pressing EDIT to add follows and links e The A B and C D faders can be configured with S3 HARDWARE SETUP to either manually fade the Up and Down times crossfade the cues work as cue list masters or be manual two scene masters e You can write a BLOCK cue by selecting the ALL Levels Block Cue Record option in the Strand Lighting p55 Palette OS v10 record dialog box or just by right clicking on a cue and selecting Block Cue A horizontal line above the cue will show you that no attributes will track into this cue e You can rearrange the columns in the Cue List by clicking and dragging the column headers e Use the Tools button to open Virtual 5X5 Button Arrays for Groups and Positions Color and Gobo palette access e The command line supports range entry of when setting levels For example you can type 1 THRU 10 10 TO 1 ENTER To get TO on the command line press the key e When you record groups the selection order is preserved for fanning and staggered independent timing purposes e Configure the way the DBO Dead Black Out button works in S3 HARDWARE SETUP It can be a momentary button a toggled or disabled e Palette s Track Sheet can show you every parameter of the moving lights in your rig You can expand and collapse this detail level on a per channel basis Open the Track Sheets using S5 Display e The release button has multiple functions
188. ed networks Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity 4 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and click Properties Strand Lighting p401 Palette OS v10 internet Protocol TCPAP Properties General fou can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othenwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IF address automatically IF address Subnet mask Default gateway ee p m e Pari Lines m Ej iiH s Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred ONS server EEZ 68 Slternate ONS server 22 ey pI Oe 9 10 10 11 11 Note Advanced mMM Choose Use the following IP address Type in the static IP address and appropriate Subnet mask provided by your network administrator Type in a Default gateway if you need to get outside of the LAN i e connect to other networks or surf the web Type in a Preferred DNS Domain Name Server for computer and website lookups Click OK Click OK in the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box Close the Network Connections dialog box There will be no need to reboot the processor for the network changes to take affect If you need to change the name of your console on the network from Palette contact Strand Lighting T
189. ee Also General Hardware Setup Playback Bubbles Captured Attributes Strand Lighting p315 Palette OS v10 Release Busking Strand Lighting p316 Palette OS v10 Hardware Setup Grandmaster and Dead Blackout Button F1 Grandmaster A X F2 Grandmaster B F3 Grandmaster A Mode Fal Include Captured F5 PEO A Conventional Fistures Moving Lights Disabled Toggle The Grandmaster and Dead Blackout are used to control intensity channel of your rig Channels that are affected by the Grandmaster will be displayed with a red hat a hollow pipe and a broken arrow Grandmaster Mode Disabled Select Disabled if you don t want the slider of the Grandmaster to have any affect This may be set as a safety measure on shows that are strictly run from the Go button All Channels If you select All Channels any type of channel conventional or automated will be affected when you pull down the grandmaster slider Conventional Channels Strand Lighting p317 Palette OS v10 Conventional Channels are defined as channels that only have one attribute and that attribute is intensity i e dimmers Moving Lights Channels included in the Moving Light category are channels with more than one attribute where one of the attributes is an intensity channel Include Captured If this checkbox is on any channel that has its intensity attribute captured will be affected when the grandmaster slider is pulled
190. effect track just like any other attribute value o Busking With Palette s unique approach to storing entire looks rather than just levels the slider panels become incredibly flexible tools to busk shows live The setup and operation is far faster than other desks and core fade engine allows you to build up extremely complex looks and then tear them back down to their primitives in any order o Move In Black Never again worry about manually marking your moving lights so you don t see unwanted live moves on stage as cues come up without being limited to global parameter timing Each cue possess its own MIB timing as well as MIB Suppression o Timing parameters are extremely flexible from individual attribute family s wait fade Strand Lighting p Palette OS v10 and profile settings for every cue to traditional cue part architecture and extending into the very powerful Independent Timing of every attribute in every cue o Updating Cues It couldn t be made easier J ust press UPDT and Palette presents you with a list of possible items to update given your most recent changes including the current cue palettes used in the current cue track back cues or Looks that are being controlled by slider panels o Track Sheets Examining what is going on in your show during editing sessions can sometimes be very tedious Palette s Track Sheets give you a clear idea of what is moving when intensities or attributes and even tells you w
191. el Mode of channel you re using then press ENTER to close the dialog box Then move the Blue Box to the Attribute column and enter the starting output address for each channel You can also use the Power Patch to automatically enter a series of channels If you have automated lighting that needs an intensity patch and an automation patch enter each in the appropriate columns This is typical Contact with scrollers and tungsten sourced automated lights Fixture Settings Sometimes when you add moving lights to your rig you want the encoders to react a certain way i e when you crank the wheel right you want the light to move on stage To do this move the Blue Box to the Settings column and press EDIT or Insert to open the Fixture Settings dialog box Strand Lighting p264 Palette OS v10 After you close the box the Setting cell will have symbols showing which setting was applied Pan Invert Tilt Invert and Swap Pan Tilt shown below from left to right Chan Fixture Dimmer Type DMX1 DMX 2 DMX 3 Settings 1 Int YL2500 Spot Enhanced 16 Bit Atr B 1 513 Output Settings You can configure the Output DMX or Ethernet by tweaking its value at the very end of the Fade Resolution chain by moving the Blue Box to the Settings column in the Patch By Output display and pressing EDIT or Insert You will be presented with the Output Patch Settings dialog box 4 Proportional Patch If you want the Ou
192. ely jumping over some cues You do this by editing the Action of a cue 1 Using the arrow keys move the Blue Box to the Action column of the last cue before the jump 2 Press EDIT or INSERT to change the cue s action 3 The Cue Action dialog box will appear WaitforGa o ov F2 Folk Tine E Press S3 to disable the Run next Cue option The focus will move to the edit box below Type in or use the wheel to select the Next Cue The cue labels will appear to the right of this edit box Press ENTER to close the dialog box The cue list will now show the Link icon with the cue to which the next GO will link to w O 121 i Note You can also use the VIEW CUE ENTER syntax to get the Cue List Properties dialog box Using the Command Line to Links Cues If you start a command line with CUE the softkeys change to Cue specific functions Strand Lighting p235 Palette OS v10 Live Cue j i l Fiai r f 2 a W a I coh Hone e Lens 8 indep Block Unblock MIB Tene Time Typing CUE 5 S3 LINK TO 10 ENTER allow you link Cue 5 to Cue 10 If the cue already has a Link typing CUE 5 S3 LINK TO ENTER will delete the link If you omit the Cue Number the current cue number will be used See Also Creating Playback Loops Cue Properties Cue Action Macros Strand Lighting p236 Palette OS v10 Playback Loops _Links and Follows can b
193. epped pattern p119 Palette OS v10 Rem Dim Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX REM DIM Strand Lighting Press Rem Dim with channels selected will result in all channels other than those selected going to Zero excluding those from Submasters Double Pressing Rem Dim takes all channels to Zero including those from submasters O p120 Palette OS v10 Shift Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX SHIFT Strand Lighting Use with UNDO to restore previously released channel Note if Last Action Editing is on SHIFT UNDO will fully release any captured attributes Use with REL PB to release all cue lists Use with EDIT to enter the Times Display Use with STEP UP DN buttons to go to the top or bottom of a cue list Use with ARROW KEYS to select a range of cells with the Blue Box Use with PREV NEXT to select the previous channelto the current one or Use with PREV NEXT in dialog boxes to move the focus of the current control Use with GOTO CUE to open the Goto Cue dialog Use with GO to assert the appropriate cue list Use with BACK to go to the previous cue in cue time Use with MOVE COPY to renumber cues or move Looks Use with UP DOWN to adjust the selected channels level by one percent Use with Split Crossfaders or Single Crossfaders A B C D fader setup under S3 Hardware Setup to manually move backwards through a cue list When the command
194. er is located The Cue List may or may not be active The current and pending cues can also been seen in the Playback Bubbles Next The Next column shows which Cue is pending This cue can also been seen in the lower half of the Playback Bubble If the next cue is a Button all fade times are zero the cue will be shown in Bold text just to let you know something dramatic will happen when you press the GO Strand Lighting p196 Palette OS v10 button Remaining This column shows you how many seconds are remaining in the last cue that was run The total time is considered the sum of the longest Wait and the Longest Fade times This value may be O but other cues could still be running in the background if you ran multiple cues at once i e you stepped on the GO button Follow If the current cue has a Follow Action to automatically execute the next cue the time before the next cue s Go is shown here Fading This column shows you the total number of cues currently fading for this cue list You can see the total number of cues fading on the entire console by looking at the Fading bubble in the Status Bubbles If you have more than one cue currently running the current Cue Pointer will be a Green Light and the others will have a Yellow Light Cues This value is the total number of cues in the this cue list including all point cues Sizing Columns You can re size the columns in the cue list by clicking be
195. ernal mouse or trackball to control the movement of automated fixtures To Pan a channel hold down S2 and move the mouse side to side To Tilt the channel hold down S3 and move the mouse up and down You can also hold down both keys and roll the wheel or move the mouse freely to change them in tandem Fine Attribute Control Sometimes the ticks on the wheel don t give fine enough control For instance if you are panning a light each tick is one degree At a distance that can be too much of a move To get finer resolution hold down SHIFT when you roll the attribute On some attributes like Position and Zoom the display won t necessarily change but the channel will respond with finer movements Other attributes like color wheels will show you the steps between full ticks Rolling the wheel on Color Select takes you between whole colors but holding down SHIFT takes you to fractions of a whole move Strand Lighting p143 Palette OS v10 cl Select Attribute Pop ups Rather than rolling the wheel and changing values Live on stage you can also double press S1 through S4 and an appropriate list of options will pop up For example if you are on the Color encoder bank and double press S2 a large list will pop up i an TO open the large popups you can click on the S1 through S4 attribute softkey bubbles with the mouse or touch screen When the pop up is displayed the softkeys S1 through S
196. es Place any images in that folder you want to see when your screen saver is active 5 5 Press OK 6 6 Press OK in the Display Properties dialog box Note To change the power scheme for the monitor auto power off use the Monitor Power Saver Do not choose the Power button in the Screen Saver properties box as you do not have the proper permissions to change the screen saver See Also ELO Touch Screens Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p390 Palette OS v10 ELO Touchscreens Palette consoles can utilize ELO touchscreens This makes running the console much easier and is highly suggested Since the drivers are part of the XP Embedded build only the ELO Touchscreens should be used These are the same ones often used for cash registers are very durable www elotouch com Get the AccuTouch models i e resistive technology which means you can use things other than your finger like a fingernail pen etc You need to purchase the USB type NOT serial We recommend the 3000 series Once you purchase your touchscreens one or two will work you should be able to just plug them in and boot the system hot plugging is not suggested You will need to calibrate the screens To do this choose ELO Touch Calibration from the Additional Apps button Strand Lighting p391 Palette OS v10 Ol Elo Touchscreen Properties Video alignment enables the computer to convert touchscreen coordinates into i
197. es with the Blue Box Then press DEL to show the Delete Cues Dialog box Strand Lighting p229 Palette OS v10 Delete All Selected Cues ae i il y Again you have the options selecting to Retain Cue Data as described above Deleting Cue Parts If you want to remove a Cue Part you must highlight the Part with the Blue Box and press DEL You will then be presented with the Delete Cue Part dialog box Se ee a ae ee 99 including its tistures You then have the option to either remove the part and any channel that is in it or just move the channels into the main part so they will assume the normal cue timing parameters If you want to delete the entire cue highlight the main part before pressing DEL See Also Blue Box Part Cues Move Copy Tracking Strand Lighting p230 Palette OS v10 Goto Cue The Goto Cue dialog box is opened by pressing SHIFT GOTO CUE or SHIFT Q on the QWERTY keyboard Live Goto Cue List The selected Cue List will be displayed by default If you want to Goto a cue on a different cue list press S1 until the desired cue list is displayed The cues belonging to that Cue List will be displayed in the box below Tip O o Use the mouse to select a cue list from the pull down list Cue Once you select a Cue List using S1 all of the cue list s cues are displayed in this box Using the wheel you can scroll through this list to find the cue you want to go to Press
198. esk light You do not need to turn on the room light again o The room light and the desk light will remain on until you purposefully turn one or both off With Palette you record channel 1 at 80 If nothing else sends a command to that channel it will stay at 80 no matter what other channels might be added or changed Channel 1 will continue at 80 through all subsequent cues until it is told to change its level by a later cue One of the advantages of tracking desks is that you can have multiple cues fading simultaneously because each cue only talks to the channels it has information about That means that if a long fade is happening on say Channel 1 but Cue 2 runs and moves Channel 2 to different level in Short time that will not affect Channel 1 s fade Example o Cue l isa 45 second fade up on the cyc to show a slow sunrise o Cue 2 isa 2 second fade up on an actor s front light o Cue 31s a5 second fade down on the actor s front light w Tracksheet 51 Cue List A YB woo Retrieved 3 cues Fixture 1 Sunnse 2 Enter J E xit 1 t 80 d 80 1 2 t 100 4 0 When running the show you re never sure when the actor is going to decide to enter so inherently Cue 2 must be a called cue Chances are that the actor will enter at some point during the sunrise Pressing GO on Cue 2 should not affect the subtlety of the 45 second fade on Cue 1 To really drive the point home the actor may exit before the sunrise
199. essing EDIT or INSERT The Cue Action dialog box will then open Strand Lighting p227 Palette OS v10 none mmg om Ldi ICI Eiimnrresz WIE L a a J ee Erme 1 os le Loe E delav lade Pant See Also Follow Cues Linking Cues Profiles Macro Editor Move In Black Blue Box Renumber Cues Strand Lighting p228 Palette OS v10 Deleting Cues Deleting single cues Position the Blue Box over the cue and press DEL to show the Delete Cue dialog box or start i end The cue highlighted will be automatically be stuffed in the Cue Number field but you can type any other cue number before pressing Enter Rolling the Wheel will scroll through the cues in the list allowing you to read the labels to ensure you delete the correct cue If you want to remove a Cue Part see the description below Retain Cue Data Sometimes this option is referred to as Delete Cue Only What it actually means is that any important data in this cue will be moved to the next cue as this cue is deleted The exception to the rule is that it will not overwrite data that exists in the next cue and the deleted data will be lost You use this check box if stage management says that the cue has been cut Deleting Multiple Cues You can enter a cue range in the Cue Number edit box i e 1 10 to remove multiple cues from a Cue List You can also preselect the cues to be deleted by using SHIFT plus the ARROW KEYS to highlight multiple cu
200. existing cue not losing old cue data e Pressing S1 Delete and Replace will delete the existing cue and record the new cue data to this cue number using the record options specified in S3 and S9 above e Cancel will close this dialog box and return you back to the Record dialog box 5 5 The recorded cue appears on the cue list Tips o You can use the WHEEL to change many of the controls in this dialog box Holding down SHIFT while using the Wheel changes numeric values by 0 1 o You can quickly append a cue to a cue list that is not currently selected by pressing REC SELECT Using the Command Line to Record Cues If you prefer you can record cues without opening the Record dialog box by using the command line To do this you must press CUE first followed by the cue number then terminate the command line with REC Strand Lighting p171 Palette OS v10 CUE 5 REC The Record and Exclude Sub Masters options are taken from the Record dialog box see S3 and S8 above so whatever they were last set at will be used when using the command line to record cues Note that as soon as you start the command line with CUE the softkeys will change to This allows you to specify some other options before committing a record operation CUE 5 S9 TIME 4 REC CUE 5 S9 TIME 2 4 REC CUE 5 S2 Follow 3 REC Recording a Ranges of Cues If you want to record values through
201. ff you don t want As you are building looks by Selecting and Setting Channels you will notice that values get tagged with a delta symbol or triangle 28 A or A Ay E Values or attributes tagged with the delta symbol are ear marked for recording with the Changed option Some of the other options described below have their place but if you make changes you probably want to record them The other record options such as All Levels all carry baggage that you must understand if you are going to use them After you Record channels and attributes that were marked Changed the delta symbol disappears Those channels are now considered Captured You may want to Release them or record them elsewhere using the Captured option Selected Fixtures all attributes Selected Channels look like this Strand Lighting p176 Palette OS v10 28 280 Or The one on the left is just Selected and the one on the right is Selected and its intensity attribute is Captured and Changed In either case you may find something you like and want to record it to a Look Just use the mouse to select it or type the numbers in the command line then record using this option Other channels may be Changed below on the left or merely Captured on the right but not Selected or These will not be recorded if you choose the Selected option Captured Attributes Captured attributes are essentially under the programmer s control Or T
202. for Wait and Fade times is the same as you would use when editing with the Blue Box The notation is Wait Fade So if you wanted to set Channels 1 through 20 to Wait 1 second then fade in 4 you would type 1 THRU 20 1 4 ENTER which would appear as Fixture 1 thru 20 Intensity Time 1 4 The Channel grid would look like this Strand Lighting p153 Palette OS v10 1 16 19 ITs Is Using staggered timing you can have all channels in the cue finish their fades at the same time If you typed 1 THRU 20 0 5 5 0 ENTER which would look like this Fixture 1 thru 20 Intensity Time Oto 5 7 5 to 0 This would result in this Channel grid TETE E bored rA ee Vets E T E Note how Channel 1 does not wait at all but takes 5 seconds to fade whereas Channel 20 waits a full 5 seconds then snaps to its value Now say you wanted to add a 1 second Wait to all of these channel and not fuss with the Fade times Type 1 THRU 20 1 ENTER which would look like this Fiure 1 thru 20 Intensity Time Relative 17 Note that the syntax is Wait ENTER The Fade entry is intentionally left blank The Wait Fade times would then appear as 2 3 A 5 G i Piss f 1 5 f 1 8 f 21 23 CES ee ee ee te Se eS TB 3 9s J 4 25 4 45 4 7s E 4 9 5 5s es ee ee es i es i 4 1151 ei ea The combinations of this syntax are almost endless One more example that shows the
203. ftware from the Internet and install it because of the Embedded operating system and general security restrictions Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p414 Palette OS v10 Outlook Express E mail is included with your Palette Console To launch Outlook Express press the mail button on the Palette Control Panel or press the Mail button on the processor s keyboard If you console IS connected to a Local Area Nework that is connected to the Internet you can send and receive mail directly on your desk You will need your Internet Service Provider s SMPT and POP3 server names and an account name and password to set up the system Upon first use a wizard will guide you through the steps Fo Drafts Ouiltok Express Pie Ect Wire Oo Mie Create Mal Lepi Eepo Fier int Delete Send Recw Drafts E Cattook Esia _Bsupport horisancontral Fixture request f Local Folders Se Inbox E hixlure reques 5 Outbox is Q Sent Items D Deleted Ite E Drafts There are mo contacts bo on contacts to create aq working on a show right now and we need the ins version of this obscure Bendi light we re Hi i using fl suppy you the specs can you build t for us d Back to Palette Control Panel 0 Strand Lighting p415 Palette OS v10 Notepad Text Editor Launch the Notepad text editor from the Palette Control Panel if you want to make simple text based documents
204. g the command line Adding and Deleting Channels When you create a new show file the default patch contains 100 Channels of Type Dimmer and the console is patched 1 1 such that each channel is patched to the corresponding output You can see a Summary of how many control channels your console is authorized for how many you ve used and how many remaining by looking in the top left pane of the display when you enter the patch display Setup amp Output Devices EG Channel Allocation gt Fixtures Moving Lights Authorized Channels Used Channels n Remaining Channels S1 puts Add Channel into the command line such that you can type command like Add Channel 129 Thru 500 Note that you can also delete channel with S2 as simply as Strand Lighting p262 Palette OS v10 typing Delete Channel 12 Thru 15 19 If you were to type that command the Channel Grid would look like this 4 10 11 16 17 18 20 T The Channel Allocation above will change depending on how many channels total you have The Moving Light total is a sub set of the total channel count The used channels is how many DMX or Ethernet outputs you re consuming Patching Dimmer Type Channels to Outputs To patch normal intensity channels enter the patch in either way as described above If you have paperwork that lists the channels in order with their respective dimmer hookup you will want to Patch by Channel Patching is done in
205. gical problem that plagued these fundamental concepts was realized on a computer in North America at least People everywhere and since have praised Light Palette for marrying designer s desires and computer control by using a common language Almost every controller that has been accepted on Broadway since has used core concepts introduced by Light Palette With the advent of intelligent lighting so many more parameters have entered the equation that the language conventions that have evolved are discordant and technologically inadequate The language must be overhauled Conventional lighting control just worked in 2 space Intensity and Time That is not so with moving light control There are many many more parameters Moving light control has long suffered from the lack of this common language that designers and programmers and manufacturers could use To date intelligent lighting control has only stumbled along managing to keep up with an evolving technology and never experienced the Strand Lighting pls Palette OS v10 sort of watershed event that occurred in the industry with the introduction of Light Palette The problem was compounded by that fact that industry leaders were extremely protective of their intellectual property There was no sharing of control protocols between lights and controllers Each manufacturer vigorously protected the methods they used to control their fixtures and automated systems were sole source Only recently
206. h at 30 It is just that simple Cue 1 stores a value of 30 and both lights achieve it You rig looks consistent and symmetrical with no undesirable surprises and no need for manual re translation If Cue 2 was written such that both lights go to 70 as you ran it the fixture on the right would have to give up mid way Strand Lighting p21 Palette OS v10 Z ae It wouldn t stop the cue from running though The fixture on the left would go all the way to To be fair Cue 2 could not have been written using the fixture on the right This cue must have been recorded using a fixture that can achieve 70 Even though in this example it was played back using a 50 fixture it does not change the cue If you later swapped it back to a 70 fixture it would go to 70 It is only when writing cues that you are limited to the physical constraints of the light currently patched Shutter Control Example One the most time consuming endeavours when programming moving lights is shutter control To achieve desirable effects the shutter mechanisms need a lot of motors and hence a lot of control channels Typically most shutter assemblies have nine motors There are four shutters each using two motors to control its position within the aperture of the fixture and a ninth to rotate the entire assembly clockwise or counterclockwise Many times these channels are labelled like this Strand Lighting p22 Palette OS v10 You
207. have an Amber LED flashing Pressing this button is the same as using the mouse to highlight a cue list in the cue list directory To quickly record cues to a cue list even if it is not the currently selected cue list press REC then SELECT The new cue will be appended to the end of the cue list and the current cue list selection will not change Use with VIEW to get the properties on this Cue List O p100 Palette OS v10 Halt Back Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX HALT BACK e This button will Halt any running cues or follows on its cue list You can tell if a cue is running because the Green LED on the GO button will be flashing e Ifa cue list is Halted flashing Red LED pressing this button again will back up the cue list e Hold down SHIFT and press this button to go back to the previous cue using cue time e If the cue list is Releasing both the GO and the HALT BACK LEDs will be flashing The release time can be set in the Cue List s Properties O Strand Lighting p101 Palette OS v10 Step Forward Step Back Buttons PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX e Pressing the relevant button steps you through the Selected cue list using the Step Time set in the properties of the cue list Press VIEW SELECT e If the cue list is active GO had been pressed at some point the effect will be seen on stage If it is not active only the cue list pointer will move awaiting a Go e U
208. he level may still be controlled by other means i e Cue Lists or Sub Masters Until you specify that you want to change the level you do not have control over it with the wheel or keypad Once you alter the level the red outline will fill in and a white triangle delta symbol meaning changed will appear Attributes will get red a red triangle and text 28 a80 E or HE Using the Keypad For a full description of check out the topic Command Line Syntax Live 1 16 thru 22 At 80 Note If you want to use the QWERTY keyboard on the processor make sure that the Num Lock key is on before using the numeric keypad 1 Enter the number of the channel s you wish to select on the keypad You can see what you are typing in the Command Line Use the And Through and Minus keys to select multiple channels Press or on the QWERTY keyboard to set a level in percent Enter the percentage value If you just enter a single number it will be multiplied by 10 example hitting 5 ENTER results in 50 5 Complete the action by pushing ENTER Note o Alternately you can select your channels and roll the wheel to increase or decrease Strand Lighting p137 Palette OS v10 their level from its current position o Holding down SHIFT while rolling the wheel changes the values in Decimal rather than Percent If you want to set a level of 5 you must enter 05 ENTER o If you want to set a decima
209. he range of channels in the edit box and the starting dimmer in the First Output box If you are patching Moving Lights you will want to change the Fixture Type to something other than Dimmer To do this press S3 to open the Select Fixture Type dialog box Strand Lighting p307 Palette OS v10 Select Fixture Type 51 Fieture Manufacturer Type URL Contact Lite L West Martin http aA rartin corn Microh Morpheus http Aww morpheushghts com Robe http A e robe cz Rosco tp wa osco com SGM Light Technology http e sgm tt Space Cannon http w pacecannon com prod VARIELITE http Aayan tarllite com Wipro Http Ae Wor Corr Servicelamartin com supportfigenlute corn 52 Fiature Model Manufacturer Name Mode HDH Modified Version VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARPLITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE VARI LITE YLS500 YL2000 Spot YLIO00 TSO YL2000 Wash WL1000 TID YLTO00 TD VLSO00 Wash YLS000 Spot YLIOOO AS YLTOOO Al WL T000 A YL1O00 TS WL1000 TI YLTOOO T YL2500 Spot VL2A500 Wash Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit Enhanced 16 Bit a1 T 2r 15 13 14 16 20 ef 14 13 oe 15 13
210. hem frees you from recording af channels in all cues This lends itself nicely fo the Mecrod A Stew Conrad multiple cua lisi environment Palette also boasts Below aa links to fidl fledged help topics that describe some Palela Conio Pires a of the keys features that make Palette a very powerful desk gt Biefract nnie Mariaj Heer Cenc BOM ee a whee maw we nf Helo heui canine mre a e About Palette Displays copyright and version information for Palette including the User Interface Fade Engine and Show File version numbers Strand Lighting p 4 Palette OS v10 a PRS S e Upgrade Palette Allows you to either use Dealer Codes or go On Line to order more control channels for your Palette Horizon Upgrade Wizard Introduction My Horizon dealer has given me a Uporade Key ve run this application already and have recerred the Activation Test e mail C want to register my Horizon Device Hest gt gt Cancel honzoncontrol corm e Tip of the Day Use to access the Tip of The Day display which can provide tips and notes on Palette operation The Tip of The Day dialog box has a check box to determine if the Tips Should be shown at startup Strand Lighting p75 Palette OS v10 Did you know Palette supports 100 Priority levels for Looks and Cue Lists The highest priorite is 1 and the default priority for Cue Lists 1s 10 See also File Menu Display Menu Strand Lighting p 6
211. hen it moved last o Safety Net Features Tracking Backup Mirrored Saves Checkpoint Files and Recovery allow you to program and operate your show in a worry free environment Tip of the Day By default the Tip Of The Day is turned on when you start up Palette You can scroll through tips by pressing the S2 key on the desk and close the tip by either pressing ENTER or UNDO It is tempting to turn it off but keep in mind that these brief tips were written to point out some of the more subtle features Palette has to offer You would have to do a lot of reading of the on line help or printed manual to get these hints w Tip of the Day so Did you know 52 Next Tip To enter time in HH MM SS format press the decimal 2 2 27202020202020 key twice to make the colon 51 Show Tip of Day at startup You can read tips anytime by selecting Tip of the Day from the main Help menu Help On Line Help Why read the manual when it is all on line Every dialog box has context sensitive help by just pressing the HELP button Press HELP then any other button to get a description of its uses Press HELP twice to get the full help contents The on line help has advantage over the printed manual as the hyperlinks allow you to jump around very quickly from topic to topic Strand Lighting p Palette OS v10 1 Consol Jelp yor A Console Key Help Welcome to PaletteOS console key help You see this Screen when you
212. hen you are copying multiple cues from one section of a cue list to another and you use the Copy State option This will result in many block symbols appearing because the entire cumulative state of the cue list is recorded into each and every copied cue This means if you copy the sunrise entrance cues from the example above you will destroy the sunrise If you are copying entire sections of the show within a cue list it is best to copy the first cue in the range using the STATE option then all the Subsequent cues without that option Alternatively you can Unblock the section after you copy it o Putting redundant data in a cue Because you want to make sure that if you jump to the cue it will all be there is not necessary Palette always maintains the state of the cue list during Goto s i e if you jump around in the cue list it will make sure that what is on stage looks just like it would if you went to the first cue and pressed GO repeatedly until you got there Some other tracking consoles are pure Move Fade boards meaning that if you jump cues only the new fade information for the channels that are in the cue you are jumping to will be implemented Palette does not do this o If you have redundant data in the cues it makes it difficult to maintain the cues when you re editing them at a later date It is much nicer knowing that the data you are examining is all useful data and is necessary to get the looks on stage If there is a l
213. her or not you have channels selected before you initialize the tool If you type channel TOOLS FLASH that channel will start flashing You can then type another channel number and press enter to jump to it Use the wheel to scroll through channel quickly Once you close the tool the last channel will be selected and ready for you to set its level e To make the channels wait a specific amount of time after the GO button has been pressed enter a WAIT time Do this by editing the Cue Time box using the WAIT FADE syntax e You can remove any redundant data in your cue list by right clicking in the cue list and select Unblock Entire Cue List Alternately you can do it on a single cue or range of cues by selecting them with the Blue Box first before right clicking and selecting Unblock Cues e When editing wait fade times using the blue box use FULL to highlight the Wait time start of line and OUT to edit the Fade time end of line e To enter time in HH MM SS format press the decimal key twice to make the colon This is used for VERY long fade times or when entering SMTPE times e Holding down SHIFT while rolling the WHEEL on any numeric field will change the value by 0 1 e f you build a look that you like on one moving light you can use the COPY button to copy its attributes to any other light regardless of make and model This is on of the very powerful features of the Universal Attribute Control Model e The GOTO CUE button
214. hey cannot be controlled by Cues or Looks until they are released Captured channel may be marked as Changed and be ready for recording or they may just be Captured and not changed A good example of how a light can be Captured and not Changed is when you don t do a Release after recording a cue This is a Cue List Option Also when recording Looks channels are not automatically released One example of when you may want to record using the Captured option is when you have just completed a record command but also want to record the same stuff to a different place Captured Attributes Selected Fixtures It is possible to Select a channel and not Capture its attributes intensity being just one of its attributes Selected channels look like this 28 This channel has been Selected but the intensity attribute was not Captured In this case it is being controlled by a cue list It may have been Selected because you were Panning and Tilting it It may have also been Selected because somebody just called for Channel 16 but has not said what to do with it yet Therefore you have not touched the Wheel to Change its level This is often how Groups are recorded You may type 10 THRU 20 REC GROUP 5 ENTER By typing that we did not Capture anything That is why when you press REC followed by the GROUP button this is the option that gets put in the Record dialog box automatically All Levels Every channel and every
215. hown in the dialog box above That means that monitor 2 can be on the left This prevents you having to plug and re plug the connectors on the back of the processor Changing the Screen Saver l 1 From the Palette Control Panel choose the Screen Resolution Screen Saver button 2 2 Select the Screen Saver tab Strand Lighting p388 Palette OS v10 Display Properties o nee Ta Le Themes Desktop ScreenSaver Appearance Settings Screen saver CS Wait 15 minutes On resume password protect Monitor power To adjust monitor power settings and save energy click Power 3 Choose the Setting button Strand Lighting p389 Palette OS v10 El My Pictures Screen Saver Options My Pictures screen saver a How often should pictures change b seconds How big should pictures be Smaller 45 of the screen Use pictures in this folder d sHorizon Erowze SEE _ a m Stretch small pictures Show file names Use transition effects between pictures Allow scrolling through pictures with the keyboard 4 4 Adjust the setting to suit your desire You may change the Use pictures in this folder option to point to your own directory on the D drive the default directory is D l mag
216. ialog box to set attributes to their previously recorded level Example 1 THRU 4 Cue 6 Enter See Also Command Line Syntax Strand Lighting p106 Palette OS v10 Group Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX GROUP Press GROUP then ENTER to put the channels in a particular Look on the wheel Alternately you can set them to a level using the keypad Example GROUP 4 50 ENTER Press REC then GROUP then a number to record a Look The current levels will be stored in the Look but if you only want to use the selection group recall the Look using the group key If you want traditional Group at Level functionality use LOOK ENTER to retrieve both the selection set and the recorded attributes Go to Show Options to assign what Sub Master Page will be used when this button is pressed See Also Command Line Syntax Strand Lighting O p107 Palette OS v10 Look Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX LOOK Strand Lighting Press LOOK then ENTER to put the channels in a particular Look at their recorded level Alternately you can scale their level using the keypad by typing LOOK Level ENTER Select desired channels then press LOOK ENTER to take selected channels to their level in specified Look and apply their values as a palette reference Press REC then LOOK then a number to record a look Press LOOK REC to record a look
217. ibed in detail below but let s examine how we can move from one place to another on Stage given two stored end places PIT Mode Polar Movement In this example we are going to once again consider a moving head fixture as opposed to a moving mirror Moving head lamps achieve movement by physically moving the source and lens train with two motors within a yoke This Pan Tilt relationship equates to a polar coordinate system using azimuth and elevation When you move in this coordinate system if Strand Lighting p19 Palette OS v10 you pan more than you tilt as the beam of light intersects the plane of your stage it will move in an arc We have become used to this characteristic movement of moving heads Very good moving lights that move extremely smoothly are sometimes described as moving in an organic manner or looking like they are operated by a follow spot operator People are quick to forgive the fact that they are always moving in this arc pattern UAC gives you the option of how the light will move It doesn t have to move in an arc When a follow spot operator moves a light from point A to point B the light normally travels in a straight line PIT Mode Linear Movemer There is a Movement attribute that alters the way fades are calculated when you press GO If you record a cue using specific Pan and Tilt values and specify the Movement to be Linear the end points of the cue do not change but the method the interven
218. ical event is scheduled an you have set the Offset column to before or after If the When column is set to at time enter in the desired time in this column using the twenty four hour HH MM SS syntax If you re offsetting either before or after an astronomical event enter the desired time offset here Repeats Repeat Delay Today 0 2d 01 00 00 next at 13 00 00 g r 0 next at e0000 Repeats By default this column is set to a value of zero That means that once the event happens it will only happen once If you want the event to happen multiple times within this day enter a none zero value When you edit this field you can type a repeat value or roll one in using the wheel Note Strand Lighting p353 Palette OS v10 Regardless of the value of Repeats events will never roll over into the next day Repeat Delay When the of Repeats is none zero this column will become active The default repeat time is 1 hour 01 00 00 The minimum repeat time is one minute but any value greater than 60 seconds is valid for example 90 seconds or 00 01 30 Rolling the wheel while this box is open for editing increases the repeat time by one second No repeats happen outside of the current day i e past midnight Today This non editable field shows you the event s activities for today O o Events missed because the show file loaded after the event was to occur appear in grey text o Events that are excluded from occur
219. ications to cues Cue Lists can be assigned a Priority and can be resolved either using a Highest Takes Precedence method or a Latest Takes Precedence method The Cue List Directory appears above the Cue List Display and shows all the cue lists in your Show The Channel Grid display normally has a black background color When Channels are being controlled by another cue list i e the one that is not selected the levels will be displayed with a dark blue background The Attribute Grid always has light background Attributes being controlled by other cue lists appear with blue text Fixture Intensity Pan Tilt CTO Color Color B 1 LSUU0 Spot Q 60 2 LIUUO Spot t 100 yp 45 lt e 3 YL3000 Spot Q 50 g0 45 R 4 VLS000 Spot g 50 5 WL3000 Spot T 50 b WL3000 Spot T 80 aDSL t Blue f L000 Spot T 25 Fe e270 o LSUUU Spot t 80 tD t20 Note how one Channel with multiple attributes can be controlled by more than one cue list at a time Attributes that are at their default levels are shown in grey text See Also Cue List Cue List Directory Tracking Record Options HTP vs LTP Strand Lighting p48 Palette OS v10 Channel Colors and Symbols Strand Lighting p49 Palette OS v10 Fade Resolution The pecking order that the fade engine uses to resolve output channels in order of precedence is as follows Parked Output levels Intensities controlled by the Flash
220. ighting no asume responsabilidad por errores 0 omisiones que puedan aparecer Cualquier comentario sugerencia o correcci n con respecto a este manual favor de dirijirlo a la oficina de Strand Lighting mas cercana Der Inhalt dieses Handbuches ist nur f r Informationszwecke gedacht Aenderungen sind vorbehalten Strand Lighting uebernimmt keine Verantwortung fur Fehler oder Irrtuemer die in diesem Handbuch auftreten Fur Bemerkungen und Verbesserungsvorschlaege oder Vorschlaege in Bezug auf Korrekturen und oder Aktualisierungen in diesem Handbuch moechten wir Sie bitten Kontakt mit der naechsten Strand Lighting Niederlassung aufzunehmen Le mat riel d crit dans ce manuel est pour information seulement et est sujet a changements sans pr avis La compagnie Strand Lighting n assume aucune responsibilit sur toute erreur ou ommission inscrite dans ce manuel Pour tous commentaires ou suggestions concernant des corrections et ou les mises a jour de ce manuel veuillez s ll vous plait contacter le bureau de Strand Lighting le plus proche Information contained in this document may not be duplicated in full or in part by any person without prior written approval of Strand Lighting Inc and Horizon Control Inc Its sole purpose is to provide the user with conceptual information on the equipment mentioned The use of this document for all other purposes is specifically prohibited Certain features of the equipment described in this document may form the su
221. ighting p398 Palette OS v10 Network Configuration If your lighting console can be hooked to the building s network you can leverage off of standard networking capabilities such as mapped network drives network printers and Internet connection Most LANs have a DHCP Server Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol that automatically assigns network properties such as the IP address In most network situations you Should be able to just physically hook the network cable up to the back of the processor and either surf the web or find shared drives on your network If you have more specific needs such as the requirement to assign a Static IP address to your lighting desk for connection to other gear such as Pathport then you need to manually setup your network connection Use this button in the Palette Control Panel to launch the Network Connections dialog box Note If you hover over the button the tooltip will tell you the current IP address and computer name Manually setting up your network connection 1 1 Click on the Network button in the Control Panel Strand Lighting p399 Palette OS v10 Network Connections Mal File Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help qe L Far s i j i r a T b T Ei Search m Folders m l Address Network Connections F 5E gt Internet Gateway Network Tasks A Guelph on Miscou Create a new Connected connection Say Guelph on Miscou Set up a home or small office network
222. igning a Action to the Variable Macros are set using the Macro cell for the variable Double clicking on the Macro cell opens the macro dialogue box Action Macro Button Corn Cuelistioto4 nde xecuteFollows Service Sreas 1 LueListh elease Sernvice Areas CueLlistheleasel S Use OK to close the Macro defination screen Mapping Submasters to Variables As well as associating a Macro to the change in the variable you can also connect a Submaster to the variable Start by recording a series of submasters Display the Virtual Subs Display Menu Record a Sub in Sub Page 1 say Sub 3 Run the Sub by clicking on the Virtual Sub and watch the level change in the Channel Grid Display the Variables Change the Patch on the Variable Page to include the Look Page example omit the quotes B1 Sub Page 1 Double Click the Value next to the variable type in a new number and watch the Sub change to that value X X Testing 1 Testing a Button Press the Vision Net button and notice the value for the corresponding variable goes from zero to one 2 Testing a Slider Move the Vision Net slider and notice the value for the corresponding variables goes from zero to 100 Strand Lighting p350 Palette OS v10 3 Test moving a Sub from Vision Net Move the Vision Net Slider and watch the Variable Value change and watch the Sub Value change Strand Lighting p351 Palette OS v10 Time Events Us
223. ill be undone in the next existing cue the next cue is updated behind the scenes automatically For example O O O O Note O See Also Tracking Channel 5 is set to 60 in Cue 1 Channel 5 is tracking at 60 through Cues 2 and 3 You change channel 5 to 40 and update Cue 2 with Edits Track Forward OFF When Cue 3 is run it puts Channel 5 back at 60 You cannot select Edits Track Forward OFF if you are updating or recording the last cue in a cue list You can change the system default state of this option in S2 Show Options A Note on Redundant Data Blocking and Unblocking of cues Recording a Cue Deleteing Cues Show Options Strand Lighting p190 Palette OS v10 Track Sheets As Palette is by nature a tracking console a useful tool for seeing the dynamics of a channel is the Track Sheet This popup windows can be seen by selecting Track Sheets from the Display Menu w racksheet IST Cue Litt Yertago Fixture 72 out 73bing 74 bong 75 out 75 5release bally 76 Hello 77 FEEEL 7f Istrobe to ceiling 7 GF 1 V LIO00 TID fh 100 _ _ 4 0 4 G 2 VLI000 TID t 100 100 76 ih 100 76 3 VL1000 TSD G4 VLIO0O TSO h 100 a 0 2 5 VLi000 T50 O 100 p0 1 0 amp 10 VLI000 TSO E 11 VL2000 Spot t 100 _ 100 76 12 VL2000 Spot Tt 50 o 50 Ri 13 VL2000 Spot t 100 100 76 14 Y
224. imit output 262 linear movement 14 link 226 list 198 list of cue lists 198 Little Lites r 328 live 72 Strand Lighting p444 Palette OS v10 Live Button 94 live playback 257 live programmer 43 load 112 loaded bubble locate cues 193 location 290 locked 201 longitude amp latitude 290 look 248 look master pages 83 look masters 257 looks 253 loop 226 loop go action 201 low priority 53 lowlight 278 LTP 201 Lua code 337 M macro macro buttons 86 macros 343 magic sheets 328 mail 415 mapped network drives 409 mark cues 193 marquee 157 Marquee USB DMX 262 masking 142 master 201 Media Player 361 menu 72 MIB 287 MIDI notes 345 MIDI Show Control 201 MIDI SMPTE interface 331 minutes 206 mirrored save 292 modify 179 momentary buttons 86 monitor power saver 404 monitor resolution 383 mouse 142 mouse setup 394 mouse trackball 140 move 113 Move In Black 287 move fade 51 moving lights 68 mp3 411 mpeg 411 MSC 368 multi part 241 multiple cue lists _N Strand Lighting p445 Palette OS v10 network setup 399 network video 89 new 70 next 117 next cue non dim 262 note on off 345 Notepad 416 number 63 numbering cues 220 O odds 166 offset 201 offset times 275 offset timing 151 on screen keyboard 393 one to one patch 306 open 70 out 116 Outlook Express 415 output devices 262 overview 12 P pages Paint 417 palettes 260 pan invert 262 pan
225. in specific order You can have a cue that has just a main part and a Part G Press S12 and roll the wheel to select parts greater than Part K then press ENTER to close the dialog box If you select any part between A and K the dialog box will close automatically Strand Lighting p241 Palette OS v10 5 The Selected Channels will remain selected but will now show a superscript letter Showing the part Continue with Steps 2 through 5 until you have built the cue Record the cue Use the Blue Box to alter timing on the main part or any additional parts a 3 Dinner 2 5 Pan Reassigning channels to different parts when updating a cue without loading the cue 1 Goto the cue you want to alter 2 Select the channels that need to be assigned to a different part 3 Press the S11 Cue Parts button to open the cue part dialog box Select the button for the desired part The channels will show a superscript letter showing the part P 6 Continue with Steps 2 through 5 until you have assigned all channels to their correct part Press UPDT ENTER Use the Blue Box to alter timing on the main part or any additional parts a 3 Dinner 2 100 Fate See Also Timing Follow Times Strand Lighting p242 Palette OS v10 Independent Timing Deleting Cues including Cue Parts Tracking Fanning Strand Lighting p243 Palette OS v10 SMPTE Timecode on Cue Lists Cue Lists have a property to acce
226. ing ENTER will take you to that cue For timing options see below Cue Number This edit box is active by default when you enter this dialog box That means that you can press SHIFT GOTO CUE ENTER to quickly go to a cue directly Note The cue number of where the Blue Box is sitting before this dialog box is opened will automatically be inserted into the field Use Cue Time If this box is checked when you press ENTER the cue will execute in its recorded time Note The Goto Time box may not update to the proper cue time if you are just entering a cue number until you leave the Cue Number edit box This is because the dialog box does not know what number you are entering i e if you type 12 and expect the Goto Time to change to cue 12 s time how is it to know that you didn t want to continue typing to Goto cue 122 Don t worry Strand Lighting p231 Palette OS v10 even if the Goto Time number does not change if the Use Cue Time check box is checked when you press ENTER to close the dialog box it will use Cue Time If you want to check the time before pressing ENTER enter your desired Cue Number then press NEXT or TAB to change fields in the dialog box The Goto Time box will then display the recorded time Goto Time When Use Cue Time is checked this edit box is grayed out but it will show you the recorded time of the cue selected in the Cue Number edit box If you want to use a different time
227. ing PalettePC software Portable Remote Focus Unit Optional Tracking Backup Yes Crash Recovery Yes ILS Architectural Button Stations Browser Control Show Control Programming SMPTE MIDI Interface Serial Out External Trigger Events Telnet and Serial session Strand Lighting p12 Optional with ILS Interface card On local or networked Internet browsers Full programming language using Macro Scripts and the Lua language Optional Macros available to output RS232 commands 2 triggers on Palette hardware or ILS buttons stations or contact closures 16 Com ports and multiple telnet session available Palette OS v10 Astronomical amp Time Event Clock Yes No reasonable limit means that the limit is determined the processor and RAM on the system See Also About Palette Strand Lighting p13 Palette OS v10 The Universal Attribute Control Model by Horizon Control Inc Simplicity clarity singleness These are the attributes that give our lives power and vividness and joy as they are also the marks of great art Richard Holloway Communication and the expression of ideas is central to the art of lighting Creating great lighting is a team effort lead by the designer The language a designer uses to communicate with the team and specifically the console programmer is crucial to the process of creating the art The programmer in turn must then train the console in order to orchestrate the lights to ul
228. ing Pan and Tilt values get from Cue 1 to Cue 2 does It is not a linear crossfade mapped to a polar system but rather a transition that forces the Pan Tilt mechanism to travel the beam of light in a straight line Not only in a straight line but also at a constant velocity on the stage deck regardless of how far Cue 2 s end point is in relation to the hanging position of the fixture The result is that moving light cues will look even more organic when programmed this way Strand Lighting p20 Palette OS v10 Zoom Example The 540 versus 360 degree examples above demonstrated that you can swap one fixture for another and get predictable results Far more useful is the fact that the same values are used to control different types of lights in a similar fashion Looking at the zoom attribute demonstrates this again It is quite common to have two or more different types of lights in today s lighting rigs Matching beam sizes is a process of grabbing one type of light setting its zoom then selecting the other and tweaking it to match You cannot grab both and crank the wheel and hope to get matching results UAC eliminates the need to remember who made what light when you re programming Everything in the air is considered a tool to get the job done why Should you be expected to address each light in a different language Here are two lights one that has a zoom range of 19 to 70 the other from 10 to 50 Cue 1 is written to put bot
229. ing a recorded Look and that master is at 100 and you change the value you will have the option to update the recorded Look If you press S4 to Select All Palette will update in this order ensuring that redundant data is not recorded O o Looks O o Track Back Palettes o Track Back Cues o Current Palettes o Current Cue Strand Lighting p180 Palette OS v10 _ Position 5 erit Cyc palette in curent cue A B Cue 22 rings track back cue AJB Cue 50 verse track back cue A B Cue 3 fade track back cue Color 16 Red palette in track back cue 54 Select all 510 Edits Track Forward 59 Attributes All Attributes al J OK i Cancel e You can use the syntax 1 ENTER to remove hard values from channels You will see a white triangle delta symbol and a purple level indicating the level coming from some previous cue You must update the cue to commit these changes Other methods of removing values from cues are to use Blind as described below or the to use the Load method described in the Load topic If a Look is being played back at 100 and you alter attributes under its control the Look will also appear in the list above Modifying Cues in the Blind Display 1 1 Select Eind om Channel Grid Tool Bar or press SHIFT BLIND N Highlight the Cue in the Cue List to be modified Note that as you move the Blue Box the highlighted cues automatically get loaded Loaded A rB S
230. ion on Aal ond off ial S11 also toggles the pin P The GO button Console Equivalent GO QWERTY Equivalent SPACE e activates the cue indicated by the Cue List Pointer in the cue s recorded time e advances to the next cue in the recorded time activating any Cue Actions and executing any Follow Cues z The HALT button stops any cue that are playing back on this cue list from running Once the cue list has been stopped hitting the Halt button again will backup to the previous cue in the default Cue List Back fade time See S2 Show Options Console Equivalent HALT BACK QWERTY Equivalent Z The Go Back button is equivalent to doing a Goto on the previous cue in its own cue time Console Equivalent SHIFT HALT BACK QWERTY Equivalent SHIFT Z z The Step Back button replays the cue before the active cue in the default Step Time See S2 Show Options Console Equivalent STEP UP QWERTY Equivalent Use with SHIFT to go to the top of a cue list The Step Forward button goes to the cue after the active cue on the default Step Time See S2 Show Options Console Equivalent STEP DN QWERTY Equivalent Use with SHIFT to go to the bottom of a cue list If a long fading cue is running pressing this button will complete the cue in Step Time Strand Lighting p60 Palette OS v10 pa The Release Cue List button halts all cues on that Cue List and releases all channels controlled by that Cue List
231. irst column of the cue list on the desired cue or move the Blue Box to the first column positioning it over the Cue List Pointer and press EDIT See Also Cue List Cue List Pointer GoTo Cue Default Cue List Options Strand Lighting p218 Palette OS v10 Step Forward and Back A You can use the buttons on the console or the Cue List Toolbar buttons to step between cues Step Back a Cue Click the Step Back button N the Cue List Tool Bar to fade back to the cue prior to the active cue Step Back uses the default Step fade time as set up in Cue List Properties The QWERTY equivalent is Step Forward a Cue Use the Step Forward button B fade to the next cue after the active cue on the Cue List Step Forward uses the default Step fade time as set up in Cue List Properties The QWERTY equivalent is See Also Cue List Properties Cue List Pointer Releasing amp Asserting Cue Lists Strand Lighting p219 Palette OS v10 Cue Numbering Scheme Cues number is determined when recording a cue by filling in the Cue Number field Cue numbers can have three decimal places i e you can have 999 cues between cue 1 and cue 2 up to 1 999 If you are appending to the end of a cue list Palette will suggest a new cue number for you automatically based on the last cue number Note The record dialog box s Cue Number field is automatically filled in with the number of the cue where the Blue Box is sitting
232. is Strand Lighting p142 Palette OS v10 After selecting the desired channels softkeys S5 through S9 allow you to change the function of S1 through S4 For example pressing S5 will change S2 and S3 to Pan and Tilt Mark fProp FT Mode Note the text in the box above the A B and C D Playback Bubbles This text in this case Position describes the Encoder Bank for all of S1 through S4 Each time you press any of the softkeys S5 through S9 the encoder bank switches In some case there is only one bank available for a channel but in other cases there may be three or four banks Pressing the button repeatedly will loop you around from the last to the first bank Pressing SHIFT plus one of S5 through S9 will back you up on bank In the example shown above if you hold down S2 and roll the Wheel you will be Panning the selected channel If you let go of S2 the Wheel will revert back to Intensity control If you want to use the wheel to adjust the moving light attributes you must hold down the attribute you want to change Note o Sometimes the attribute that appears in S2 through S4 may depend on the attribute value set in the bubble to its left o Notice that S4 is Position Time This attribute is not in the Position family but rather in the Special family and is only placed on S4 for convenience Mouse Control for Pan Tilt If you want you can use the console s trackpad or an ext
233. is appropriate Note O o If you double tap S5 or any other softkey it will solo Position That is all other check marks will clear and Position will remain checked o While in the main Move Copy dialog box if you press SHIFT the Attribute button will look like this S land the softkeys will change to the following Strand Lighting p296 Palette OS v10 Pressing any of these changes the attribute masking without the need to open the Attribute dialog box You can also double tap any attribute family to solo it Cues TO move or copy a cue move the Blue Box to the desired cue You can select more than one cue at a time Launch the command and press the CUE button or S11 to open the dialog box to the Cue tab Move Cues 6 thru 9 to 51 Cue List Vertigo 52 Cue F midtwo 510 Fisture 8 floor two 10 back 17 mid two 12 loor two 53 First Cue Number MO j En 55 New Cue Increment S6 Move Cue State 59 Attributes All Attributes 312 Look 2 Ez K Cancel By default the destination Cue List is the same as the selected one but you can change that by pressing S1 When you enter the dialog box the First Cue Number is highlighted allowing you to just type a new number and pressing ENTER If desired you can use S5 New Cue Increment and change the S4 Cue Increment so the new cues follow a specific numbering scheme rather than the original offsets If the destinatio
234. is equivalent to you pouring more light on your painted set As you bathe the set in more blue it doesn t approach white unless you re working in TV then all bets are off The choice of how to get from color A to color B is up to you The method of attack is to write the two cues first picking the colors using whatever method you choose Then try running the cue If you like the transition you re all done If you don t go to Cue 2 change the color Space and Update the Cue and run it again Even though UAC literally fades in all six color Spaces you only have to change between three of them to see all the effects Choose one of o CMY or RGB o HSL or hsv o HSL or hsv Strand Lighting p36 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p37 Palette OS v10 Conclusion For years designers hands were tied when they were controlling automated lighting The language and control structure used had been imposed upon them by the equipment manufacturers This was not conducive to an enjoyable experience for anyone involved in the process Horizon Control s Universal Attribute Control Model defines a common language that designers and programmers can share and the complex processes of translating this language into DMX or any other control protocol is taken care of for you This new language has not been defined arbitrarily or in a vacuum We use colloquial terms that have been used in the theatre for years and present them to the programmer with sens
235. is page double clicking on them does nothing The Attributes button will open the Attribute Family Masking dialog box By de selecting different attribute families these will not be recorded by default when you records Looks to this page Therefore if you wanted a whole bunch of Looks that only had Pan Tilt information in them you would de select all but Position Then each time you went to Strand Lighting ps4 Palette OS v10 record a Look on this page the Record dialog box would already be masking out not recording any attributes except Position attributes This can be overridden in the Record dialog box at will Note o If you double tap S5 or any other softkey it will solo Position That is all other check marks will clear and Position will remain checked o While in the main Properties dialog box if you press SHIFT the Attribute button will look like this and the softkeys will change to the following Pressing any of these changes the attribute masking without the need to open the Attribute dialog box You can also press SHIFT and double tap any attribute family to solo it See Also Look Recording Looks Sub Master Types Recording and Using Groups Hardware Setup Slider Panels Hardware Setup Button Array Strand Lighting ps5 Palette OS v10 Macro Buttons Macro buttons are a method of setting which in turn can either run macros or change variable values to either true or fals
236. it to 0 Selects any channel that has a none zero intensity between channels 1 and 10 and sets their level to 50 thru on Selects channel 1 and raises its level 50 Note you must type 50 not 5 Selects channels 1 through 10 and lowers their levels 5 Selects channel 1 and raises its level 10 as determined in Show Options Selects channels 1 through 10 and lowers their levels 10 Selects channel 1 and fades it to 50 over 5 seconds NOTE you may want to stop reading here if you are not interesting in advanced command line support and Independent Timing Selects channels 1 through 10 and sets their levels to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Selects channels 1 through 10 and sets their p129 Palette OS v10 ENTER levels to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 over 10 seconds 1 THRU 10 50 1 10 Selects channels 1 through 10 and sets their ENTER levels to 50 channel 1 will reach 50 in lsecond channel 5 will reach 50 in 5 seconds and channel 10 will reach 50 in 10 seconds 1 THRU 10 50 1 10 Selects channels 1 through 10 and sets their 10 1 ENTER levels to 50 over 11 seconds channel 1 will wait 1 second before fading over 10 seconds and channel 10 will wait 10 seconds before fading for 1 second to 50 1 ENTER Removes the hard intensity value knocks out on channel 1 You may see a purple tracking color level and a white triangle delta symbol You will ei
237. ity to the column with the same name to the right of Time Offset see above This field is only editable if you have entered at least one row in the Only On field If for example you specified only on January 1 2006 and them entered a value of 6 in the Repeats field the events would happen seven time a full week starting on the 1st of January if and only if there are no Except On or Days of the Week exclusions Note Regardless of the value of Repeats events will never roll over into the next month Skip Days If you have specified Only On Dates and the Repeats is greater than one you can specify Skip Days This field is similar to Repeat Delay specified above Except On Apart from the Enabled value this field is the upper most condition upon which an event will not fire Regardless of your Day of Week and Only On selections if the current day is specified here the event will not happen Pressing EDIT in this column will open up a dialog box Strand Lighting p355 Palette OS v10 Except On Dates 51 Dates Day Month Year 10 Jan all E Sa Add y 53 Delete 7 wW OK ae Cancel Press S2 to add a line to the list then move the Blue Box using the arrow keys or mouse and press EDIT to change the value in each of the Day Month and Year columns The first item in each list is the word all You can add as many rows in the list is needed to cover all your dates If you want to delete any rows po
238. l changes modes based on the position of the first Here the first channel is set to about 10 and Selects the Glacier gobo for Indexing The second channel is set to about 10 which indexes the gobo 15 degrees Palette s blue attribute bubbles show how this would be achieved using UAC FGL ce isola a i TS Tr Strand Lighting p27 Palette OS v10 gl Whi Md gl Select gl Mode gl Index sy Fm CT F a im pi m n ri iy y 1 h 5 ta Er l Gr e L S l G F l Nell Nl a emt To rotate the glacier gobo continuously in the clockwise direction the first handle must be placed at 60 That changes the mode of the second handle and the 10 position is now meaningless To see a rotation of 4 RPM clockwise the channel must be set to 42 Where that value comes from is undetermined Truthfully you would never get a concise answer even if you to visit the factory that built the fixture and asked the firmware engineers To achieve the same results in Palette see the blue bubbles below Fast x a Slow Stopped Sjow S Fast ql Mode ROT CVV g Wihl Md D i a a ain he ie Select Changing the direction of the rotation on a DMX based system means you must travel the second handle through a bunch of values that are not of interest to you The gobo would slow down then stop then change direction and speed up again as you adjust the control channel This can be very Strand Lighting
239. l controls The control that currently has the focus of the WHEEL ARROWS or NUMBER KEYS will flash the amber LED on that SOFTKEY e Releasing channels works in three stages First time you press REL it release the last attribute you touched The second Release releases any currently selected red background channels The third press clears all captured channels Use it with SHIFT to make it an Oops key also a three stage process e The first time you press the TOOL key you must hold it down and use the SOFTKEYS to select the desired tool Next time you can just touch the tools key quickly to toggle the tool on and off Strand Lighting p56 Palette OS v10 e Did you know that any cue with zero time will appear bold in the Next Cue column in the cue list directory e To quickly copy a Sub Master touch COPY then the Sub Master s BUMP button then touch the desired new BUMP button e While in BLIND moving the Blue Box loads cues e To alter the selected channels by 1 instead of 10 press and hold SHIFT while using the UP and DOWN buttons e Time Events can trigger based on astronomical events such as sunrise and sunset Palette has longitude and latitude values for nearly two thousand cities around the world e Palette uses Horizon Control s Universal Attribute Control Model This very powerful technology allows you to do things like control color mixing lights in six different color spaces e Flash Fixture a TOOL works whet
240. l level enter 127 ENTER for a intensity of 50 Use the LOOK syntax to open the Apply Levels dialog box to reference pre recorded Looks as palette references Level Setting Shortcut Keys o UP or PGUP Increases channel level by 10 DOWN or PGDN Decreases channel level by 10 SHIFT UP or SHIFT PGUP Increases level by 1 SHIFT DOWN or SHIFT PGDN Decreases level by 1 FULL or HOME Sets channel level to full 100 OUT or END Sets channel level to out 0 O O O O Note The Show Options dialog box has a place to set the level for the FULL key which by default is 100 Regardless of what this level is set to double pressing the FULL key will take the intensity to 100 Using the Mouse to Select Channels For a full description check out the topic Using the Mouse to Select Channels and Levels 1 Position the mouse pointer on the channel number and left click The red outline appears 2 Multiple channels can be selected with the mouse by left clicking on the first channel holding the left button down and dragging the mouse to the last channel number in the group 3 Use the mouse wheel to change the level of the selected channels Using the Optional Button Wing to Select Channels With the optional Button Wing you can select a channel by pressing the corresponding numbered button The red LED will begin to flash To deselect it press the button again Note You do
241. l to select the desired channels in the list Once you have highlighted the right line press ENTER See Also Softkeys Described Strand Lighting p167 Palette OS v10 Selecting and Setting Channels Channels different states Strand Lighting p168 Palette OS v10 Recording and Editing Cues Recording a Cue Fast Description 1 Select Channels and set levels 2 Press REC ENTER or REC SELECT on the Playback you want to use 3 A cue with the next available number will be appended to the cue list This cue will use the default timing as determined in Default Cue List Options Note o If you want to keep the Record Cue dialog box open to add label or change the record options hold down SHIFT before pressing SELECT i e REC SHIFT SELECT o If the Blue Box is resting on the last cue of the cue list the Record dialog box will be automatically stuffed with a sensible new cue number Detailed Description 1 Set the levels you want to record in a cue The levels can be set by any method using the mouse the keypad Looks Groups etc 2 Press SHIFT REC or R or click the Record button W the Tool Bar 3 The Record dialog box appears Fa Lata IFS Cue Time E FE Cowan Time E Strand Lighting p169 Palette OS v10 4 Enter a cue Number The number in the S2 box should be the next available cue at the end of your cue list or it will be cue number highlighted by the Blue Box
242. lection is used to Select like channels It is a handy method of organizing your rig such that you can address large section of it quickly Palette is unique in that it does not have a Separate container or place to record groups it just uses the Record Look function This is done because sometimes when you use groups you want to just Select the channels and at other times you want to select them and put them in a certain state or at certain levels This is achieved in Palette by first Recording a Group then either using the GROUP G is the QWERTY equivalent button to just Select the channels Using the LOOK button or L key Selects them and sets their Levels So to summarize o Groups are recorded as Looks o The GROUP Button can be mapped to a specific Look Page in Show Options o To use a Group use the GROUP or G button then enter the Look number only the channels will be selected o To seta Group to a specific level press GROUP ENTER o To use the traditional Group At Level syntax press LOOK ENTER or LOOK ENTER o Channel order selection is preserved when recording Looks and is restored when calling them back This is useful for Fanning and Effects Check out the topic Recording Looks for information on how to record Groups See Also Looks Recording Looks Show Options Group Button Command Line Syntax Strand Lighting p259 Palette OS v10 Apply Leve
243. light systems the resolution was doubled to 16 bit providing 65536 steps of resolution Computers then calculated fades that produced a one to one relationship between the 65 000 steps directly to motors that moved the light from say pan stop to pan stop This concept persisted for years and given a specific controller tied to a specific lighting system pre programmed shows were reproduced faithfully night after night The downfall of this method of control is that these numbers 0 10 0 255 or 0 65535 mean very little in the real world They are actually only significant when used with very specific equipment When applied to other equipment these numbers mean very little at all and in fact are often meaningless UAC s objective is to provide an intuitive programming experience and a versatile control system that when played back can actually provide the operator information about the system it is controlling UAC does this by porting the control to an abstract layer This has a number of benefits 1 The handles you use to control moving lights are more inline with what you would do to manipulate conventional lighting 2 The numbers and words you use to build cues will actually mean something You will have an idea of what you can do with the lights and what is on stage by reading the screen 3 If you have mixed equipment the methodology you use to communicate with your entire rig is identical regardless of the proto
244. line SHIFTED Goto Cue Opens the Record dialog box for recording Cues or Looks Hold down to change softkeys to Tools menu Strike to toggle last Tool Opens Updated dialog box or updates Loaded items Opens View Properties dialog box Halts running cues backs up the cue list SHIFTED Go Back in time Move the Blue Box Used in command line to delete characters Use p438 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting Tab Delete End Escape Home Insert Page Down Page Up Next Prev Space to deselect channel to return to the Default Softkeys Delete s highlighted cue Levels Out Releases attributes and channels three stage SHIFTED restore Sets selected channels intensity to Full or the predefined level in Show Options Double press to set Level to full regardless of Show Options Opens Blue Box for editing toggle controls in dialog boxes SHIFTED Times Display Levels Display Intensity levels down by specified amount default 10 SHIFTED 1 Intensity levels up by specified amount default 10 SHIFTED 1 Selects the next channel shifted selects previous channel Go on pending cue in selected cue list SHIFTED Assert current cue O p439 Palette OS v10 Index a oe symbol in dialog boxes 77 10 key 116 16 bit resolution 142 1 1 patch 306 gA A B C D 313 abstract control 14 abstract fixture library accelerators 122 Accessibility
245. live but this setting determines what the default color space mix mode will be S7 amp S8 Look and Group Key Look Page The console has dedicated LOOK and GROUP buttons to address certain Sub Master Pages so while in the Command Line you can call them up by number Select which Page you want for those keys here These dedicated console buttons also allow you to quickly navigate dialog boxes such as Record and Apply Levels rather than using the depicted Softkeys normally S11 and S12 When in the command line the QWERTY equivalent of these keys is L and G Default Colors These options determine what colors are used for the Cue List Directory Cue List Attribute Grid and Uber Status On a per cue list bases you can change the colors so you can easily detect which cue list is selected Strand Lighting p286 Palette OS v10 Default Cue List Options Touching S3 will open the Show Options dialog box S9 though S12 switch you between the different setup options See Also Show Options Venue Setup Show Save Options Cue List Defaults Cue List look to these settings to get their default values Individual cue lists can override these settings if they want to by changing settings in the Cue List Properties box si ASSert Double Click Goto Time Asserting a cue list means to take full control again after other cue list have stolen channel from you To do this manually press SHIFT GO If you
246. ll worth reading the topic called Tracking As you are playing around with your lights you will notice that values get tagged with a delta symbol or triangle 28 Fa or A yc This symbol is often used in mathematics to show that there has been a change of state Attributes tagged with the delta symbol are ear marked for recording with this option This is considered the cleanest way of building and editing a show Some of the other options described below have their place but if you make changes you probably want to record them The other record options such as Cue List State and All Levels Block Cue often carry extra un needed baggage This can be seen in the Fixture Grid as the block symbols depicting redundant data that has been recorded in the cue that does not add to the look on stage 26 80 Tove Or After you Record attributes that were marked Changed the delta symbol disappears Those attributes are now considered just Captured There is a Cue List Option that can automatically Release the channels after a record is completed Strand Lighting p174 Palette OS v10 Cue List State Recording the Cue List State means to stuff all the data needed to get to where you are now in this cue It specifically does not mean record all channels and attributes right now That option is called All Block and is described below State is much more selective and for many of the reasons described in the topic called A
247. ll you if more pages are available If you press down on the last page it will wrap you back to the first page in the stack Note The A Bank only has a down button as the top left button is the Channel toggle button Buttons with recorded looks on them will glow a steady red LED If you forget what a button Is assigned to press the VIEW button above the bank Strand Lighting p323 Palette OS v10 I E ies LT Blue By Green Mag F G UY Yellow opin Fwd K LI Mi vi oO Purple Congo Blue f Neon green Fuschia ea Green E g RI 5 T RED GREEN BLUE ORANGE YELLOW LII vi W X Lu A large 5X5 grid will pop up on the screen showing you the label of the recorded look and it s corresponding button You can also pop up this display by using the first four softkeys while holding down the TOOLS button Once you select a button the 5X5 display disappears You can stop this behaviour by pressing the pin in the upper left hand corner in At any time you can press the fat up and down arrows to scroll through the stack as configured in Hardware Setup Button Array If you press the thinner button to the right of the title you will page between the four Button Banks A through D See Also Hardware Setup Button Array Tools Selecting and Setting Channels Select Softkeys Recording Looks Apply Levels Palettes Strand Lighting p324 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p325 Palette OS v10 Hardware Setup Trigger
248. lling Moving Lights All Channels in Palette have the possibility of having more than one attribute Conventional dimmer channels only have one attribute which is their level O 100 You can see these levels in the Channel Grid 31 32 33 34 35 36 ee Il i 41 42 43 44 A5 46 Channels that have additional attributes can be identified in the Channel Grid by the red triangle next to the channel number These triangles will appear after you patch channels other than those of type Dimmer The additional attributes of the channel are shown in the Attribute Grid Fexture Intensity Pan mh CoB Coet Foi Pos Tamo Color Time 2 VL500D I Co l mo PERAE E 34 VL5000 1 L5000 ae YESIL 43 WL50D n The Intensity value is repeated in this grid for convenience As you select different attributes to control the columns will autoscroll to show your their values but the Channel column and the Intensity column remain on the left hand side Note The Display Menu allows you to park an attribute grid on a second monitor If you are displaying both the Attribute Grid below the Channel Grid as well as the Second Attribute Grid only the one on the main screen will autoscroll Attribute Control To take control of a moving light select it and set its intensity level using any of the methods described in the topic Selecting and Setting Channels The softkeys will then change to look like th
249. lockwise changes the purpose of the fourth from Index to Speed and the units change from degrees to RPM Note that the actual gobo Glacier does not change qi Whi Md as lect gi Mode qlSpeed Select Glacier __ SS Rot CW ___ 4 RPM _ Strand Lighting p33 Palette OS v10 While this looks straight forward and concise to the user behind the scenes UAC is mapping all of these controls to the appropriate DMX channels regardless of how convoluted the protocol is An added benefit of this method of masking and unmasking attributes is that controls like Speed that use RPM is not overwritten when the encoder changes to Index and uses Degrees When you come back to Speed the RPM value you left it at will persist UAC essentially gives you more handles than the fixture manufacturer allotted Phantom Abstract Attributes As seen above exposing additional controls that the fixture manufacturer didn t allot for makes controlling some types of lights more convenient An ideal example of this is RGB LED fixtures Traditionally the only controls the user can adjust are Red Green and Blue Distinctly absent is an Intensity attribute The undesirable side effect of this is that if you pull down the Grand Master the LEDs intensities remain unchanged To blackout the fixtures you have to adjust three parameters rather than one This becomes inconvenient when you just want to lower LED based fixtures level or take them out in one cue to only re
250. low light shows that fades are still happening on these cues although the cue list pointer is elsewhere ai A yellow light with the pause symbol in it shows that the cue list has been halted a A green light shows that this cue is currently fading and this is where the cue list pointer is Tip e e If you hold down SHIFT while pressing the STEP UP or STEP DN buttons the Cue List Pointer will jump either to the first or the last cue in the Cue List e If you hold down SHIFT and press GO the cue list pointer will not advance but the cue list will assert e f you hold down SHIFT and press HALT BACK instead of backing up in Back Time as set in the Default Cue List Options you will go to the previous cue in Cue Time e f you quickly want to complete a cue that is running press STEP DN See Also Cue List Releasing amp Asserting Cue Lists Playback Bubbles Strand Lighting p204 Palette OS v10 Autoscroll Cue List Scroll Lock By default Cue Lists are set to scroll automatically as Cues are executed To enable or disable this function click the Autoscroll Cue List button in the Cue List Toolbar or press S9 when no channels are selected al If this icon shows Autoscroll is on Scroll Lock is off Cues will automatically scroll as they are executed The current cue will be third from the top of the list The softkey will look like this cht Scroll Lock Note The Blue Box will follow the Green
251. ls Palettes Palette does not have a separate storage container for palettes like some desks do Likewise Groups are not stored in a container called Groups The Look concept is used to achieve all of these goals That is you record ideas to Looks then you can later use those Looks either on the COM mane rie or by pushing up sliders or by referencing them indirectly and recording that reference in a Cue or another Look The reference method is commonly referred to as Palettes Generally you think of Palette as a noun but in Palette it is a verb one thing is used by another thing as a palette Those things can be either Looks or Cues and either can be used by anything Using Look Levels Check out the topic called Command Line Syntax on how to call up raw recorded Look levels directly by typing them in If you want to take advantage of the indirect reference functionality you must us the Apply Levels dialog box To use it select channels then type LOOK The Apply Levels dialog box will open 511 Que SPIN REV Red STDOUT S 7 iT it L Eee Sl Attributes EE o You can also use the S5 POS or S6 COL etc syntax to open the Apply Levels dialog box Doing so will automatically select the first Look Page that uses the appropriate attribute masking O o You can apply parts of the recorded Looks by using the Attribute filtering If the desired Look Page is not already selected use
252. luminated The sliders must be setup to hold Looks e Your hardware can be setup to control Looks via the sliders Inhibitive e Inhibitive Sub Masters proportionally scale the intensity attribute of a channel If the intensity of a channel is set to 50 by some other means if you pull the inhibitive Sub Master at 50 the output will be 25 e The home position for a Inhibitive Sub Master is Full 100 e The intensities of channels being limited by inhibitive Sub Masters are displayed in yellow with a red box e The LED on a bump button that is setup to control an Inhibitive Look will flash if its slider is not at the top It will flash rapidly if the slider is sitting at the bottom See Also Recording Sub Masters Hardware Setup Slider Panels Channel Colors and Symbols Busking Strand Lighting p251 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p252 Palette OS v10 Recording Looks For a complete description of Looks and different Look types check out the topic Looks Palette does not have a collection of things called Groups Groups are built using the Record Look Syntax and used by pressing the GROUP key or G and referencing a recorded Look number Your hardware can be setup to control Looks via the sliders Note o The very fastest way to record a Look is to build a look on stage then press REC BUMP on the desired Sub Master o If you want to keep the Record Look dialog box open to add label or change the record
253. m the viewer if you ve set up an Outlook Express account on your console You can Launch Adobe s PDF reader from the Additional Applications button or just browse the hard drive with Explorer and double click on your PDF files Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p406 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p407 Palette OS v10 Shutdown Console Choose this button from the Palette Control Panel if you want to power off your console You can also press the LOG OFF button on the processor s keyboard An OK Cancel dialog box will ask you to confirm P Shutdown you choose Yes and Palette is running you will be asked whether or not you want to exit Palette If you have not saved recent changes Palette will ask if you want to save those before you exit Show Modified Show has been modified save changes w Yes Fs No e DMX transmission will cease and the console lights will turn off when you shutdown the Palette software even if you do not shut down the processor Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p408 Palette OS v10 Applications Group Windows Explorer Launch Windows Explorer from the Control Panel to manage your hard drive The D will nominally have 35 GB of space available to you for whatever purposes you choose Store show files pictures MP3s text files etc Sr Public D File Edit ew Favorites Tools Help i gt 3 b Search E Folders Ei Add
254. mage coordinates 4lign the touchscreen whenever vou Thitially install the touchscreen drivers Change the touchmonitor or touchscreen hardware Notice the cursor isn t lined up with vour Finger This dialog box will let you change various options for the touchscreens most importantly the calibration To do this use the mouse to touch the Align button The screen should go white and you will be presented with a red target to touch Do this with your finger from a typical viewing angle You will repeat this two more times then choose OK to exit O Strand Lighting p392 Palette OS v10 On Screen Keyboard If you are using Touch Screens on your console you may want to launch the On Screen fea E p d Keyboard from the Additional Apps button in the Palette Control Panel n S5Screen Keyboard COCO procen See Also ELO Touch Screens Palette Control Panel Additional Apps Strand Lighting p393 Palette OS v10 Trackpad Properties Palette s integrated trackpad has many options that can be adjusted by selecting the Mouse Trackpad options from the Palette Control Panel 1 1 To enable or disable tap clicks on the pad or to change the button functions select the Taps and Buttons tab GlidePoint On USB1 Port Properties erika i eo oe N e l Gestures Options Devices Hardware Scrolling Taps and Buttons Pointers Motion Wheel Button assignments GD
255. n applies a fade using a predetermined rate to raise and lower the current look This code shows the actions you would put on the Raise button Similar code would be put on the Lower buttons using HC LookFadeRate Main CurBut 0 5 rather than the third parameter being 100 as shown below RAISE BUTTON DOWN ACTION make global variable CurBut invalid CurBut 1 loop through first 5 buttons to see which one is down fori 1 5 do iS button i down if HC VariableGet Hall i 1 then store away button number CurBut end end only do if button is valid if CurBut 1 then Start a 5 sec rate fade of the look on the current button HC LookFadeRate Main CurBut 100 5 end RAISE BUTTON UP ACTION only do if button is valid if CurBut 1 then stop the fade started in RAISE BUTTON code HC LookFadeStop Main CurBut end Example Occupancy Sensor using File IO This example shows how scripts can access the operating system s disk input and output routines All the Variables on this Variable Page have the same code and are tied to occupancy Strand Lighting p340 Palette OS v10 sensors such that when the sensor is tripped the macro is fired The script finds out the name of the sensor that is tripped and writes the data to a log file Code for all sensors opens file for appending local f 1i0 open d People log a get variable name and write log file f write HC GetScriptSource n
256. n cue numbers already exist you will be presented with this dialog box Delete Destination Range Destination Cue Range is not empty delete cues and continue w Yes J No Cue State If you Move or Copy a Cue with the Cue State option checked Palette figures out which channels and attributes have been used in this cue list up to the source cue then takes their current value Strand Lighting p297 Palette OS v10 and stuffs it in the destination Check out the topic called A Note on Redundant Data to figure out if that is desirable Attributes If you want you can filter out different information from the source cue and then not use it in the destination cue To do this press the Attributes button By default all check boxes will be checked You can customize this any way you like For instance if you had a great mixed color in Scene 1 on the cyc but now wanted that same color on the stage you may copy the cyc cue to a new cue using just the Color Attributes Note O o If you double tap S5 or any other softkey it will solo Position That is all other check marks will clear and Position will remain checked o While in the main Move Copy dialog box if you press SHIFT the Attribute button will look like this and the softkeys will change to the following Pressing any of these changes the attribute masking without the need to open the Attribute dialog box You can also double tap any a
257. n such a way that you visit Cyan along the way In some circumstances this will be a more desirable transition than that Shown above HSL Crossfade Color A Color B Color The Hue Primed version of the well defined HSL color space just shifts the spectrum such that each end does not include Red It could be shifted any amount but Horizon Control shifted it 180 degrees such that Cyan now appears at each end In the Cue 1 Cue 2 example going from Blue to Green in the HSL color space now produces a virtual rainbow of colors along the way This can be a very powerful effect but the transition will be different for every combination of colors recorded and it will be up to the designer to choose If Cue 1 was Purple and Cue 2 was Yellow going through Red might not seem like such a bad idea To do that you would have to use this color space If you use the more common HSL you go through Blue Cyan and Green to get there Again maybe that is desirable hsv The Hue Saturation Value color space is also known as the Deep color space HSL works well for emissive fixtures like LEDs but not so good for fixtures that are hitting your set As you increase the brightness on you set you don t want the hue to change UAC offers the hsv color space to solve this problem where Luminance is substituted by value As the value attribute increases hues become more saturated With hsv hues never progress through the pastels to white This
258. na me seperator Sub Master Automation HC LookFade page looknumber value seconds HC LookFadeRate page looknumber value seconds full scale HC LookFadeStop page looknumber HC LookGetValue page looknumber Attribute Manipulation HC AttributeGetValue fixture attribute_namel HC AttributeFade fixture attribute_name value time Automation HC PatchFixture fixturel intensity dmx attribute_dmx manufacturer model HC RecordLook look_page look_ number merge replace IPCGLSTE label HC RecordCue cue_list cue_number merge replace IPCGLSTE cue_time label HC ReleaseAll HC UIMacro macro info macro info Below are a few examples to get you started writing Lua scripts in Palette quickly Much more detailed examples and documentation of the language can be found on line Strand Lighting p339 Palette OS v10 Example Raise Lower on Architectural Button Station One of the common button stations to have in an architectural installation is a 6 button scene set On Off plus four scenes These button stations also have a Raise Lower rocker button Making buttons 1 through 6 part of the same radio group each fading in a look on the Button Down action then fading it out on the Button Up action makes for an easy preset selection Where it becomes a bit more tricky is utilizing the Raise Lower buttons The following code determines the currently selected scene the
259. nal Palette uses closest match on Cue List name if omitted Palette will use A B Note If a GOTO Cue O is sent Palette will Release the cue list Strand Lighting p368 Palette OS v10 O2 STOP Halts currently running transition s on the active Cue List 02 STOP lt Q number gt optional required if Q list is sent 00 delimiter lt Q list gt optional Palette uses closest match on Cue List name if omitted Palette will use A B 03 RESUME Causes STOPped transition s to continue running If no Cue Number is specified the current cue list will continue if Halted 03 RESUME lt Q number gt optional required if Q_list is sent 00 delimiter lt Q list gt optional Palette uses closest match on Cue List name if omitted Palette will use A B 04 TIMED GO Starts a timed transition or fade to a cue If no Cue Number is specified the next cue in numerical sequence GOes If a Cue Number is specified that cue GOes Transitions run until complete Time is Standard Time Specification with subframes type ff providing anything from instant to 24 hour transitions 04 TIMED GO hr mn sc fr ff Standard Time Specification lt Q number gt optional required if Q_ list is sent 00 delimiter lt Q list gt optional Palette uses closest match on Cue List name if omitted Palette will use A B OA RESET Is equivalent to releasing all cue lists OA RESET See Also MIDI SMPTE Interface SMPTE Time Code on Cue List
260. nd sets its pan parameter to 50 degrees 1 S5 Pos S2 Pan 50 5 ENTER Select channel 1 and fades its pan parameter to 50 degrees from its current location over 5 seconds 1 S7 Gobo S2 Select 4 ENTER Select channel 1 and sets selects the fourth gobo in the gobo wheel Note slot 1 is open 1 S4 Gobo Index 90 ENTER Select channel 1 and sets its gobo index to 90 degrees Note if the GOBO attributes are already on S1 through S4 see step above then you do not need to press S7 1 THRU 10 S4 Gobo Index 90 Selects channels 1 through 10 and relatively ENTER indexes all their gobo wheels 90 degrees clockwise from their current index position Note the word Relative appears on the command line when you press 1 S2 Pan 45 ENTER Pans channel 1 forty five degrees counter clockwise from its current location Note the puts the word Relative on the command line whereas the directly following it depicts a negative relative movement 1 THRU 10 S2 Pan 0 90 ENTER Pans the range of channels 1 through 10 from 0O degrees to 90 degrees such that the first channel is at O degrees and the last is at 90 degrees and the remaining channels are spread evenly through the range Note The key puts the word TO on the command line 1 THRU 10 S4 Gobo Index 90 Takes channels 1 through 10 and adds or 90 ENTER subtracts a scaled gobo
261. ng the Blue Box highlight the Action cell for the cue that is going to trigger the follow and press EDIT Choose a Follow type from the drop down list box Wait for Go o Wait for Go Normal cue runs fade and stops waiting for the operator to press Go again o Follow After Fade the follow will happen after the longest fade time of the cue is complete If you change the fade time you will not have to adjust the follow time o Follow In Time After pressing GO the follow to the next cue happens after a time you specify o Follow Immediate The follow happens exactly as the cue is executed follow in O time Strand Lighting p233 Palette OS v10 If you selected Follow In Time enter a time in the Follow Time text box Click press Enter to close the dialog box and complete the action Using the Command Line to add Follows If you start a command line with CUE the softkeys change to Cue specific functions 5 S2 FOLLOW 10 ENTER sets Cue 5 to Follow In a Time of 10 seconds to the next cue If the cue already has a Follow set any type of Follow typing CUE 5 S2 FOLLOW ENTER will clear the follow making it Wait for Go If you omit the Cue Number the current cue number will be used See Also Linking Cues Cue List Properties Creating Playback Loops Strand Lighting p234 Palette OS v10 Linking Cues In some situations you may want to link one cue to another in the same cue list effectiv
262. ngle delta symbol or purple text with a white triangle or cyan text with a white triangle indicates intensity levels after using the 1 ENTER syntax to remove hard commands knockout These changes are marked to be recorded or updated 28 Pat Fan Ciy C or A red level with a red or white triangle delta symbol indicates that you have changed the value but it is currently not Selected and has not been recorded yet It is Captured Strand Lighting p124 Palette OS v10 28 28 amp Fa or or A time value with either the s indicator or the MM SS syntax shows that you have changed an Independent Timing value and you are in the Times Display or CVE Just a red value indicates that the channel s attribute is Captured probably just recorded but not released A yellow level with a flash symbol indicates that the Channel s intensity is currently under control of the Flash Channel or Lowlight tool 28 Blue levels represent Channel levels that have moved up or are moving up in the active cue Green levels represent Channel levels that have moved down or are moving down in the active cue Blue triangle with a C to the right of a level in the Channel Grid show intensities that are referencing another cue These are set using the CUE syntax Blue triangle with a L to the right of a level in the Channel Grid show intensities that are referencing a look These are set using the
263. nications Plug in Options Options m Eee i u a a a See Also SMPTE Time Code on Cue Lists Macro Buttons MediaPlayer Strand Lighting p361 Palette OS v10 PowerPoint Automation Palette s macro editor has five PowerPoint specific macros you can assign to cues or macro buttons Macro Editor 51 Avallable S2 Macros WEI z Comment PawerPnintLastSlide PowerPontPrey Slide PowerPointhext5 lide PowerPoint otoSlide FinturelheckFornwyard Fisturelheckb ack MediaPlayerPlay MediaPlayerStop MediaPlayerPause MediaPlayer panem SeralSetup Senal ut EES 54 Edit 4P 55 Up OME TET 56 Status String next slide wW OK You will need a separate PC to run your presentation that is connected to your Palette processor via a LAN or cross over Cat5 cable You must download the template PowerPoint file from the Strand Lighting web site and modify it to include your own slides It is important to name the file ending with a number between 1 and 9 This number will match the macro s Machine ID number Edit Macro PowerPointhextSlide Macro PowerPoint ests lide machine_ id Description Go to the nest PowerPoint slide on machine id 51 Comment 2 Arguments Argument Yalue w OK Pai Cancel In your version of PowerPoint you may need to go into TOOLS MACROS SECURITY and set the Security Level to Medium or Low
264. nizing cue lists and external devices Dptional _ Mi Devices SMFT Dergi See the Install Guide that came with your MIDI SMPTE Interface for details on installing the interface e e MIDI connects using the industry standard MIDI connector DIN 5 e SMPTE connects using a balance line level signal through standard XLR connectors e A potentiometer is provided to attenuate the incoming SMPTE level The LEDs on the back of the unit give you status COM LED Status LED Green Flash gt no Midi SMPTE No LED gt no power Red Flash gt transmit SMPTE Solid Green gt Power CPU not running Green Red gt Receive SMPTE Amber Green slow gt heartbeat no communication to console Amber Green fast gt connected to console See Also SMPTE Time Code on Cue Lists MIDI Show Control Strand Lighting p331 Palette OS v10 Remote Focus Unit Strand Lighting offers an optional wired or wireless Remote Focus unit that allows users to select and set channels intensities run cues or looks and perform channel or output checks There is a PC version of this software available for optional installation when you download Palette PC Your system must be authorized to use an RFU when you are live You can use the software when you are in off line mode for demonstration purposes only Online Online 100 Show I 100 showb 200 Rex Lights 200 idle 400 big Tshowc 500 lights
265. non zero the button s LED will be illuminated Variables can be set as o Momentary only down as long as your finger is on it o Toggle first press down second press up o Radio only one variable in radio group can be down at a time Variable Pages can also be patched to Cue Lists and Look Pages i e Cue List 1 or B1 B2 Cue List 1 or Main If you have the optional MIDI SMPTE Interface you can receive MIDI Notes Patch MIDI channels using M for channel s 1 through 16 The Order field will corresponded to notes 1 through 127 Receiving a NOTE ON will set the variable to 1 while a NOTE OFF will set it to O When a variable leaves the zero state the corresponding Cue or Look will be activated Variable Pages patched to Look Pages will be O when the look handle is at the bottom and 100 when the look handle is at the top or the bump button is pressed Setting a variable to any value between those two numbers sets the look s virtual handle to that level and vice versa Individual variables can have Cues or Looks specified in the order field i e Main 1 B2 5 Variables can have macros attached to them l D CEI Wi Action Macro Button Dorn Cuelistioto4 nde secuteFollows Service Sreas 1 LueListhelease Sernvice Areas lueLlistheleasel S Button U a Button D owr On Value Off Value Up Through Down Through Fass Through Value Change There are eight different state change events
266. not need to deselect channels if you change the preceding selection s attributes before making a new selection To select a range of channels press and hold the first channel in the range then press the last This works for deselecting ranges in the middle of selected channels Using the Select Softkeys There is a whole topic that describes the use the S10 Select softkey called Select Softkeys Strand Lighting p138 Palette OS v10 These are very fast ways to select all odd or even channels or all channels going up or all channels in blue NEXT PREV Button While selecting channels touching the NEXT button will Select the next channel Holding down SHIFT and pressing the NEXT PREV button will select the previous channel number You will not see these selections in the command line See Also Controlling Moving Lights Select Softkeys Command Line Syntax Fanning Apply Levels Channel s States Fade Resolution Releasing Channels Strand Lighting p139 Palette OS v10 Using the Mouse to Select Channels and Set Levels The mouse can be used to select channels and set thier levels To select one or more channels 1 Before selecting a channel it will look like this green may be magenta blue or 2 Left click the Mouse on the Channel Grid to select a channel It should look like this 28 3 Hold the left button down and drag across the Channel Grid to select several adjoining channels 4 Tou
267. ns to raise or lower the selected channels intensity by the pre determined level in S2 Show Options e Use with SHIFT to move the selected channel one percentage point e n dialog boxes these buttons will raise or lower number boxes by pre determined levels cue number by 10 time by 10 O Strand Lighting p123 Palette OS v10 Programming and Viewing Fixtures Channel Colours and Symbols Palette s Channel and Attribute Grids use colour and graphics to help identify the status of Channel levels or attributes values To understand the terminology in this section make sure to read the topic called Channel s different states It also helps to understand the information in the topic called Record Options 28 or WES A red outline or grey background shows that the channel has been selected either with the mouse the keypad or the Button Array Running cues may in fact still change the level of the Channel until you alter the Channel with the wheel or the keypad This is why selected channels are not necessarily Captured The yellow pipe on the right hand side shows the current level A red outline filled in with a white level and a white triangle delta symbol or red text red triangle on a grey background indicates selected channels that you have Changed and effectively Captured their values These changes are marked to be recorded or updated Or A red outline filled in with purple level text and a white tria
268. ntial and the third doing nothing The result can be a color closer to white than desired HSL Crossfade Color A Color B Color C TTA ETOL j Talal iE amp Bros o o M 100 S 90 L Regardless of whether you re using Additive or Subtractive lights at the end of the day you need to provide three control channels see RGB Crossfade above You don t have a choice because that is what the light needs to operate What you can do though is move through a different color space which does not produce the typical linear transition of the channels as described above Instead you will visit altogether different colors when fading from one to another hopefully avoiding the undesirable bit in the middle The picture below shows the entire color spectrum as it is laid out in the Natural color space Hue is the ratio between the three primary colors and is what we think of as color Saturation is how intense the color is or mathematically how far apart each primary is from the others or how far away from gray you are Gray is when all three are equal in value Note the image below only shows fully saturated colors Luminance is the overall brightness of the selected color or mathematically defined as the cumulative total of the three primary colors Too much brightness results in white Cue 1 shows where Blue is and Cue 2 shows Green When Strand Lighting p35 Palette OS v10 you press GO on Cue 2 the CMY color flags or LEDs will change i
269. o 0 and leave channel 1 at its current level The syntax 1 5 REMDIM takes channel 1 to 50 and others in the current cue list above 0 to 0 Again the second press of REMDI M will take all channels to 0 Typing REMDIM by itself takes all channels in the current cue list above 0 to 0 See Also Highlight Lowlight Tools Strand Lighting p279 Palette OS v10 Colour Picker Tool The fastest way to select colors with color mixing channels is to use the Color Picker tool To use it select the channels then press and hold the TOOLS button and choose S11 Color Picker you may need to select lt more gt if Color Picker is not visible Le 2 3 T E 10 S i Hern m Lall ET win Group Postion Calor Oihe Highlight Lowi An image box will appear Color Ficker 51 Color Picker mage Linear Spectr 1 T j mie a Using the mouse click and drag in this space and the selected color mixing channels will attempt to simulate the color under the cursor If they are not already they will be switch to the RGB color space When you are happy with the color close the Color picker by either pressing Strand Lighting p280 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p281 Palette OS v10 Channel Check With Channel Check you can easily accomplish your pre show lighting check Your Channel Check can be done either manually or automatically To Manually Perform A Channel Check 1
270. o it s starting position The next cue transition will begin by moving the fade off the end of travel you just reached or by simply pressing GO If you hold down SHIFT while manually moving a Crossfader you can move backwards through a cue list i e the cue that has just been completed will be the pending cue rather than the next cue in the cue list You can see which cue you are going to pull into by looking at the Playback Bubbles In this case the pending cue is Cue 1 the cue just before Cue 2 Cro PB Master Disabled In this mode the left hand fader is the overall intensity master of the cue list assigned to this playback and the right hand fader is disabled You may want to use this mode if you are sure that you will never want to manually execute fades and don t want to inadvertently start a transition by touching a fader Cue List Split Crossfader The Split Crossfader mode sets up the left hand fader to at will manually control the levels moving up in the next cue while the right hand fader manually controls the levels going down in the next cue Moving these faders in tandem executes a standard crossfade Both handles need to reach their end travel destination before the cue completes Once the cue completes the pending cue changes and the handles are ready to execute the next manual fade You do not need to exercise the full travel of the handles to re load the next cue Notes on Playback Handles e If you pre
271. o reverse the effects of what you just recorded o You cannot select Edits Track Forward OFF if you are updating or recording the last cue in a cue list o You can change the system default state of Edit Track Forward for the Record dialog box in S2 Show Options General See Also A Note on Redundant Data Edits Track Forward Track Sheets Blocking and Un Blocking of cues Recording a Cue Multiple Cue List Concept Strand Lighting p40 Palette OS v10 A Note on Redundant Data Redundant and or Blocked data in cues is displayed like this or 7 ME Sometimes this is properly Blocked data At other times it is just plain redundant Having redundant data in a cue is not desirable Understanding when and why you may want these symbols appearing in your Channel Grid or Attribute Grid will make your life a lot easier Before you move on if you re not fully familiar with the philosophy of tracking you may want to read the topic called Tracking first DESIRABLE o When you write a Block cue at the top of Scene 2 so future editing session on cues in Scene 1 won t track through into Scene 2 o When you record a cue using the State option to collect the cumulative set of data used to reproduce a cue state You may do this at the beginning of a scene in a linear cue list or when you are Copying or Moving cues within a cue list or to the middle of another cue list o When you have one attribute that doesn t necessarily chang
272. o the cue you want to load before pressing Load 1 If desired press S5 to load the cue s State or the cumulative effect of all cues up to that point in the cue list as hard values Press ENTER to load the Cue Note the Loaded Status Windows shows which cue is loaded The Cue List is on the top line and the cue number or label if set is below Loaded APB Sunse Note The first item you Load gets shown in the Loaded Status Bubble If you do subsequent loads essentially layering ideas then press UPDT the item shown in the Loaded Bubble is the one Strand Lighting p183 Palette OS v10 that gets Updated In the LIVE display loading multiple things does not clear what is loaded automatically Check to see if the Loaded Bubble is clear first To clear it press UNDO or ESC until it is clear 1 Make the changes to the cue as necessary You can remove or knock out channels from a cue by selecting them and hitting UNDO or ESC See the Release topic for methods of releasing individual attributes 2 Press UPDT or U to update the cue The Captured channels will be released and the Loaded Status Bubble will be cleared If the loaded cue is the active cue the stage will not change If the loaded cue is prior to the active cue the changes will fade when you hit GO If the loaded cue is after the current cue when you press UPDT the channels will be release immediately and return to their proper levels as dete
273. ocessor s keyboard Click on the items below to find out more specific information A a Vy Screen resolution l System date amp amp screen saver Windows Explorer Windows Media Paint time DST amp Player Strand Lighting p370 Palette OS v10 time zone Mouse setup Network Setup Accessibility Network Printer Options Configuration Launch Show Palette Hardware Test Read Release Notes Outlook Express Notepad text Mail editor Shutdown System Additional Applications Note The Control Panel will automatically hide itself after 30 seconds of inactivity You can also hide it by pressing the FAV button on the processor s keyboard or pressing the SPACE BAR See Also Upgrading Console Software Strand Lighting p371 Palette OS v10 Upgrading the Palette Software From time to time Horizon Control Inc may release updates to the software installed on your Palette Console These may include general changes in the base code additional library files updated help documentation or OS changes You may either receive the updates on CDR from your dealer or download them yourself from the Strand Lighting Web Site In either case what you will receive is a single EXE file You will not be able to run this file successfully on your system since it will be writing to protected areas of your hard drive 1 The upgrade file needs to be placed in the root directory of the D drive o Download
274. ocol the mode the model or the manufacturer can be changed at any time Moreover each and every light regardless of who makes it appears similar to the user giving a more consistent experience when programming a show Apart from the benefits described above this method of controlling lights is not restricted to traditional linear channels mapped to attributes on the fixture Looking at a few examples in Palette s implementation of this model will demonstrate the intuitive nature of describing fixtures attributes as opposed to traditional convoluted methods that sometimes group completely unrelated behaviours on the same channel Pan and Tilt Example P T Mode Polar Movement The Home position for pan and tilt on most DMX Moving Lights is 50 50 or 32767 32767 This positions the light such that you will have maximum movement in each direction before encountering a stop pan stop or tilt stop For a light that has a total pan range of 360 degrees with the control channel set to half you are sitting at 180 degrees Taking the control channel to full will move the light 180 off axis towards a stop So to Summarize a value of 50 means Home and a value of 100 means go to the pan stop 180 degrees from Home Figuring out that 90 degrees is half way in between those two values Is easy That would be 75 And a 45 degree pan from Home is again half way between those two values or 62 5 That gets a little too complex for the pr
275. of Cues For an explanation of each see Action On Go Within a Cue Loop al B f Mest cue s7 Goto Cue on Record This option if set takes you to new cues you ve just recorded when the Record dialog box closes The default for this option is on If you are doing a lot of editing out of sequence you may want to turn this option off If you do a Record Merge the GOTO does not happen Strand Lighting p288 Palette OS v10 ss Release Fixtures on Record This option if set automatically releases all Captured Attributes when the Record dialog box closes The default for this option is on If you are building multi step chases with moving lights you may not want the channels released after recording each and every step Move In Black The MIB time will be used on all newly recorded cues The MIB time is found in the Cue Actions dialog box and can be altered for each and every cue See Also Patch Printing Move In Black Hardware Setup Strand Lighting p289 Palette OS v10 Venue Setup Location Touching S3 will open the Show Options dialog box S9 though S12 switch you between the different setup options See Also Show Options Default Cue List Options Show Save Options Time Events Show Information If you are going to do Printed Reports you will probably want to fill in the Show Info fields These names are used at the top of reports Lardon England Location If you are going
276. of L181 will Show Congo Blue in the frame window Patching the Scroller 1 2 3 4 Enter Patch Select the circuit that has the scroller either by Double Clicking on the Type Entry or by using a patch command line Choose the Generic Device Manufacturer Choose Scroller Dimmer 8 bit Assigning the Scroller String Enter the Patch Select the required circuit on the command line Press Select the DMX address of the Scroller Press the Attribute softkey Select Colour Profile Select Your profile defined in Step A Press Enter Strand Lighting p267 Palette OS v10 Your scroller has now been assigned and in the live screen when controlling the unit you will see your colour frames appear beneath the channel number O Strand Lighting p268 Palette OS v10 Patching I nvdividual Attributes Normally you will patch in moving lights by giving the start address in the DMX1 Column for the Channel Chan Fixture Dimmer Type pMx1 DMX 2 DMX 3 Settings Irt VL2500 Spot Enhanced 16 Bit Atr 6 1 613 eats This will result in DMX addresses being assigned correctly You can check this by viewing the Patch by Output Screen Gutpuat Chan Fixture Type Captured Parked Curent Settings B1 513 1 VL2500 Spot Intensity 0 0 1 VL2Z500 Spot Pan Hi 50 127 l VL2500 Spot Pan Lo i002 255 VL2500 Spot Tilt Hi BO 127 VL2500 Spot Tilt Lo 10025 255 WVL2500 Spot Cyan is O VL2
277. og box will have a check box to determine if the changes you make will track forward into the next cue or be undone for you automatically in the next cue This option allows you turn it on or off by default S2 Default Cue Record This option sets the default cue record action Live is the most common action however you can change this to a number of different options See recording cues for more details Strand Lighting p285 Palette OS v10 S3 Default Look Record This option sets the default Look record action Live is the most common action however you can change this to a number of different optins See Recording Looks for more details S4 Up Down Percent The Console s UP and DOWN buttons or the QWERTY keyboard s PG UP and PG DN buttons will move Selected channels intensities by this amount If you hold down SHIFT while using those buttons the level will change by 1 regardless S5 At Full Percent When using the Command Line you can press FULL or HOME to take the selected channels to a predetermined level On new show this is 100 but you can change it here to any value If you double hit FULL or HOME the channel will go to 100 regardless of this setting S6 Default Color Space When working with moving lights that can achieve multiple colors using three color flags or gel strings or sources you can mix in any one of six color spaces At any time you can change the color mix mode
278. ogrammer to calculate quickly To add to the complication imagine you have another light in the rig that has a total pan range of 540 degrees Now the numbers you just figured out for the first fixture mean nothing to this one Worse yet if you grab both of the fixtures and pan them in tandem you would get completely differing results Strand Lighting p17 Palette OS v10 4 T Hime Postion Fixture capable of Fa Fixture capable of af both Tetures E4 360 deg ipai 640 deo of pan Fi he ie Sa P Ye A A K Eee 50 0 den 62 5 45 deg 62 5 67 5 deg Using the same values 62 5 the angles of pan are completely different The beams of light are not even close to parallel You can see how this can be very frustrating if you have a mixed rig With UAC the Pan attribute is represented in real world units of degrees Therefore when you talk to the light you tell it to pan so many degrees 2 FRtlire cCapanle oF 540 deg of pan Horne Pasian f Fisture capanle of 360 dey of par of both THiures Ddeg 45 deg 46 deg Apart from having parallel beams of light from multiple fixtures notice that there is no need for the sign Forty five degrees is forty five degrees This makes controlling a rig that is made up of different types of fixtures easy to communicate with and easy to understand If you program the show using one type of fixture then swap it for another it is important to remember that it is
279. oint Automation HC PowerPointFirstSlide machine_id HC PowerPointLastSlide machine_id HC PowerPointPrevSlide machine_id HC PowerPointNextSlide HC PowerPointGotoSlide machine_id machine_id slide_ number Media Player Automation HC MediaPlayerPlay HC MediaPlayerStop HC MediaPlayerPause HC MediaPlayerPlayFile file name Show Control HC SerialOpen 1 to 16 9600 N 8 1 script HC SerialClose 1 to 16 HC SerialWrite 1 to 16 output string HC SerialRead 1 to 16 HC MidiNoteOff channel 1 to 16 key_1 to 128 velocity 0 tol127 HC MidiNoteOn channel_ 1 to _16 key_ 1 to 128 velocity 0 tol27 HC MidiWrite midi_ byte midi_ byte HC SMPTEStart hh mm ss fr 30 30dr 25 24 interface HC SMPTEStop interface ILS Commands HC ILSSetScene device_id scene HC LSLockCommand device_id lock 1 unlock 0 Strand Lighting p338 Palette OS v10 Hardware Setup HC HardwareConsoleLights level 0 to 10 Channel Check Automation HC FixtureCheckForward HC FixtureCheckBack Variable Manipulation HC VariableGet page name or order HC VariableSet page name or order value or value HC VariableSetDelayed page name or order value or value seconds HC GetScriptSource type number parent name type number parent name seperator Strings HC Status status string HC GetScriptSource type number parent name type number parent
280. ols with the last cue still running shown in green Band Enter Sunrise Follow Cues appear indented in the cue list i e Stage Management will not call these cues The cue that initiates the Follow Action is marked with a wrap around arrow and the Follow time marked with an F If the cue is marked to Follow After Fade only the arrow will be present Strand Lighting p198 Palette OS v10 Band Enter Linked Cues have a chain link symbol in the Action column with the cue it is linking to marked with a Q If a Cue List is released not writing to the stage the cue where the Cue List Pointer is set is shown with a pink lighting symbol You can move this pointer using the STEP UP or STEP DN buttons QWERTY equivalent and Pressing GO will run the cue list from the cue list pointer in cue time q 1 Freset J E 5 OB DRE oe Enter 10 Cues that have fade Profiles have a profile icon preceding the time in the time column that uses the profile Warmers Preset House to Half Asserting Cue Lists If a Cue is active green light but other cues have stolen away from it the channels as recorded in this cue may not be making it to stage If you want this cue to take full control again you must Assert this cue list To do this press SHIFT GO Go Back If you press HALT BACK while a cue is running it will pause it If a cue list is Halted and you press HALT BACK it will go to th
281. onents use the Display Menu or press S5 to show the display popup list Strand Lighting p91 Palette OS v10 As well you can resize the Channel Grid by clicking or right clicking on the splitters For more information on what areas of the screen do what hover and or click on the image above Strand Lighting p92 Palette OS v10 Console Buttons Strand Lighting Palette OS v10 Display Keys Live Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX LIVE e Press LIVE to enter and exit the Live display e While in Live the channel grid has a Black background Strand Lighting p94 Palette OS v10 Blind Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX BLIND Strand Lighting Press BLIND to enter and exit the Blind display While in Blind the channel grid has a Grey background and the Green LED You can also see the Blind button in the Channel Grid toolbar While in Blind moving the Blue Box will Load cues automatically for you p95 Palette OS v10 Pacth Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX PATCH e Press PATCH to enter the Patch display Strand Lighting p96 Palette OS v10 Playback Keys Dead Black Out Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX DBO A DBO B Strand Lighting Use this button to black out the stage This button can be configured to work as a momentary button a toggle button or be disabled Choose your preference using S3 Hardware Setup The LED flashes when the GM slider is n
282. ooks etc If you were programming channels when the system went down anything you had captured will be lost When the system initially restarts the console s DMX ports and Ethernet outputs will be disabled Answering YES gives you the option to continue on from where you left off or by answering NO the outputs will remain static until you re enable them using the Enable Outputs_File Menu option Whether or not the outputs are enabled are disabled is indicated by a check mark beside the menu text v Enable Outputs At any time during normal operation you can disable the outputs by clearing the check mark You may want to disable the outputs if you want to run cues or looks off line rather than working in Blind leaving the stage unaffected This mode of operation is equivalent to unplugging your DMX and or Ethernet cables but much more convenient Any time the outputs are disabled the Hardware Status bubble will look like this Hw Status pL utputs Disabled There is a Hardware Setup Console option called Force Outputs at Startup on Recovery that prevents this dialog box from appearing during recovery Strand Lighting p422 Palette OS v10 This option should be checked in architectural situations where there is no user intervention available to get back up an running See also Tracking Backup Show Checkpoint Files Blind File Menu GoTo Cue Patch Strand Lighting p423 Palette OS v10 Recalibrating St
283. options hold down SHIFT before pressing BUMP o If you want to change the properties of the Look after it has been recorded press VIEW BUMP o You can also use the syntax MOVE BUMP BUMP COPY BUMP BUMP and LOAD BUMP which are very quick See the Using Looks topic Make sure your hardware is setup to have Looks on the slider panels first Select either Live P Elind paa the Channel Grid Tool Bar 1 2 2 Select the channels to be assigned to the Sub Master 3 3 Set the levels or attributes 4 4 Click the Record button W the Tool Bar or press REC The QWERTY equivalent is R 5 Press LOOK or F12 to record a Look Strand Lighting p253 Palette OS v10 The following properties can be edited S1 Select the Look Page in which you wish to record this Look into from the drop down list box The last page you recorded to will already be active so if you are working on position palettes you will not have to change to the Position Look Page on every record operation S2 Enter the number of the Sub Master you wish to record Note This edit field is active when you enter the dialog box so you can just type REC LOOK ENTER if you want to go fast S3 From the drop down list box select the Record options Note The default Record Option is to record your Changed Attributes or those marked with the delta 26 A symbol Read what the other Record Options are and
284. ot at 100 It flashes rapidly when the slider is at 0 The current level of the Grand Master can be seen in the Status Bubbles p97 Palette OS v10 Go Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX GO Strand Lighting This button will do a GO on its cue list Note The Select button does not have to be active amber LED flashing If a cue is running the Green LED will be flashing If you are sitting in a cue the LED will be solid Green Use with SHIFT to assert the current cue grabbing full control of all its attributes without advancing the cue list If the cue list is Releasing both the GO and the HALT BACK LEDs will be flashing The release time can be set in the Cue List s Properties p98 Palette OS v10 Goto Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX GOTO Strand Lighting Press GOTO CUE ENTER to take the selected cue list to the desired cue The Cue Number edit box will be pre stuffed with the cue number of the blue highlighted cue If desired you can set a desired time for the cue to execute The recorded time is the default time If you move the Blue Box to the first column and press EDIT this is equivalent to doing a GOTO on that cue O p99 Palette OS v10 Select Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX SELECT Strand Lighting Press a Select button to determine which cue list cue will be written to by default when you record cues The selected cue list will
285. ot of extra garbage in there it makes it a lot tougher Note At times you may see the Block symbol in your cue list when you didn t expect to This may happen because you just did a Goto Cue and the values just happened not to change from their last state To clean up the display in this case Assert the cue list by pressing SHIFT GO Also note that there is a Cue List Option to Goto cues after they are recorded so it may happen directly after a record operation See Also Blocking and Unblocking of cues Move Copy using State Recording Cues About Palette Strand Lighting p42 Palette OS v10 Timi One of Palette s very powerful features is its ability to fade every attribute of every Channel in every cue across multiple cue lists and Sub Masters independently simultaneously and effortlessly Many consoles using the preset emulation philosophy are just not capable of this flexibility because they record every channel in every cue and can only fade from one cue singularly to another cue whereas Palette can handle any number of fades at once The key to power is unleashed with a simple user interface that even the most novice of programmers can take advantage of immediately This topic briefly describes different methods of controlling attribute timing but there are specific topics available that explain them more fully See Also Cue List Time Cells and the Blue Box Part Cues Independent Timing Command Line Syntax
286. ou want to have more control of how the channels will respond change the properties of the Look i e VIEW BUMP and alter the Attribute Behaviors This audience blinder look which has very high priority will manually control the intensities of the lights coming up and possibly others going down if they are recorded at lower levels in this look The Position will follow your movement with the handle whereas the color will go to its recorded state as soon as you move the handle and the recorded strobe value won t start until you reach the top If you record a Look using Linear Movement and you set the Position behaviour to Manual you can use the Sub Master Handle to move fixtures in straight lines i e the light will move in a Straight line from where ever it is on stage to the recorded position such that if you have multiple looks set up you can move a group of lights to any position on stage essentially using your moving lights as manual follow spots Note If you are running a show live it is handy to setup the A B or C D handles to control how long attributes get to their new level and how long they should take to return to their old levels once released In combination with Busking this makes Palette a very flexible Live Concert desk See Also Hardware Setup Slider Panels Hardware Setup A B C D Recording Looks HTP vs LTP Variables Strand Lighting p258 Palette OS v10 Recording and Using Groups Group se
287. our LAN via the Ethernet port on the back of the processor These units are available throughout the industry by dealers selling Pathway products For more information on Pathport visit Pathway Connectivity The ET Raceway and Capio racks also accept the Pathport protocol To change the Pathport settings enter the Patch by pressing S1 when there are no channels selected Note The softkeys are sensitive to your current channel selection i e if you have moving lights selected S1 will not be Patch To enter the patch regardless of what the softkeys are displaying use the mouse to select the Setup icon above the Cue List Directory You can also press BKSP to deselect your channels without Releasing them On new shows the DMX outputs on the back of your console hardware are mapped to Palette Outputs 1 through 1024 You can configure the Output Devices by clicking the sign in the upper left hand pane of the display Selup Cutout Devices ISB DM to 1024 2 Universes Showhlet None Click on the cell to the right of Pathport to open the output configuration combo Strand Lighting p304 Palette OS v10 Setup EB Output Devices Marquee USB 1 to 1024 2 Universes Pathpart None l Channel Allocation it Show Setup 1 ta 512 1 Universe Hardware Setup 1 to 1024 2 Universes Patch Mode ta 1536 3 Universes ta 20486 4 Universes ta 2560 5 Universes to ave b Universes f Universes
288. ow file s2 Archive on Save If you want a history of how your show has progressed as you build it choose to Archive the Show each time you Save it If you do this a new spb file will also be written when your show file is updated The show file name will be appended with a serial number that will continue to increase as your show progresses For example if your show file is called MyShow spf the first archive will be named MyShow_OO001 spb The next time you save another file will be added called MyShow_0002 spb The number will always increase up to 9999 then loop The total number of spb files on your disk depends on the setting in S5 Backup to Keep If the number is three the default after your forth save you will have just three spb files numbered 0002 0003 and 0004 If you need to resort to one of these files the File Open dialog box s Files of Type combo box can be changed to show you backup files The location to where these archives are stored is either in the Show Folder or the Backup Folder If for instance your show file is d MyShow spf and you choose the Show Folder option a directory will be created called d MyShow and it will contain serialized backups such as d MyShow MyShow_0001 spb If you choose the Backup Folder the serialized backups will reside directly in the folder you point to in S6 Backup Save Folder Note None of these settings affect the creation of regular spb Backup files Rega
289. ow file See Also Cue List Pointer Editing cells in the Cue List with the Blue Box Releasing amp Asserting Cue Lists Profiles Playback Bubbles Cue List Directory Autoscroll Cue List Strand Lighting p200 Palette OS v10 Cue List Properties To Modify Cue List Properties There are three ways to get the Cue List Properties dialog box up 1 Right click on the Cue List you want to change in Cue List Directory and select Properties 2 2 Press VIEW or V then S9 to select Cue Lists then S1 to select the desired list Press ENTER to display the dialog box Soa 3 Press VIEW the SELECT button over the cue list playback Strand Lighting p201 Palette OS v10 Auto Run If Auto Run is on this Cue List will execute its lowest numbered cue automatically when Palette Starts or the show Is loaded Reset to Start on Release When the cue list is Released the cue list pointer will go to the first cue HTP The Cue List will act on a Highest Value Takes Precedence HTP basis Channels will take the highest level of all other HTP or LTP Cue Lists or Chases with equal or lesser priority Example If channel one is set 50 on Cue List 1 HTP and then later Cue List 2 HTP or LTP sets it to 25 channel one will stay at 50 This is true if both are at the same Priorities Locked For Editing If this is checked the Cue List may not be modified The Cue List Toolbar will display the locked f fi i
290. ow it affects the beam of light In this example the shutter is about a quarter the way across the beam and cut to a 15 degree angle Top Thrust Top Angle Bot Thrust Bot Angle NRO 15 o 0 Zw 0 Strand Lighting p24 Palette OS v10 crete Banking the Lens family one past the group that controls Left and Right Shutters exposes a group of four encoders that groups Top and Bottom on one wheel and Left and Right on another That way you can adjust two opposite groups of motors with one encoder Here the Thrust of the Top and Bottom are grouped together and set to a level of 48 resulting in a thin bar of light passing through the center of the beam If both attributes were put to 50 the fixture would not output any light whatsoever as the two shutters would be either touching or just overlapping TIB Thrust TIB Ange DUR Thrust 47 0 47 Using this third bank of shutter controls you could create a box of light by just adjusting one encoder Do this by using your left hand to press and hold both the T B Thrust and L R Thrust softkeys and your right hand to roll the black wheel Then grouping encoder 2 and 4 you could Strand Lighting p25 Palette OS v10 adjust the angle of that box in space In all of these examples we never used the ninth motor labeled Rot That attribute is generally available on a fourth Lens bank and is marked Shutter lt gt and also uses the units degrees Also check out direct Comman
291. p all of Channel A s parameters Strand Lighting p193 Palette OS v10 5 You press GO for Cue 10 and Channel A fades up nicely in cue time Down Stage Center in Open White on the actor s head The important thing to remember here is that magic happened AFTER Cue 9 completed but it is Cue 10 that has the MIB properties in its Action dialog box Weel fv T Je atait for a coe he 52 Follows Tine 7 53 Run Next Cu Hex Que ETT Hum Loops res Move In Black Time The Move In Black Time is the fade time that the attributes use while in black of course In this case there is a one second wait after all the fades in Cue 9 have completed this insures that any residual tungsten filament glow has cooled off and then there is a 2 second move Even though we re in black a 2 second move is a little more subtle than a snap This could either be because the audience can actually see the moving heads or it is an attempt to reduce noise Another example may have a much longer wait and fade time particularly if scrollers are involved as you often want to move them very slowly to reduce noise You may also do the whole thing in zero time if Cue 10 follows on from Cue 9 in a hurry Remember this adjustment can be made on a cue by cue bases The defaults come from the Show Options Suppress Move In Black Using the scenario above let s say you wanted to see the light move off the cyc and change color as it move towards the acto
292. place pure colors in the path of white light to Subtract different wavelengths out By introducing varying amounts of interference a huge variety of colors can be produced One of the desirable effects these sorts of mechanisms allow is smooth transition from one color to the next If your rig consists of various color mixing fixtures the attributes are dealt with in a scalar fashion similar to Zoom cl Space 100 M__ Let s look at an example of mixing a color on one type of light and then ask it to be reproduced on another that doesn t possess color mix abilities You can use varying amounts of Cyan Magenta and Yellow to produce a hue of Red If you copied those attributes to a fixture that did not have color mixing but did have a color wheel a suitable substitution needs to be made Since the UAC Fixture Library stores a lot more data than just the name of a color mathematical matching can be done In a case where the destination fixture has a color wheel that looks like the one below Slot 7 would be chosen By the way it would not be stored as Slot 7 it is stored as Light Red cl WhiMd cl Select IL Red IL Il he Strand Lighting p30 Palette OS v10 Working in the reverse direction from wheel to mix is of course trivial when using UAC The library has a definition of what wavelengths make Light Red and can easily use the color mixing system to recreate it Gobos are also problema
293. plication or select it in the list and choose Run See Also ELO Touch Screens On Screen Keyboard Printing Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p418 Palette OS v10 Up Time The Palette Control Panel shows you the Up Time of the system and the Palette software If you close the main software and re start it you will notice that the System Up Time is different than the Palette Up Time Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p419 Palette OS v10 Backup Support and Contact Information aTracking Backup Tracking backup allows a second console or PC to stay in sync with the one that Is driving the Stage so in the event of a failure you can just switch to the backup and continue unscathed The second device must have equal authorization to the main system but it can be in the form of a second console a Rack Palette Palette PC or simply a Palette Key on a networked laptop If you have installed Palette PC you will find a Palette Backup shortcut in the Palette section of your START menu To launch a tracking backup session from another console CTRL Click on the Palette icon in the Control Panel When you launch a Tracking Backup session a dialog box will ask you for the IP address of the Host system You can find out the IP address of the host system by hovering over the Network icon in the Palette Control Panel Tracking Backup Connection Marquee Host 192 168 0 3 Y OK X Exit Once you make
294. popup display is available by pressing S5 on the main Softkey menu Use the wheel to select a display then press ENTER to close the popup and select the new display See Also Softkeys Described File Menu Help Menu Strand Lighting p 2 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p73 Palette OS v10 Helo Menu The Help pull down menu on the Menu Bar provides access to the following functions Palette Help Hardware Status About Palette Upgrade Palette Tip of the Day e Palette Help Opens the on line Help files lWelcome Page Date Strang Lighting e Ses a Genlyte compa User bP HTP va LTP 7A Prices Interface Bl Tips and Trike Version Senda E Conscie Elution Congrabulahons on the purchase of your Strand Lighting Pallotta Lighting Control Coneole Monae phairt aie Far general heip use the Contents Indes of Search fab on the lelt Recording ene Eding Check out the Software Annaan Hata Om Lists Palette is a powerful yat easy to program and operate theatecal contre system that may does many deneng pera ene Lining L and automated contro ike no other desk The key is m the software design using the familar Windows XP Toot style although the face panel gwes you the direct access you ve come to expect from a professional lighting areata i iTho console The core fade engine works on the Last Acton philosophy meaning levels and attnbutes stay put until areas See another control moves t
295. press the HELP button From here you can choose general help or help on a specific button For help on a specific button press that button now For more General Help press the Help button again PRESS UNDO RELEASE TO CLOSE THIS BOX Strana Lic gl vtm a Genlyte company The full and up to date manual is also available on line at 4 Control Palette Control Pan e When you are running the main software and no moving lights are selected you can press S4 to reach the processor s Control Panel The Control Panel gives you access to general functions like changing the date and time adjusting how the trackpad works and setting up your network connections Palette comes loaded with useful software like Notepad Internet Explorer and MS Media Player Listen to MP3s or CD while you work You can also launch a hardware test to make sure all your buttons LEDs and sliders are working properly from the Control Panel TT lt a ERE IA E KEN tta EE rE E aCe CUA SRA REET oer Se CEAI eco AA See eee We he EEO sir Falta Dike TSM nt r cee Getting Technical Support Strand Lighting ps Palette OS v10 For technical support please refer to the Strand Lighting Offices and Service Centres O Strand Lighting p9 Palette OS v10 About Palette Two basic styles of lighting consoles have evolved since computerized consoles were introduced in the early 1970s These two styles can best be desc
296. pt SMPTE Time Code o Any number of Cue Lists may have SMPTE Time Code o Each Cue on the Cue List will GO when the recorded SMPTE Time Code Is received o If the SMPTE source is rewound or advanced Palette will sync the Cue List when the clock advances through the first cue that has the new time o SMPTE Times can be manually added or edited for each cue using the Blue Box The SMPTE Learn Mode Tool can be used to automatically assign or change SMPTE Times in each Cue o Palette has Macros that allow you to control the Processor s Media Player to play CD s Wave files MP3 s or MPEG s You can read the current media file s play head location in the Status Bubbles SMTPE 06 07 30 When using MP3 files the SMPTE Hour place holder is determined by the MP3 track number If you are using multiple songs you probably want each song to have its own hour To change it you must change the properties of your MP3 file Under the Summary tab press the Advanced gt gt button Strand Lighting p244 Palette OS v10 The Advanced button will show you properties that look like this Strand Lighting p245 Palette OS v10 03 Snapshot mp3 Properties General Summary Property Music Ly artist The Art Of Noise a Album Title Who s Afraid Of La Year 1986 E Track Number 3 Genre A Lyrics Description A Title Snapshot Comments Origin Protected Audio Duration You can click on and ch
297. r extend them to include moving light attributes as well Check out the topic Recording Looks to see the Look record options and how you can filter different attribute families when recording Looks The Look Page that the Look button references is specified in Show Options LOOK 1 ENTER Selects all the channels in Look 1 and puts all of their attributes to their recorded level LOOK 1 FULL ENTER Selects all the channels in Look 1 and puts all of their attributes to their recorded level LOOK 1 50 ENTER Selects all the channels in Look 1 and puts all of their attributes to their recorded level but scales the intensity attributes by 50 1 LOOK 5 ENTER Selects channel 1 and opens the Apply Levels dialog box to the Look tab allowing you to set channel 1 s levels to the recorded level in Look 5 You can either set the levels as raw numbers or aS a palette reference based on the Apply As Palette check box in the dialog box If you apply as a palette the levels will be marked with a blue triangle with an L in it GROUP 1 LOOK 5 ENTER Selects all the channels recorded in Look 1 and opens the Apply Levels dialog box open to the Look tab allowing you to set their attributes as recorded in Look 5 Cue Button and the Command Line The Cue button is used to capture a set of channels from a particular cue and set them to their Strand Lighting p131 Palette OS v10 recorded level Note
298. r options are Snap Off Zero and Snap At Full That means that the attribute will go to it s recorded level without fading as soon as the handle moves off the bottom or hits the top Note These behaviours are set to automatically at record time If both Intensities and other attributes are recorded into the Look the Intensity Behaviour will be Manual and all the others will be set to Snap Off Zero If you are recording attributes besides intensity and specifically NOT Intensity attributes the behaviours will be set to Manual See Also Sub Master Types Additive and I nhibitive Busking Apply Levels Palettes Fanning Priorities Recording Looks Updating Looks Live Fade Resolution Strand Lighting p250 Palette OS v10 Sub Master Types Palette s virtual Look Masters can be used in either an additive or inhibitive mode The operating mode for a Sub Master is determined at record time Additive e An additive Sub Master provides proportional control of its recorded channel levels If a channel is recorded into a Sub Master at 80 the channel will be at 80 when the Sub Master is at 100 e Additive Sub Masters pile on add to the active stage levels in a highest takes precedence manner e The home position for an additive Sub Master is zero 0 e The levels of attributes controlled by additive Sub Masters are displayed in yellow e The LED on the bump button for sliders that have Looks recorded to them will be il
299. r s head before properly landing on him in Cue 10 You could do one of two things A Suppress the MIB on Cue 10 This will suppress ALL channels from automatically setting themselves up for Cue 10 B Update Channel A to have an intensity level of 1 in Cue 9 Following the rules set out above Channel A cannot MIB before Cue 10 because it has an intensity This may be the desired fudge if you want other channels to take advantage of MIB for Cue 10 MIB on the Command Line If you start a command line with CUE the softkeys become cue specific and S7 is labeled MIB If you type CUE 5 S7 MIB ENTER it will toggle the MIB check box in the Cue Actions Strand Lighting p194 Palette OS v10 dialog box That is if MIB is on it will be turned off and vice versa If the Cue List has MIB Suppressed see below the Use MIB checkbox will be toggled You can also type CUE 5 S7 MIB 5 ENTER to turn on MIB and set it to a fade time of 5 seconds CUE 5 S7 MIB 2 5 ENTER would put a 2 second wait before the 5 second fade Cue ranges are also allowed If you omit the Cue Number the current cue number will be used MIB Global Suppression The Channel Grid Toolbar has a MIB Global Suppression button loo If you press this button it is like turning on Suppress MIB for each and every cue During editing sessions where you may be inserting new cues it may be desirable to turn this option off because sometimes
300. r to another Palette allows you to have independent wait and fade times on intensity levels going up in a cue levels going down and on each attribute family Position Color Gobo Lens and Special attributes You can also split cues into different Parts giving you more timing options Profiles allow you to also affect the method in which a cue goes from Point A to Point B using the allotted time Note Apart from simple profiles Horizon Control s Universal Attribute Control Model gives you greater control on how to execute fades from one Position to another or from one Color to another using the Pan Tilt Movement option or the Color Space options To assign a profile to a cue or Cue Part move the Blue Box to the appropriate timing column either Cue Time Down Time Position Color Gobo Lens or Special and press EDIT or INSERT You can now enter a time as described in the topic called Blue Box and or add a profile to that timing parameter When the Blue Box is open for editing the softkeys change to the following 51 52 53 5S4 55 56 SF 58 59 10 511 12 TE Snap Snap Square Slow Slow Fast Fast 5 Zo Clear Cue Linear aiStat AtEnd Law i Stait End Start End Cameed Ssg Ind Time Propetties Pressing any softkey will close the edit box and assign that profile House ta Half If you want to remove a profile just add a Linear profile to the cue which is that default Note J e S11 will clear all Independen
301. rary Track 3 gave AS Track 4 Track 5 Copy F Track 6 Import Playlist to Media Library Track 7 Track 3 l Track 9 Properties Track 10 work Offline Track 11 Track 12 E Tracki4 cda Track 13 Track 14 Exit Eshimated Time 3 50 Strand Lighting p411 Palette OS v10 4 4 Select either the Drive and Directory where your media files are stored or choose the CD drive E to play an Audio CD From the Open Dialog box choose the file or files you want to play Note To select more than one file either hold down CTRL and click on each file or hold down SHIFT while selecting the first and last files Look in 24 Audio CD E Gaooe a _ Recent Fo Lif Desktop My Computer E A Track i Tracko Ned Tracks Si TrackO4 TrackO5 Trackoe Trackor E Track el Track E Trackio ra 1 i Tracki2 Tracki3 tracki4 Type CD Audio Track Size 44 bytes hy Network Places 6 Press the Play button to play the files in order as they appear in the Play List on the right hand side of the display Double click on any file in the Play List to play it out of sequence Tips e Adjust the volume with the slider at the very bottom of the screen or Press F9 on the QWERTY keyboard to raise the volume F10 to lower it F8 to Mute it Volume control is only possible when Media Player is the active window e Under the Play
302. rate the effect from 2 Open the action Colum as previously mentioned 3 Select S5 MACRO Strand Lighting p159 Palette OS v10 F1 F 2 Command Ciel istlao Command Comment CueListHaltBack FF 7 CyueListHalt CueListRelease CueListassert CueListG otafindHalt CueListGotatinde xecuteFollows DBO PowerP omtF wetS lide Powe FP omtLast5 lide Powe rPomtPrevs lide Power onthe lide PowerF omtGatos lide AARTE FictureCheckF onward FixtureCheckB ack F11 Corimarnd 4 Select the required action which to start an effect would CueListGo Insert the command The dialogue box below will appear Macro CueListao cue list Description Perform a Go on the specified cue list F1 Comment LR Arg Value cue list Main Cue List j Select the effect cue list you have created and ok the dialog box You will now have an effect cue list linked to your main cue list To stop your effect from this particular set up follow steps 1 to 4 instead choosing CueListRelease REMOVING AN EFFECT There are two situations to releasing an effect Strand Lighting p160 Palette OS v10 1 User is still in the programmer mode This means that the screen is not in a recorded state such as a cue or a look and you have selected the fixtures which are in the effect and were the last item to have been commanded 1 a ee ee ee ATO 70 a70 70 470 Pressing RELEA
303. rdless of what is setup MyShow spb un serialized will reside in the same location as MyShow spf S3 amp S4 Mirrored Save Fear of a hard drive failure can be alleviated by setting up Mirrored Saves on external hard drive devices such as a USB stick or mapped network drive If you Enable this option and point to a valid directory each time you Save a duplicate spf file will saved on the external device S5 of Backups to keep This number determines the total number of serialized spb files that will be saved when you select File Backup from the File Menu and the number of archive spb files as setup above For more information on serialized file formats see the Archive on Save topic above S6 Backups Save Folder You can set the default location to where the serialized spb files will be saved when you select File Backup from the File Menu When you choose File Backup you will be presented with the Browse for Folder dialog box Strand Lighting p293 Palette OS v10 Browse for Folder Select Backup Folder Desktop i My Documents W ShockLap H Lape C E HORIZON KEY D Es RockyBackup 4 DVD CD RW Drive G sl LaptopXPE on Fast Laptop Shocklap Y ao Control Panel A Mobile Device Shared Documents yt ELi D aharte Tian imante a_i 2 Once you select a folder your show file will be saved with the spb extension If you need to resort to this file the File Open dialog bo
304. re case sensitive So we ve made it easy by providing you a list of available macros calls right in the editor Macro Editor 51 Available 52 S cipt Lme 0 E then end RAISE BUTTON DOWN ACTION N then else end make global vanable CurBut invalid od elseif end CuwBut 1 os clock loop through first 5 buttons to see which one is down 511 Command of date fort 1 5 do HC CueListGof cue list i button i dowr HC CueLitHaltB ack eue list ii HE YarableGetf Halli 1 then HC CueLisH al eue list shore away button number Y HC CusListhelease cue hist HC CueList amp assertfcue list HC CueListGoto4ndH alt icue list cue HC CueListGoto4ndE xecuteF olflovre cue list c HC Power omtFirst5 lide machine_id w Sa Inset D 54 Test 4 510 Statue Sting Raise 7 2 OK XK Cancel Caneel Below is a list of available calls to the HC library You will find that many of the routines are Strand Lighting p337 Palette OS v10 almost exactly like the common Macro Commands but the syntax Is slightly different There are also some calls here that are not available as Commands Cue List Execution HC CueListGo cue list HC CueListHaltBack cue list HC CueListHalt cue list HC CueListRelease cue list HC CueListAssert cue list HC CueListGotoAndHalt cue list cue HC CueListGotoAndExecuteFollows cue list cue Power P
305. recorded including the levels Using the GROUP button you can bring back the selected fixtures and set them to any level using the WHEEL or the Keypad Note The Red LED will be on any time there is a change that has not been recorded See Also UPDATE button Hardware Setup Slider Panels and Looks Show Options Group Button Strand Lighting p104 Palette OS v10 Update Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX UPDATE e When you make changes live pressing the UPDT button will open the Update dialog box Pressing ENTER will update the current cue with the changed levels e If you have changed tracking levels or palettes you can select different items from the list to update i e Track Back and Palette Update e f you have used the LOAD button to load a Cue or Look once you make the changes press UPDT to store the changes and release any selected channels You will not be able to use this button if you did not use All Attributes during your load operation See Also Record Button Updating Cues Load Strand Lighting p105 Palette OS v10 Cue Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX CUE e After pressing RECORD you have the option to either record a Look or a Cue Recording a Cue is the default if you press LOOK but then decide you really wanted to record a cue press this button e While in the command line select the channels you want then type CUE ENTER to open the Apply Levels d
306. ress S D1 Folders 2 Desktop E WY My Computer E J 314 Floppy a See Publie D Horizon E Savedinstalls H 3 Audio CD E harapkan 4 28 2004 11 59 AM E See HORIZON KEY F Size 82 2 KB aa Miscou Con Miscou 7 _ Gi Sd My Network Places m Entire Network i Microsoft Windows Network B H Marquee E W Miscou Y wally 9 x Because of the Embedded OS restrictions you will NOT be able to e explore the C drive e format the Public drive D e label the drive e get the drive s properties Strand Lighting p409 Palette OS v10 e make changes in the D Horizon folder J e perform administrative functions on the drive You can however create your own folders and organize it as you like It differs from regular XP in that the Right Click menu is disabled All of the functions that you need are available in the main menu such as FILE NEW FOLDER or VIEW DETAILS or TOOLS MAP NETWORK DRIVE Back to Palette Control Panel Strand Lighting p410 Palette OS v10 Windows Media Player Windows Media Player is an easy way to play your CD s MP3 s or AVI files directly on your console 1 Launch the i 2 2 Click on the Media Player Icon 3 3 From the File Menu choose OPEN G Windows Media Player ed View Flay Tools Help EET pl a Unknown Album H28 2004 Y Open URL OtrH U l wri LEL he van Si Close Ctrl vy Track 2 Add to Media Lib
307. ribed as tracking and preset Preset consoles record cues the way manual preset consoles do On a manual preset console the user sets up a look on an active set of faders then sets up the next look on an inactive set of faders and then uses cross faders to fade from one look to the next In a computerized preset console these looks are saved as cues but each channel needs to be told what to do in each cue and cue execution can only crossfade from one cue to another With a tracking console when a cue brings a channel to a level that channel stays at that level until it receives a specific instruction to change levels This level then tracks through all Subsequent cues until the level is increased or decreased by another cue Tracking consoles are capable of much more sophisticated and complicated effects than Preset consoles because of their ability to have more than one fade executing at the same time Where does Palette fit in o Palette is a tracking console o Palette offers the techniques of tracking consoles in an easy to learn environment o The Liming options in Palette are extremely flexible and easy to use The interface for changing simple times is as easy to use as a Spreadsheet and allows adjustment on individual attribute family s wait fade and profile settings for every cue Palette also has a traditional cue part implementation that greatly reduces the number of keystrokes necessary to maintain these typically
308. riking and Dousing Fixtures Since each moving light manufacturer uses different methods to recalibrate strike or douse their fixtures Palette does not support a direct function to do this But you will always find the control attribute used to achieve these functions in the S9 SPECIAL attribute family on softkey S2 Control This attribute normally include Recal Strike and Douse but may also include Recal Color Recal Pan Tilt Fan Low Dim Display etc Double press S2 to open a large popup with all the applicable options then use the softkeys to select the desired one Typically you have to set this attribute hold it for 5 seconds or so then Release it See your fixture s manual for more information See Also Controlling Moving Lights Strand Lighting p424 Palette OS v10 Software Revision History v10 0 0 January 2008 o Initial release Strand Lighting p425 Palette OS v10 Console Connections Palette DMX DMX female 5 pin XLR USB Serial Port Serial Ports Com 1 male 9 pin D type General purpose RS232 baud rates 1200 to 38400 Strand Lighting p426 Palette OS v10 VGA VGA female 15 pin high density D type Pin 15 No connection 1280 x 1024 pixels 32M colors 60 75Hz refresh This port is compatible with VGA SVGA and XVGA monitors Port 1 is the main console display output PS2 PS2 Ports Pin 6 No connection Ethernet Ethernet 10 100BT RJ 45 Strand Lighting
309. ring today for any reason except that the event is not enabled appear in grey text Events that are still to occur appear in green text o Events that should occur today but are disabled appear in red text Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Only On it Repeats Skip Days Except On all Feb all 4 Julfall U E all dates 10 Jan all O 4Febiz00e 0 m 2 Dec all 12 1 1 Dec all 13 1 Days of the Week You can easily determine which days of the week this event will occur on by adding a check mark in the appropriate column By default all new time events will be set to function on all seven days Only On If you want events to occur only on certain dates you can get more specific by editing the Only On column Pressing EDIT in this column will open up a dialog box Strand Lighting p354 Palette OS v10 Only On Dates 51 Dates Dap Month Year all Feb 4 oe S2 Add Sf 3 Delete r w OK Pas Cancel Press S2 to add a line to the list then move the Blue Box using the arrow keys or mouse and press EDIT to change the value in each of the Day Month and Year columns The first item in each list is the word all You can add as many rows in the list is needed to cover all your dates If you want to delete any rows position the Blue Box in any column of the desired row and press Delete Repeats The column to the right of Only On is called Repeats but has different functional
310. rmined by the console s Fade Resolution Note S9 Opens the Attribute dialog box to allow you to filter what will be loaded o If you double tap S5 or any other softkey it will solo Position That is all other check marks will clear and Position will remain checked o While in the main Load dialog box if you press SHIFT the Attribute button will look like this and the softkeys will change to the following N gne Intensiu Position Pressing any of these changes the attribute masking without the need to open the Attribute dialog box You can also double tap any attribute family to solo it o If you do any Attribute Masking during the load process the Loaded Status Bubble will not be filled and you will not be able to use UPDT You will have to use REC and specifically determine where you are going to record what was loaded o You can use the syntax 1 ENTER to remove hard values from channels You will see a white triangle delta symbol and a purple level indicating the level coming from some previous cue You must update or re record the cue to commit these changes If you are updating the cue you do not have to load it first to remove commands if you use this syntax Strand Lighting p184 Palette OS v10 Updating a Cue from the BLIND Display using Load 1 Select Elind om the channel grid Tool Bar 2 Press LOAD enter a cue number The QWERTY equivalent to hitting LOAD is SHIFT B
311. rolling Moving Lights Universal Attribute Control Model Strand Lighting p69 Palette OS v10 File Menu New Oper Close Save Save S Backup Print to POF Lock Console Global MIB Suppress Ee tu i e w Enable Outputs Exit The File pull down menu on the Menu Bar provides access to the following functions e New Use to create a new show You will have to Save it to give it a name e Open Useto access an existing show for playback or editing The File Open dialog box allows you to open Palette Show files Checkpoint files and Backup files By default the combo is set to open Palette Show files spf You can also open 500 Series Show files ssf The conventional patch and cue lists will be opened e Close Use to exit the show that is currently in use If the show file has been changed it will ask you to Save first e Save Use to record the contents of the current show to disk You can also press S8 on the main softkey toolbar Once you save the show the old file on disk will be renamed YourShowFile spb The spb extension is used for backup files The current show file is automatically backed up at regular intervals to a Checkpoint file Checkpoint file use the same name as the show file but has the extension spc If your system crashes or you lose power when you recover the Checkpoint file will be opened rather than the show file Checkpoint File Found Checkpoint File is newer than show fil
312. roups of channels involved in the cue into new rows to give slightly more flexibility Cue Label Cue Time Down Time Pos Time Color Time Gobo Time Lens Time a Enter i i 174 0 Pat it y 2 Pat J ef 0 Again the limitation is that all the channels in each part must use the same attribute family timing and further still individual attributes within a family are forces to use the same time Note Palette is limited to 26 cue parts Independent Timing frees you of these limitations Accessing the Independent Time Display To access the Independent Timing display press SHIFT EDIT Alternately you can use the mouse or touch screen to press the Times button a Lewels A Times The Channel Grid and Attribute Grid look very similar except that the numbers that appear are in seconds rather than degrees or hertz etc Strand Lighting pis Palette OS v10 1 2 J i j b f f g 10 Os os o5s oes 11s 1 3s 16s 1 82 21s 2 4 1 V2 VS Wa ee GS OT E 1a 28 2 63 2 93 3 28 3 48 3 7s 3 93 4 25 45s 47s 5s Fixture Intensity Pan Tilt CTO 1 WL3000 Spot Us JS hs LIUUU Spot U3 JS bs 3 LSU00 Spot U 6s JS bs 4 L3000 Spot 05s 35 s The topics Selecting and Setting Channels and Controlling Moving Lights outlines methods of setting attributes of channels Once you understand the Command Line Syntax for addressing individual attributes of channels much of the same syntax is used
313. s On the back of the console is a green terminal strip connector that has three termination points One of these points is a common that when shorted to either of the other two triggers the execution of macros defined here You can assign a macro to both the up and down or short and open states of the input or if using a double pole single throw switch between all three contacts a fifth macro can be triggered The Multiple Trigger Mute time can discard nuisance triggers Macros are built using the Macro Editor Each action can have an entire list of macros to execute Note On each side of the connector there are test buttons Depressing these will activate the macros assigned here You can see the status of these inputs in the Uber Status window See Also Hardware Setup Trigger Wiring Macro Editor General Hardware Setup Variables amp Button Stations Strand Lighting p326 Palette OS v10 Physical Trigger Wiring The Palette Hardware has two contact closure triggers on the back The little buttons to the left and right of the connector are test buttons To wire these triggers up just follow the charts below i Mmggening Trigger Connection ggEnng Marquee Console Back Panel COMTI KeLT Short ins 8 Trgger Connections ir Sry To i TARA j Switch Citta Tigger Deve COWTROL IMET COMMON 2 TAGGER 1 TRIGGER Z o HB c Once you physically wire your triggers you program what you w
314. s Strand Lighting p369 Palette OS v10 Palette Control Panel Palette Control Panel eels eer eon rr ae T ANTT TE MAar Np EN le rll os or fear wie le UT in sie Pe Cee SE Sains rel Sis ie ae eee poll Falsiee be Sk Vas 5 4 a ees pP The Palette console runs on a custom build Processor running the Windows XP Embedded operating system An embedded operating system means that you only have what you need to run the console none of the extra user configurable gadgets have been included in the OS therefore its overall size efficiency and stability has been greatly optimized As an operator on the system you have very limited control of the OS s parameters guaranteeing that system integrity is never compromised i e you can t install your own stuff or get to the OS Since we do use Windows XP there are a lot of features that we can take advantage of such as Internet Explorer MS Media Player Outlook Express MS Paint and Windows Explorer You can also connect this console up to your office network and take advantage of services like DHCP networking mapped network drives and printers or Internet connectivity Windows also offers features specifically designed with accessibility in mind for those with disabilities To allow you at these special features you use the Palette Control Panel To launch the control panel from Palette press the S4 button or press the FAV button on the pr
315. s SHIFT S10 takes you backwards through the banks of effect attributes If you edit a running effect you will see red delta symbol next to it in the Effects Grid This means the changes must be recorded to a new cue or updated in the current cue Make sure that Effects are not filtered out of the update or record process The attributes of an effect are faded in Cue Time Effects cannot be recorded to Looks version 3 1 COLOUR EFFECTS Note These rainbow effects will only appear on equipment with CMY colour mixing capabilities To add a new colour effect select the desired fixtures and then press S6 Colour The softkeys should now change to show the properties of colour on S1 S4 To access the rainbow effect hold down the shift key and press any of the colour softkeys between S2 S4 or alternatively available on the light palette range are 4 buttons above the encoder wheels which access the effects of each area by one push Again as with an intensity effect you will notice that S1 S4 display particular components of the effect which can be manipulated to make the effect personal If you now select S10 Effects you will now be able to manipulate the saturation and luminance of the colours in your effect RECORDING AN EFFECT using the shape generator When recording an effect into a cue it is advised that a base cue be recorded first and then Subsequently the effect is recorded on top With the base cu
316. s You or Your hereinafter GOVERNING ALL USE OF CONTROL SOFTWARE 1 Grant HCI grants you a non exclusive royalty free license to use the CONTROL SOFTWARE and all modifications and upgrades thereof Copyright HCI holds an exclusive worldwide license to market and distribute CONTROL SOFTWARE HCI holds and retains all worldwide rights title and interests including without limitation copyright in and to CONTROL SOFTWARE and all source code object code executable code libraries and graphical representation screen layout You acknowledge that HCI is not selling or otherwise transferring title or any rights in CONTROL SOFTWARE to You You may not modify translate adapt reproduce decompile reverse engineer or disassemble CONTROL SOFTWARE Use You agree to follow the instructions contained in CONTROL SOFTWARE and in the Materials provided with CONTROL SOFTWARE from time to time for the installation and use of CONTROL SOFTWARE HCI may modify CONTROL SOFTWARE at any time for any reason Disclaimer of Warranty You expressly acknowledge and agree that your use of CONTROL SOFTWARE is at your sole risk HCl warrants that CONTROL SOFTWARE will be free from defect on the day you receive it which constitutes HCI s sole and exclusive warranty HCI EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HCI
317. s 262 GM 317 GO 328 GO action in loops 287 GO Button 98 gobo 14 goto 99 goto and execute follows 60 goto and halt 231 goto cue after record 287 goto cue button 231 goto back time 231 grand master 97 grand masters 317 graphic helper symbols 124 green arrow 124 grid 65 groups 107 H half colors 142 halt back 101 handles 248 hard drive management 409 hardware setup 326 hardware status hardware test 374 help 74 HH MM SS 206 hiding columns 196 high contrast 398 high priority 53 Highest Takes Precedence 248 hints 54 history files 292 hold time 241 hollow pipe 317 homing a fixture 424 Horizon show files 70 hotkeys 438 Strand Lighting p443 Palette OS v10 hours 206 HSL 14 hsv 14 HTML automation 328 HTP 51 HTP Intensity 65 _J identify fixture 284 ILS commands 345 import from Horizon 70 independent channels 136 independent timing 43 Individual Attributes 269 inhibitive 253 input device 378 intelligent lights 142 Internet Explorer 414 Internet radio 411 Internet Time 378 invert selection 166 inverted profile 262 IP Address 399 italic text 206 jog 417 jump 235 K keyboard 393 keyboard language 378 keyboard repeat rate 397 keyboard shortcuts 438 keystrokes 343 knock out 183 _L label 135 large fonts 398 last action editing 328 Latest Takes Precedence 50 launching Marquee learn mode 273 level 285 level setting 140 library 10 license 435 limit 251 l
318. s LTP Cue List Properties Sub Master Types Busking Strand Lighting p50 Palette OS v10 HTP Highest Takes Precedent vs LTP Latest Takes Precedent Intensities are resolved either as HTP Highest Takes Precedent or LTP Latest Takes Precedent LTP If multiple controls Sub Masters or Cue Lists are attempting to control the same attribute the last one to move it will win For example if one cue sets a level to 75 then another one is executed and it sets it to a level of 50 the attribute will go to 50 Note Channel Masters are always HTP o Cue Lists and Sub Masters can be either HTP or LTP as determined by their properties o Palette s Latest Takes Precedence cue lists do not get automatically released when other cues take full control of all the attributes used in them Their values are still valid and if the domineering more recent cue list gets released the values from the Original cue list will get a chance to write to the stage again Some may refer to this domineering behaviour as Stomping and the behaviour of re writing to the stage after the release as Persist on Override o Fora LTP Cue List or Sub Master to gain control the losing control must also be LTP i e not marked HTP HTP If multiple controls Sub Masters or Channel Masters or Cue Lists are writing to an intensity attribute the one with the greatest value will win The exception to this rule is if a control with a higher priority i
319. s and use the Flip Tool and update the cue To use Flip press and hold the TOOLS button and select FLIP The selected moving head channels will flip around on stage landing at the same location they were in originally but using different pan and tilt values Once you use the Flip tool once it will be the last tool as shown in the Tool Status Bubbles Tool Flip Pressing and releasing TOOLS will perform the flip operation again See Also Tools Controlling Moving Lights Updating Cues Strand Lighting p274 Palette OS v10 Fanning Tool When you are adjusting attributes you can customize the way the wheel acts upon the values they are changing Generally as you roll the wheel a tick the selected value changes by one unit i e one percent one degree one second one gobo etc If you activate one of the fanning Tools differing results can be achieved The following fan modes are available Fan Random Fan Random Fan Sine Fan Tangent To activate a fanning tool press SHIFT and the TOOLS button or T on the QWERTY keyboard The Softkeys will display all the available tools Pi LS ijen p maa Fr a ice 1 The Fan tool is activated by pressing S7 A large pop up list Shown above is displayed and you can choose which fanning method you want to invoke see examples below Do this by rolling the wheel or using the arrow keys then press ENTER The Tool bubble will then
320. s as a toggle While a tool is active the LED on the button will flash To select a tool press and hold shift and the Tools button The com mand line willl show Select Tool and the softkeys will then show the available tools Select the desired tool if you need to see more press S12 while still holding down Tools That tool will then become active and the TOOL LED will remain lit Press the tools button again to disable the active tool The Status Window will now show the last tool used pm ri a wee oe 9 IXtTLfe i iv e Le oo jj Date tal abe wt m oa m a p 2 T T aS ISITY No cl langoed mr Tools and the Button Array The first four softkeys will be labeled with the Look Pages as assigned in the Hardware Setup Button Array If you do chose one of these first four tools the Button Array 5x5 display will be superimposed on your main screen and you will be able to use the mouse or touchscreen to select whatever you have setup in the array Note you do not have to have a physical button array to view the 5x5 array of palette buttons See Also Button Array Described Channel Check Flash Fixture or Output SMPTE Learn Mode Strand Lighting p271 Palette OS v10 Flip Fanning Highlight Lowlight Park Attributes Status Bubbles Strand Lighting p272 Palette OS v10 SMPTE Learn Mode SMPTE Learn Mode is used to synchronize a Cue List with a source of SMPTE Time Code Note You will nee
321. s wanting it to go to a lower level it will win See Also Tracking Releasing amp Asserting Cue Lists Priorities Fade Resolution Strand Lighting p51 Palette OS v10 Strand Lighting p52 Palette OS v10 P E E t a Palette allows for 100 different priorities for use when you are playing back recorded items to the Stage Priorities apply to Cue Lists and Looks The Properties box for each of these items has a number field where you can enter the desired priority Regardless of the HIP vs LTP settings Higher Priority items lower number will win The default priority of new Cue Lists is 10 and new for Looks it is 9 In complex show files it is good practice to bump higher priority items up to numbers like 7 or 8 rather than straight to number 1 This will give you room to grow as you add more important things like fire safety cues at a later date In architectural situations you may want to build a base look that is priority 90 or so such that if all other playback items get released this base look will take over Note Only one item can win If there are two items writing to the stage and one is 9 and the other is 10 changing the 9 to a 1 will not make it win any better or faster See Also Cue List Properties Looks Sub Master Pages Fade Resolution HTP vs LTP Strand Lighting p53 Palette OS v10 Tips and Tricks Reading these tips may be the fastest ay to avoid reading the entire manual These
322. s without affecting the current look on stage To Access the Blind Display Using the Mouse Click the Blind icon To Access the Blind Display Using the Console Press BLIND i Bian J To Access the Blind Display Using the Keyboard Press the Blind key B To View and Or Change the Contents of A Cue in the Blind Display To display a cue in Blind select the Blind display by either method shown above 1 Move the Blue Box in the Cue List either with the arrow keys or using the mouse and the contents of the cue are shown on the Channel Grid 2 You can either see or hide values that are tracking into the loaded cue by toggling the Track Toolbar Button 3 Alter the cue by Selecting and Setting Channels or Releasing Attributes making any changes you like to its contents When you select another cue a dialog box will appear asking you if you want to save the changes Click Yes to save changes No to discard them Note e Press UPDT or U to update the selected cue The dialog box will ask if you want to commit the changes and track the changes forward If you select OK the channel grid will clear and the Loaded Status Bubble will clear Strand Lighting p187 Palette OS v10 e To record the changes as a different cue number use the Record button and enter the new number in the appropriate text box e You can return to LIVE even when you are working on things in BLIND When you come back to BLIN
323. se with SHIFT to move to the top or bottom of the selected cue list e Ifa long cue is running and you want to quickly complete it press STEP DOWN The cue will complete in the Cue List s Step Time as determined by the Properties of the Cue List See Also Cue List Pointer Strand Lighting p102 Palette OS v10 Release Playback PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX REL PB e Pressing this button will release the cue list on the selected playback master The cue pointer will remain at the current cue position therefore pressing GO will put you back into the same state you were in before you hit REL PB e Press SHIFT REL PB to release all cue lists O Strand Lighting p103 Palette OS v10 Recording Keys Record Button PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX REC Recording Cues e To record a cue press the REC button The record dialog box will open A default cue number is entered and the cursor is waiting for you to enter a new one if necessary The ENTER key will close the dialog box and record the cue to the Selected Cue List e To quickly record to a different playback master press REC then the desired SELECT key on the playback Recording Looks e To quickly record a Look press REC then press a BUMP button e Press REC then press LOOK enter a number and press ENTER e To record a group of fixtures press REC then press GROUP enter a number and press ENTER A Look will be
324. set it Parking Outputs is at the top of the Fade Resolution pecking order Output Devices On new shows the DMX outputs on the back of your console hardware are mapped to Palette Outputs 1 through 1024 You can configure the Output Devices by clicking the sign in the upper left hand pane of the display Selup Output Devices LEB Dii to 1024 2 Universes showhlet hone The options for Palette USB back of console are None 1 to 512 and 1 to 1024 You can also choose to output via Ethernet using the Pathport protocol J ust select how many XDMX universes you want to output to and configure your Pathport network to listen to those slots See Also Power Patch ShowNet One to One Patch Fade Resolution Strand Lighting p266 Palette OS v10 Setting Up Scrollers Palette uses profiles to define colour scrolls In this way scrolls can be named and even colours corresponding to the Gell colour can be displayed Scroller information apprears in the Live Screen beneath the control channel number Creating A Scroller String Enter the Patch Choose the Profile Key S10 Choose the Edit Profile Key M10 Select Add Profile S2 Select from the list a colour scroller and the number of frames that you want to use Give the Profile a name eg FOH Scrollers In the Label Column add a description of the colour in each frame Note if you enter the Colour Swatch number it can be displayed on the Live Screen eg a label
325. sition the Blue Box in any column of the desired row and press Delete See Also Venue Setup Macro Editor Date amp Time Strand Lighting p356 Palette OS v10 Browser Control Using any web browser on your network you can remotely control Palette This is accomplished by first authoring a customized web page or site and saving it to d MQWeb on Palette You can use any software to build your web site The examples installed with the software were simply published with MS Word The key to how it controls different functions in Palette lies in the syntax of the hyperlinks embedded in objects on your pages The URL of the links must use the HC script macros The easiest way to ensure the syntax is correct is to run Palette PC on the same machine where you are authoring the pages Right click on the virtual macro buttons and using the Macro Editor add the commands you want for each action and check their operation using the S4 TEST button Macro Editor 51 Available 52 Scnpt Line 1 HC CueListGof Main Ti ienen then else end i else end os clock 511 Command HC CuelitGol cue list H ueListHaltB ackl cue list HC CueListHaltficue list HC CusListRelease cue kst HC CueList amp ssert cue list HC CueListGotodndH alt cue list cue HC CueListGoto4ndE xecuteF ollove cue list c HC PowerPointFirst5 idelmachine_id b ASAs D SA Test _
326. ss HALT while a cue is in progress you can manually complete the cue by pulling the handle e You can reverse the direction of the current fade at any time before the handle reaches it s end point destination e If you start a cue by pressing GO then while the cue is in progress you move the handle that is equivalent to pressing HALT then manually completing the cue by pulling the handle e If you move the handle to Halt a cue but then decide you want the cue to complete in cue time you can simply press GO You will have to park the handle at one end or another to make it active again Strand Lighting p314 Palette OS v10 e If you Halt a cue for any reason and choose to complete it using the handle all times will be re scaled to the distance the handle has to travel with the greatest time in the cue being measured from top to bottom and all others scaled to that Wait times will be scaled too e t does not matter if the handle is at the top or bottom when you start to use it As long as it is at one end it will function as a manual crossfader moving you forward through the cue list e If you want to manually crossfade backwards through the cue list hold down SHIFT while pulling the handle You will notice that the pending cue in gray at the bottom of the bubble will have a lower number than the current cue in black text up top Top amp Bottom Slider Panel Lookmasters positive If you set up the Slider Panels
327. store them in the next You must look up the RGB values from the preceding cue to restore them Horizon Control s UAC adds a phantom attribute to RGB lights This intensity attribute does not appear any different from that of any other fixtures but it does control the overall brightness of the LED without affecting its Hue Another benefit of having this attribute used in cues is that if you ever do replace an RGB fixture with another more traditional type of fixture the Up Down dynamics of the light are already in the cues Color Space is a related but unique extension of this methodology and is discussed further below Color Spaces Complimentary Color Spaces are basically different methods used to describe the individual components that make up what the eye perceives as color None of them are right or wrong They are individual and each one has its purpose The selection of one over the other is primarily a matter of choice Most consoles only allow you to work in the color space native to the fixtures you are controlling That is if you have a white sourced light that has Cyan Magenta and Yellow dichroics place before it you would be working in the subtractive CMY Space If you have Red Green and Blue LED lights you would be working in the additive RGB Space Some consoles have neat color pickers that allow you to quickly grab desired colors but at the end of the day they will be fading from one triplet of CMY or RGB to another when
328. sure you want to clear all independent times for the eelected cues If you are sure you want to have all channels follow the times as set out in the Cue List columns press ENTER If you want to cancel the operation press UNDO Note o The S11 Clear Ind Time softkey is only visible when you are editing the Cue Time field in the cue list o If you specify Time in the Command Line when typing in specific attribute values these times will be entered in the TIMES display as well See Also Timing Part Cues Blue Box Command Line Syntax Follow Cues Fanning Strand Lighting p156 Palette OS v10 Effects Accomplishing complex programming task like marquees ballyhoos and rainbows is simple with Palette s effects There are many standard effects that are available at the press of a button or you can get a little deeper and create some stunning looks using the supplied simple math functions along with a host parameter controls Intensity Effect To add a new intensity effect select the desired channels and press S10 Effects If no other effects are running you will see a single option to Add New Intensity Effect If another effect is already running double press S10 Press ENTER then choose the desired effect from the list Once you have selected the effect the attributes of that effect are displayed on S1 through S4 Rate Scale Start Span xTimes 100 100 0 o 1x
329. t Preset Two Scene Master In either case A B or C D the faders will be the overall intensity masters for the A and B Scenes The B and D faders are inverted such that if you pull both handles together you will execute a dipless crossfade between the scenes i e Fader A is full when pushed up Fader B is full when pushed down PB Master Crossfader In this mode the left hand fader is the overall intensity master of the cue list assigned to this playback and the right hand fader is at will a manual cross fader The GO and Halt Back buttons function as normal but at any time you can grab the fade and manually complete it using this handle If you Halt the cue you can either press GO to complete it or use the handle to manually complete the transition to the next cue If you are sitting in a cue moving the handle will initiate the transition to the next cue as seen in the Playback Bubbles Strand Lighting p313 Palette OS v10 All levels going up and down will be affected All times will be re scaled to the distance the handle has to travel with the greatest time in the cue being measured using that distance and all others scaled to that Wait times will be scaled too At any point before reaching the end of travel you can move the handle backward to reverse the transition Once you reach the end of travel the next cue in the cue list will be pending You do not have to physically reload a cue or move the fader back t
330. t Timing from the cue This softkey is only visible when you are editing the Cue Time field e S12 will open the Cue Properties dialog box allowing you to add profiles to more than one timing parameter at a time Below are images of the available profiles Strand Lighting p212 Palette OS v10 Linear Profile 1 of Recorded Value i J J OO Mm m hJ mn AQ BL aL 100 w Through Fade This is the default profile If the profile icon does not appear in the time column this is the profile used snap At start w Of Recorded Value 14 SI o 20 AU zi aL 100 w Through Fade Using Snap at Start is equivalent to using a zero time the attribute goes to the recorded value as soon as the cue is executed Strand Lighting p213 Palette OS v10 Snap At End Of Recorded Value 2u AL Bi aL 100 o Through Fade E Using a fade time of 5 seconds with the Snap at End profile is equivalent to assigning a wait time of 5 seconds and a fade time of zero squares Law Of Recorded Value LT SI 0 ZU AQ ai ol 100 o Through Fade The Squares Law profile is a modified power consumption curve that produces a perceived linear output of a dimmed tungsten source This is generally only used when fading dimmed intensity values up Strand Lighting p214 Palette OS v10 Slow Start w Of Recorded Value 1 Dl DO m rd m AQ B0 w Through Fade mn E 100
331. t each channel has a different color 10 THRU 1 S4 Gobo Index 0 90 ENTER appears as and will enter a hard value of 90 degrees in all and Live 1 thru 10 q1 Index 0 to 90 and enters scaled gobo index values evenly spaced from 90 degrees to 90 degrees for channels 10 through 1 Note the reverse order 1 THRU 10 S8 Lens S3 Iris 50 ENTER appears as Live 1 thru 10 Iris Relative 50 1 through 10 s current live iris value 1 THRU 10 S1 Zoom 5 ENTER appears as Live 1 thru 10 Zoom Relative 5 through 10 by 5 degrees 1 THRU 10 S4 Gobo Index 90 90 ENTER appears as and adds 50 more iris to channels and zooms in channels 1 Live 1 thru 10 q1 Index 90 to 90 This syntax can be handy if ten channels are projecting corporate logos on the wall and you ve already lined them up so they are all square Typing this command line will adjust their relative positions such that the logos appear as an arc with the one on the left readable when you tilt your head to the left and similarly with the one on the extreme right as the one in the middle will remain square For more examples see the help topic called Command Line Syntax Remember the order in which you select channels or type in the com mand line is used by the TO syntax Fanning and Effects Also see Recording and Using Groups and Independent Timing on how to adjust timing on a per attri
332. t to play them back live See Also Hardware Setup Console Last Action Editing Hardware Setup A B C D Load Removing channels or attributes from a Cue or Look Channel s States Selecting and Setting Channels Select Softkeys Controlling Moving Lights Strand Lighting p165 Palette OS v10 Select Softkeys The S10 button on the main Softkey menu is Select Pressing this button changes the softkeys to the following Levels Levels Captured Atribute Oe Going Up Going Dr Attributes Family S1 If you want to select any channels that is on choose Levels gt 0 S2 Often you may run a cue and notice the lights that came on had something wrong with them i e wrong gobo or too bright etc To select these channels choose Levels Going Up S3 Similar to Levels Going Up you may want to select channels with Levels Going Down maybe to adjust their Independent Timing S4 Selecting channels that currently have Captured Attributes is an easy way to grab everything you re currently working with S5 Use Select Attributes if you want to capture the Live values of a channel that is currently being played back by either Cues or Looks This is often handy if you are doing surgery on cues Start by first selecting the channels and then press Select Attributes to open the dialog box Attribute Families 52 Hone 54 Intensity 58 Lens 55 Position 59 Special 56 Color 5
333. ted cue list using default times and no label Records Cue 1 in the selected cue list using a 6 second Cue Time Records Cue 1 in the selected cue list using a 6 second Up Time and a 10 second Down Time Changes Cue 10 s fade time to 6 seconds Blocks Cue 10 Moving Light Softkeys When moving lights are selected S5 through S9 are used to control the function of S1 through S4 For more information on this functionality check out the topic Controlling Moving Lights If you are in the Levels display and type in the command line pressing any of S5 through S9 after pressing the button will open the Apply Levels dialog box It will open to the Look tab but the Look Page selected will be the first Look page that uses the default attribute Strand Lighting p132 Palette OS v10 masking that best matches the button i e If you press S5 Pos the Apply Levels dialog box will be open to the Look Page called Position While in the Times display pressing these buttons puts their name on the command line for setting attribute family timing See Independent Timing for more details and examples 1 S5 Pos 3 ENTER Selects channel 1 and opens the Apply Levels Dialog box with the Position Look Page active Pressing 3 ENTER will apply Position 3 s values to channel 1 GROUP 1 S5 Pos 3 ENTER Puts all channels recorded in Look 1 to Position 3 1 S5 Pos S2 Pan 50 ENTER Select channel 1 a
334. tensity attribute See Also Selecting and Setting channels Using the Mouse to Select channels and Set Levels Controlling Moving Lights Independent Timing Show Options Look and Group Button Fanning Patch Strand Lighting p134 Palette OS v10 Channel Title The Channel Title function lets you assign text titles instead of a number for a channel on the channel grid display You may have a Center Title and or a Top and Bottom title You can also select the color in which any title is displayed 2 Cyc Cyc In the above example CYC is the Center title and 1 is the Top title for channel 22 To add channel titles select the channel s you wish to name Right click the mouse to display the right click menu and choose Channel Title to open the Channel Properties r erlt rir Note e If you want to label one channel at a time you can use the VIEW ENTER syntax e 2 or 3 characters are recommended for titles to maintain clarity on the monitor e If you want to restore the default number delete any text you put in the Center Title e If you want to reduce the font size preppend the text with leading spaces O Strand Lighting p135 Palette OS v10 Captured Attributes Any channel attributes that have been adjusted with the keypad or the mouse is considered to be captured The attributes of the channel are now controlled solely by the keypad or mouse or encoder and not by any Cues or Sub Masters
335. text into Notepad to save it if need be e Typing VIEW FIXTURE NUMBER ENTER allows you to change the labels of a channel to make your Channel Grid a little easier to understand Alternately you can select them and right click with the mouse and choose Channel Label e Right click on the divider to the left of the Channel Grid to set 20 vs 25 across e The Status Window will tell you what tool you will get if you touch the TOOLS button To change the tool press SHIFT and TOOLS and select a new tool using the SOFTKEYS e If you want to get back to the stage display while in the patch just press a SELECT key e Instead of using the command line to patch channels try using the Blue Box Select the first cell press EDIT type in the desired number then just keep pressing the DOWN ARROW rather than ENTER e Press S4 CONTROL PANEL to get to applications other than the Palette such as MS PAINT Internet Explorer and Media Player e Running your finger along the very right hand side of the track pad allows you to adjust the levels of the selected channels e Why print to paper Just e mail your PDF output right from your desk e There is a text editor built into Palette that allows you to take notes Get to it using S4 Strand Lighting p58 Palette OS v10 CONTROL PANEL e Use the WHEEL in dialog boxes to scroll through lists number boxes and combo boxes Holding down SHIFT while rolling the WHEEL will change numeric fields by
336. ther need to Re record the cue or Update it for the changes to stick Note that the and keys put the words Up and Down on the command line When controlling moving light attributes the key puts the word Relative on the command line whereby you can then enter positive or negative number to adjust multiple channels all having different values by the same amount See Moving Lights below Even after explicitly typing levels you can roll the Wheel to adjust levels as described above Release Levels Sneak If you want to release a channel and all of its attributes but don t want it to immediately return to its playback level use the command line syntax SHIFT For example 1 SHIFT 5 will release channel 1 and any of its captured attributes over 5 seconds See also Captured In and Release Time in Hardware Setup A B C D Also see Independent Timing for setting wait and fade times on a per attribute basis for recording Selecting Groups Group selection is used to select like channels It is a handy method of organizing your rig such that you can address large section of it quickly In Palette you don t record Groups you record Looks and use the Group Button to bring back the selection of channels used in that Look Check out the topic called Recording and Using Groups to see how to make Groups The Look Page that the Group button references is specified in Show Options See Mixing Groups and channels below too
337. through cue range is selected so pressing ENTER will close this dialog box using this option If you select this option the values will be recorded in the first cue in the range and they will track until the end of the range You can still un check S10 Edit Track Forward in the Record dialog box to not track beyond the end of the range even when using the S2 Confirmation option See Also Cue List Multiple Cue List Concept Selecting and Setting Channels Record Options Edits Track Forward Tracking A Note on Redundant Data Part Cues Strand Lighting p173 Palette OS v10 Record Options When recording Cues and Looks the Record dialog box has an option called Record Palette makes some pretty good guesses at the situations you are in and attempts to default to sensible configurations but sometimes it is desirable and very powerful to change the Record Option Understanding when and why is key Record Options for Recording Cues The options for recording cues are as follows Changed Attributes deltas This ts the default record option when recording cues When you are appending news cues to a cue list or even editing existing cues this is probably the option that will keep you out of trouble Since Palette is a tracking console and cues inherently only alter attributes that are changing in a cue recording the changes you ve just made normally makes sense If you re not familiar with the concept of tracking it is we
338. tic when using stock fixtures Different fixtures use different numbers and types of gobos Imagine that part of your rig has a Linear Breakup gobo that you use in Cue 1 Cue 2 then switches to a Medium Wavy Breakup The cues were written using a fixture that has a gobo wheel with nine gobos plus open and the image below shows how Cue 1 positions the wheel to Slot 1 and Cue 2 positions it to Slot 5 If you wanted to copy this effect to a separate part of your rig you may not be so lucky to Strand Lighting p31 Palette OS v10 find the same type of fixtures available for those cues If you use another model of fixture sensible substitutions and compromises must be made UAC can find similar gobos in the destination fixtures and use them when running the cues In this case Cue 1 would select Slot 4 and Cue 2 Slot 3 Conditional Abstract Attributes Automated lights are riddled with control parameters In earlier days many fixture manufacturers combined DMX channels to achieve separate effects in an attempt to prevent the fixture from consuming an outrageous number of channels A common practice is to use one channel as a mode channel to modify the behaviour of another This makes life difficult for the lighting programmer as he never knows what a handle will do when he uses it without first checking the state of the mode channels UAC eliminates this level of confusion by not presenting you with controls that are ineffective on one
339. timately relay the intent of the designer to the audience There is ample opportunity in this process for misinterpretations to muddy the waters of communication More recently and at a furious pace moving lights have entered the theatre and the multitude of options they provide has only complicated this process amplifying the opportunity for miscue of intent Not surprisingly there has been an increasing necessity to simplify the process of moving light control Unlike the hard and fast rules that have existed for decades a uniform language for designers and programmers to use for describing moving light behaviors has been non existent Moreover the method used to communicate to lights has never been Standardized The pioneering manufacturers of automated lighting equipment each implemented different philosophies of control More recently generic moving light console manufacturers have had issues with just covering the bases It has been a challenge for some to turn the lights on and make them move about In all respects these consoles were merely outputting numbers sometimes masqueraded by words to get the job done Now that automated lighting is no longer in its infancy it is time for a fresh new approach on intelligent lighting control Horizon Control has risen to that challenge and this document will explain how we have achieved that goal with our Universal Attribute Control Model See Also Controlling Moving Lights Strand Lighting
340. ting you console to a Local Area Network Printer which saves you from having to move the printer close to your console It also allows you to use any new printer you have successfully installed on your LAN without having to install drivers Click on the Printer button in the Palette Control Panel to access the Printer Tasks dialog box Printers and Faxes IL fol File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help P pi Jo Search yo Folders Hak Printers and Faxes Printer Tasks ie 4dd a printer AE See what s printing l Select printing preferences ey Pause printing isi Share this printer W Delete this printer i y Set printer properties Using the task list on the left select Add printer if you do not already have one installed You will follow a wizard that allows you to browse your network for shared printers You must make sure your system administrator has already shared a printer on the LAN and given you privileges to use it Once you have added a printer it will become the default printer check marked You can add more than one printer without issue you will just have to choose which one you want to print to if it is not the default printer Palette itself prints to PDF Adobe s Portable Document Format files These files can be saved to the hard drive or removable media like a USB stick and printed elsewhere if you don t have a Shared printer You can also e mail the PDFs right fro
341. to hold Look Pages see Slider Panels the left and right fader will control the level of the top and bottom panel s respective overall intensity Both sliders are configured so full output is at the top of the travel Top amp Bottom Slider Panel Lookmasters negative If you set up the Slider Panels to hold Look Pages see above the left and right fader will control the level of the top and bottom panel s respective overall intensity The right fader is inverted so that full output is achieved by positioning the fader at the bottom of travel This allows you to while moving both handles execute a crossfade between two separate pages of Sub Masters Slider Wing A amp B Lookmasters positive Similar setup to Top amp Bottom Slider Panel Lookmasters positive but using the first two wing panels Slider Wing A amp B Lookmasters negative Similar setup to Top amp Bottom Slider Panel Lookmasters negative but using the first two wing panels Captured In Time and Release Time If you are running a show live it is handy to have handles to control how long attributes get to their new level and how long they should take to return to their old levels once released This option sets up the left hand fader to control the IN TIME of any attribute you set using the command line or button array The scale is from zero to ten seconds top to bottom The right hand fader controls how long releases should take or what Is the sneak time S
342. to quickly get the Look s properties box e Press VIEW SELECT to get a Cue List s properties O Strand Lighting pl15 Palette OS v10 Main Keys Plus Minus At Full Out buttons PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX e FULL and OUT will set the level of selected channels without having to press ENTER The default Full value is set in Show Options ss use FULL to highlight the Wait time start of line and OUT to edit the Fade time end of line e Use FULL and OUT in dialog box edit boxes or combo boxes to take the value to its upper or lower limit e Use the key to select a range of channels or to specify WAIT FADE times in any time field e Use the key to remove channels from a range or to put the word TO on the command line for specifying ranges of levels or times across a series of channels e Use the BACKSPACE key to clear the command line and deselect the selected channels to reveal the default Soft Keys Strand Lighting pll6 Palette OS v10 Previous Next Buttons PRESS Release TO CLOSE THIS BOX NEXT PREV See Also Select Softkeys Strand Lighting Press the Next button to select the next channel Press the Prev button to select the last channel The QWERTY keyboard equivalent is TAB In dialog boxes o Press Next button to go to the next control o Press Prev button to go to the previous control p117 Palette OS v10 Number Buttons PRESS Release TO
343. to set individual times For example while in the Times display to set the Pan fade time to 3 seconds you could type 1 THRU 20 S2 Pan 3 ENTER which would appear as Fixture 1 thru 20 Pan Time 3 To achieve the fanned or spread out intensity times as shown in the image of the grid above you would type in the command line 1 THRU 20 0 5 ENTER which would appear as Fixture 1 thru 20 Intensity Time Oto 5 All moving light softkeys put text into the command line That is if you press S5 Position the text Position Time will appear which will set both the Pan and Tilt times If the individual attributes are currently not visible on S1 through S4 just continue pressing S5 through S 9 until you see the specific attributes you want control over When you have finished setting attributes and times record the new cue or update an existing cue Be sure to include the TIME filter in the Attributes masking Relatively Shifting Times from their Current Values Often when teching a show you may have just run a cue and want to add a second or two to a fade If you have a large number of channels already using staggered independent times such as in the image of the channel grid above adding one second to each channel s fade would be a monumental task The command line syntax to add a second to a range of channels using their current values as the starting place is 1 THRU 20 1 ENTER
344. to use the astronomical time clock features of Palette for triggering events automatically based on the Sunrise or Sunset you need to specify where your system is located S6 is normally the name of the city you are in or closest to The text in this field is arbitrary and can for example be The Science Museum It will automatically be filled in if you choose S7 to open the Change Location dialog box Strand Lighting p290 Palette OS v10 Select Location Eb North America United States 51 Description H States A C H States D H Boston MA F States FL F States Ml Gl Kaine Di Marland 52 Latitude 42 3567 Massachusetts Adams MA Arlington MA Attleboro MA lak a Boston MA odays Astronomical Events rLocation S3 Longitude 71 0569 Brockton MA Moringa Twilight 05 3210 Brookline MA Cambridge MA Sunrise 07 11 52 Chicopee MA East Boston hy sunset 16 33 20 Fall River MA Fi Evening Twilight 18 13 01 Fitchburg WA venng Hwag wW DK Fas Cancel Description S1 again is arbitrary You can enter anything you like in this field but it will be filled in with the selection you make with the mouse in the list to its left Location S2 and S3 will be filled in if you choose a city from the list but they also allow you to enter precises values for Latitude and Longitude if you know them Normally choosing a city that is within a twenty minute drive
345. tput to be a scaled value of what is displayed in the channel grid change this value to something other than 100 Valid numbers are between 1 and 200 For example if you have Channel 1 patched to Output 1 with a Proportional Patch of 50 when Channel 1 is Showing a value of 80 in the Channel Grid the Output will only be at a level of 40 Or if you have a Proportional Patch of 200 and Channel 1 is showing a value of 10 in the Channel Grid Strand Lighting p265 Palette OS v10 the Output will be set to 20 Note Output values will never exceed 100 Ki Limiting Outputs If you enter values for Output Min or Output Max you can limit the upper and or lower limits of an Output regardless of how the control channel wants to affect it The fade profile will be the same elsewhere in the fade path but as a limit is reached the value will cease to move Valid entries are between 0 and 100 A Profiling the Output Select from the combo box to change the Profile of the Output For example if you choose Inverted when the control channel reads 100 in the Channel Grid the Output will actually be at 0 The following profiles are available Linear Snap at Start Snap at End Zig Zag Squares Law Invert Slow Start Fast Start Fast End Damped Slow End Non Dim 35 Jump Start Parking an Output If you choose any of the Park options the Output will never change from that value regardless of where the control channel wants to
346. ts All the data they have is needed for the effect you were building If you intentionally Blocked a cue within the cue list be aware that it will no longer function as a Block Cue The syntax CUE 0 THRU 1000 S6 UNBLOCK works even if you don t have a Cue 0 or 1000 Blocking the Entire Cue List If you for some reason you want every attribute of every channel recorded in every cue i e a like a Preset Desk would have you can Block the entire cue list Select the Block Entire Cue List option from the right click menu Blocking an entire cue list can be counter productive and prohibits you from taking advantage of multiple cue lists and unlimited simultaneous fades within a single cue list Blocking the cue list will put hard values into every cue for every attribute If you then edit or insert a cue any changes made will not track through your show While editing cues if you don t want data to track when you update or insert new cues uncheck the Edits Track Forward check box in the Strand Lighting p224 Palette OS v10 Record dialog box Read the topic called A Note on Redundant Data for more information and examples See Also Tracking Edits Track Forward Record Options A Note on Redundant Data Strand Lighting p225 Palette OS v10 Cue Properties Many of a cue s properties can be set when you are recording the cue using the Record Cue dialog box You can easily edited timing properties using the Blue Box in the
347. tton down pops the current button up The Variable display has a column called Radio Group The text in these fields can be anything as long as they match the variables are in the same group You may have as many radio groups per Variable page as need be and buttons in each group will not affect buttons in other groups Leaving the Radio Group field blank is also valid i e any Radio Variable who has no text in this column will be part of the Same radio group To learn more about Macros and Variables check out the topics below See Also Macro Editor Variables Strand Lighting ps7 Palette OS v10 View Properties Pressing VIEW button or V displays the View dialog box When the dialog box opens the Fixture tab is active allowing you to use the syntax VIEW ENTER to see the properties of a specific channel This is the method in which you get to View and Edit the Properties of almost anything on the console You can navigate this box using the Softkeys and the display on the right hand side will change to allow you to further narrow your selection When on the console there are two very handy accelerators that speed you through this box You can press VIEW BUMP or VIEW SELECT to directly open the Properties box for either a Look or a Cue List You can also press VIEW CUE ENTER rather than VIEW S10 ENTER to quickly see the properties of a specific cue Similarly VIEW LOOK ENTER Sho
348. ttribute family to solo it Looks The easiest way to move or copy a recorded Look is press COPY BUMP BUMP You hardware must be setup to use Sub Masters As soon as you press the MOVE COPY button the dialog box will appear If you are using the Bump Buttons you don t need to even look at it All the correct information will be stuffed for you Don t forget the very quick LOAD BUMP and VIEW BUMP syntax When you want to copy or move a Look using the dialog box launch the command as described above The dialog box will open Press the LOOK button or S12 to display the Look page Strand Lighting p298 Palette OS v10 Ee Amber Fronts Blue Wash Pink Sides Blue Sides Podium 23 Blue Sides OA Wash g l 4 15 6 iy la Using the mouse or softkeys select the Source Look Page and Source Look then define a Destination Look Page and new Look Number The current Looks are displayed in the box on the right for reference You can overwrite an existing Look by choosing one from the list If you do you will be presented with this dialog box Overwrite Destination Look Destination Look is already recorded overwrite this look Ww Yes os No Attributes If you want you can filter out different information from the source look so it not used when creating the destination Look To do this press the Attributes button By default all check boxes will be checked You can
349. tween two columns and dragging left or right When you click down the cursor will change from an arrow to a double arrow like this H If you double click the column will size to fit the cell with the largest text See Also Playback Bubbles Cue List Properties Cue List Pointer Cue List Blue Box Strand Lighting p197 Palette OS v10 Cue List The Cue List is shown in the lower left pane of the display Palette allows you as many cue lists as you like All Cue Lists are managed from the Cue List Directory pane above the Cue List display The Cue List presents all recorded cues in numerical order with their cue attributes Each cue is Shown with a small lighting instrument symbol on the left These symbols indicate the status of the cues Note You can have 999 cues between two cue numbers i e 1 001 through 1 999 For more information on cue numbering check out the topic called Cue Number Scheme The cue currently running is shown with a green lighting symbol Band Enter The last active cue in the Cue List once it completes its fade is shown with a red lighting symbol Fil SUNNSe K Sunset BO Ext If you press Halt Back a yellow lighting symbol with the pause sign shows that the Cue List has paused the current fade Hause Out 5 Band 5 25 FF If more than one fade is active at once by auto follows or stepping on cues the additional overlapping fades are shown with yellow lighting symb
350. ty Manager tab Strand Lighting p385 Palette OS v10 a Te rector 3 Select the Driver Mode Settings Strand Lighting p386 Palette OS v10 Driver Mode Setting Oriver mode Multimoniiter i Mirror Hultimanitior W Auto m Support Modes VOSA 1280 by 1024 pixels True Color 32 bit BO Hz YAZ 1220 by 1024 pixels True Color 32 bit 60 Hz blas Resolution YGA YGAZ WGA VGA2 1 1 Change the Driver mode from Mirror to Multimonitor When you select OK you will be asked to re boot the system After the system boots choose the Screen Resolution option again from the Palette Control Panel as in Step 2 above Strand Lighting p387 Palette OS v10 Display Properties Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Drag the monitor icone to match the physical arrangement of your monitors Screen resolution Color quality Less 14 More Highest 22 bit 1280 by 1024 pixels i fin iD Use this device as the primary monitor Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor Troubleshoot 6 6 This time a second monitor marked 2 will be apparent Chose monitor 2 and check off Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor Choose the Screen Resolution that suites you and select OK Note You can click and drag the graphic representations of the monitors in the gray space s
351. u are running a show live it is handy to have handles to control how long attributes get to their new level and how long they should take to return to their old Strand Lighting p46 Palette OS v10 levels once released This option sets up the left hand fader to control the IN TIME of any attribute you set using the command line or button array The scale is from zero to ten seconds top to bottom The right hand fader controls how long releases should take or what is the sneak time Attributes set using times specified by the A B or C D faders are not transferred to the TIMES display i e you can t use these times to write cues with O Strand Lighting p47 Palette OS v10 Multiple Cue List Concept Multiple Cue Lists allow the console to operate completely separate and asynchronous cue lists simultaneously This is useful if you want to have an effect running on one cue list to keep it separate from the cues in the main cue list or if the console was controlling the lighting in a main theater as well as a space in the theater lobby an individual cue list for each space could be developed and operated at the same time to run completely different cues Note Palette supports an unlimited number of Cue Lists Using the Cue List Properties Cue Lists can be given different names as well as different colored backgrounds to help visually differentiate one from another Individual cue lists can be locked to prevent unauthorized modif
352. ual attributes within a family are forces to use the same time Independent Timing frees you of these limitations 1 1 Access the Independent Timing display by pressing SHIFT EDIT Alternately you can use the mouse to press the Times button ER Times The Channel Grid and Attribute Grid look very similar except that the numbers that appear are in seconds rather than degrees or hertz or RPMs 1 nA Se ast OE A E S a r Os o 3s E oss 11s EE 16s 1 88 AE E 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Pal 2 63 2 53 3 23 4 43 dfs 4 43 42s 4s 4_fs as Fixture Intensity Pan Tilt CTO 1 LSU00 Spot Us JS hs 2 LS000 Spot 03s JS hs 3 L3000 Spot 0 55 35 hs 4 WL3000 Spot 08s JS hs 2 2 To achieve the offset intensity times as shown above type in the command line 1 THRU 20 0 5 ENTER It will appear like this Fixture 1 thru 20 Intensity Time Oto 5 3 3 To set the Pan timing to 3 seconds type 1 THRU 20 S2 Pan 3 ENTER which would appear as Fixture 1 thru 20 Pan Time 3 Note Strand Lighting p45 Palette OS v10 All the moving light softkeys will stuff text onto the command line That is if you press S 5 Position the text Position Time will appear which will set both the Pan and Tilt times If the individual attributes are currently not visible on S1 through S4 just continue pressing S5 through S9 until you see the attributes you want control over 4 4
353. ue Box Strand Lighting p336 Palette OS v10 Macro Editor amp Scripts The Lua Language Advanced scripting in Palette uses the Lua programming language and can be constructed to execute very complex routines that access the Processor s operating system file system or other external non lighting related devices Lua is a full featured programming language that offers IF THEN ELSE type routines as well as user definable functions string manipulation and local and global variable storage If you just want to run cues or control your media player or Power Point you can but do not need to use Scripts Common tasks can be achieved using simple Macro Commands This topic can never cover the extensiveness of what Lua has to offer It is a very mature language that has a avid group of uses easily found on the web To describe Lua a little more succinctly we took this from www lua org Lua combines simple procedural syntax with powerful data description constructs based on associative arrays and extensible semantics Lua is dynamically typed interpreted from bytecodes and has automatic memory management with garbage collection making it ideal for configuration scripting and rapid prototyping The HC Library To make Lua capable of doing more than setting Variables in Palette we ve extended the language buy writing a specific Horizon Control library that talks directly with Palette s fade engine All variables and library calls in Lua a
354. under S1 Press the softkey until the desired command is highlighted then press S3 to insert it into the list on the right The Edit Macro dialog box will open Tip e You can double click on any Available macro to add it to the list e SHIFT S1 will move you backwards through the list of macros Edit Macro Macro CueListaof cue list Description Perform a Go on the specified cue list F1 Comment E S2 Arguments Argument Yalue cue list hel ary w OK a Cancel Any arguments parameters of the command will be listed Double click on the Value column to set an appropriate value then select OK Strand Lighting p335 Palette OS v10 a Commard Comment Command f Ve aieac CueLisiGol Main Cue List Advance to next cue ees tg F11 went y Tr AeL easel CL Tia j A CT pe a pet huelt ssel CE DBO PoweaePoantFratS lide Powe PomtLasi5 lide PowerPomtPrevSilide FixtureCheckFomard FixtureCheckB ack You can Insert as many individual commands as you like for each macro and order them by selecting their line and use S5 and S6 to move them Up and Down in the list Hint O o If you enter text in the Status String S8 it will be written to the Uber Status when the macro Is run O o Highlight any undesired command and press S7 to Delete it See Also Macro Editor Scripts User Interface Macros Macro Buttons Time Events Variables Triggers Cue Properties Bl
355. unis 3 3 Make the changes required by Selecting Channels and if necessary Releasing them to remove them from the cue 4 Press UPDT or U or Strand Lighting pls Palette OS v10 5 When you move the Blue Box a dialog box will ask you if you want to save changes Click Yes to keep the changes No to discard them e You can return to LIVE at any time when working in BLIND When you return to BLIND everything will be just as you left it You can go back and forward between Live and Blind as often as you like e You can use Load to load multiple things to combine idea The first item loaded the one Shown in the Loaded Status Bubble will be updated when you press UPDT See Also Selecting and Setting Channels Edits Track Forward Strand Lighting p182 Palette OS v10 Load Loading Cues and Sub Masters is the most effective method of examining changing and updating the stored data Updating a Cue from the LIVE Display using Load 1 Select E om the channel grid Tool Bar 2 Press LOAD enter a cue number The QWERTY equivalent to hitting LOAD is SHIFT B Load is Shift Blind 1 Warners 2 Preset 3 House to Halt 4 Barnd Note The Cue Number box is active when you enter this dialog If you roll the wheel you can scroll through the list to select a cue The Cue Number is pre stuffed with the cue number where the Blue Box was sitting so it is fastest to move the Blue Box t
356. use the mouse to double click on the left most cell in the Cue List you will execute a GOTO on that cue The fades on channels involved in the GOTO will happen in the time you set here Strand Lighting p287 Palette OS v10 44 Enter Stage L a a i L g5 Alternately you can move the Blue Box to this cell and press EDIT or INSERT on the QWERTY keyboard s2 Cue List Release Time When your Release a Playback the values have to fade to some other value either their default value or the value set by some other cue list as determined by the Fade Resolution The Cue List Release Time determines that fade time s3 Cue List Step Time If you are running rehearsals you may just want to step from cue to cue ignoring the recorded times You have the option to set the time you step through cues using Step Fwd Step Back keys or and s4 Cue List Back Time This time is used when you press SHIFT BACK or the Go Back toolbar button A move backwards through the cue list using cue time ss Default Cue Time Use this text box to set the Default Cue Time The default time is stuffed into the Record dialog box each time new cues are written You can easily change individual cue times in the Record dialog box when you are writing them or just as easily afterwards using the Blue Box se Loop Go Action Use the combo box to select the action to be taken when the GO button is hit during a loop
357. useful places to temporally stuff a group of channels that you re currently working with If you know you will be coming back time and time again to a selection of channels press SELECT SHIFT STORE Then when you want to get them back press SELECT RECALL S9 Typing a selection in the Command Line and pressing Odds will only select the odd numbered channels For example if you type 1 THRU 10 SELECT ODD you will end up with 1 3 5 7 9 selected If no channels are selected and you select Odd all the odd Captured channels will be selected If nothing is captured or selected pressing Select Odd will do nothing S10 Even works exactly like Odd does S11 If you have a number of channels Captured and some of them are Selected choosing Invert will make the non selected Captured channel selected S12 While you are working on an idea you may be juggling a number of different channels or channel groups The Select Previous button allows you to quickly grab the channels you were working with just before the ones you are working with now Making adjustments then pressing this button then making adjustments and repeating will switch you between the last two selection sets ad infinitum Alternately you can press and hold S12 to get a pop up list of the last ten selections When you get this list S1 through S10 become the different selections You can also use the mouse the arrow keys or the whee
358. wNet XDMX Start values for each console to avoid any conflicts Where more than one Universe is being sent over ShowNet the console can be configured to send the data over mutliple XDMX start addresses This is done by entering the XDMX start as a comma separated list The following example sends the first three universes from the Patch over the network Setup E Output Devices JSE DMX 1 to 1024 2 Jniyerses ShowNet to 1556 35 Untwerses L ShowNet DMs Start 1 5 7 The XDMX settings then post the data on the Network as follows Output Range XDMX ShowNet NetSlot Start 1 512 1 1 512 513 1024 5 2049 2560 1025 1536 7 3073 3584 If you are using SN110 series nodes their configuration may be set by using Internet Explorer which can be accessed using the Control Panel To configure your ShowNet nodes enter the IP address of the node you want to change Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools 4H L i Address http 192 168 0 71 A web page will appear where you can then change the various parameters Strand Lighting p302 Palette OS v10 Fort 1 Type Label Monitor O 0fF 1 512 Start End NetStot Priority HTP Bz i IL_ CIE Port 2 Type Label REPORTER OmrRmtl See Also Patch Pathport O p303 Strand Lighting Palette OS v10 Pathport Palette can talk directly to any number of Pathport Output Nodes installed in your venue using y
359. when changing 8 bit intensities it will change in decimal steps from O to 255 but in other cases it may be different It is also important to know the order in which you select channels is preserved when recording group which makes a big difference for Fanning and Effects Setting Levels You can set levels before or after you press ENTER By default Intensity Levels are depicted in percent They can also be entered in Decimal if you precede the value by the decimal point 1 55 ENTER 1 50 ENTER 1 5 ENTER 1 05 ENTER 1 127 ENTER 1 FULL ENTER 1 FULL 1 1 FULL 1 OUT 1 SHIFT THRU 10 5 ENTER 1 50 ENTER 1 THRU 10 5 ENTER 1 UP 1 THRU 10 DOWN 1 50 5 ENTER 1 THRU 10 1 10 ENTER 1 THRU 10 1 10 10 Strand Lighting Selects channel 1 and sets it to 55 Selects channel 1 and sets it to 50 Selects channel 1 and sets it to 50 Note after typing an you don t need the zero in 50 Selects channel 1 and sets it to 5 Selects channel 1 and sets it to 50 or 127 Decimal Note the key puts the word Decimal on the command line Selects channel 1 and sets it to 100 Selects channel 1 and sets it to 100 Selects channel 1 and sets it to 100 Selects channel 1 and sets it to 100 Selects channel 1 and sets
360. windows com an ay Update Now The tine has been successfully synchronized with time windows com on 4 26 2004 at 3 16 PM Next synchronization 5 5 2004 at 3 16 PM Synchronization can occur only when your computer is connected to the Internet Learn more about time synchronization in Help and Support Center cancel Note To make Time Zones Changes take effect in the Status Bubbles you will have to restart Palette Keyboard Input Language If you need to adjust the keyboard language to access special characters CTRL Click on this icon in the Control Panel to open the Regional and Language Options Strand Lighting p380 Palette OS v10 Regional and Language Options Regional Options Languages Advanced Text services and input languages To view or change the languages and methods you can use to enter text click Details Details Supplemental language support Most languages are installed by detault To install additional languages select the appropriate check box below Install files for complex script and ight todeft languages including Thai _ Install files for East Asian languages In the Languages tab click on the Details button to open the Text Services and Input Languages Strand Lighting p381 Palette OS v10 Text Services and Input Languages Settings Advanced Detault input language Select one of the installed input languages
361. would be pointless The entire wheel is spinning through the light path so you will see them all not one at a time The controls exposed to the user change to reflect this new altered state aa n Pwd a jf gl Mode spin Fwd 10RPM index The Wheel Mode encoder now shows that the entire gobo wheel is Spinning Forward The second encoder now allows you to set the speed at which the wheel spins in Revolutions per Minute The third encoder shows that the indexing motor is held steady but it is pointless to say at what angle it is holding it as all gobos are rotating in a planetary system through the light path The four encoder is not used in this case If you then adjust the third encoder G1 Mode from Index to Rot CW the fourth encoder becomes available to adjust the speed of the rotation giWwWhMd gl Mode glSpee ed __ Spin Fwd _ L 10 RPM ___ __Rot CV ee If the first encoder is changed back to Select the second through fourth encoders will return to their previous function eee gl Select gi Mode I gl Index l ind 15 _ Glacier This is where the Universal Attribute Control Model meets the Tracking benefits of this console as the Index value of 15 degrees was not destroyed as it would have been on a pure DMX desk because typically they shared the same DMX control channel The 15 degrees has just not been visible when it was not applicable Nudging the second encoder from Index to Rotate C
362. ws you the properties of the specified Look see also Channel Title Cue List Properties Cue Properties Sub Master Pages Looks Strand Lighting pss Palette OS v10 mRemote Video If you install the Palette PC software on your personal computer available from www strandlighting com one of the START Menu options is to connect using the Local Area Network to a console to monitor your show Once you launch the application using this shortcut you will be presented with the Remote Video Connection dialog box Remote Video Connection Marquee Host 192 168 1 99 oK ext don t the know the IP address of your console hover over the Network button in the Palette Control Panel The tooltip will show you the current IP address By default your Palette allows five remote connections The remote video connection does not allow you to Select or alter Channels or change Cue Properties but it does allow you to independently view cues in Blind just by moving the Blue Box and you can display any cue list you wish to see which cues are active The remote can chose to display Sub Masters Macro Buttons Tracksheets and position the splitters in any locations they want Most toolbars and Softkeys are disabled Strand Lighting p89 Palette OS v10 Y Marquee Show Thommy RGB mgs lt Remote Video 197 168 0 3 aCe one Ne Temani 10 11 1z 1 weve a 2 falling _ r Time Down Time Wave ACTOS falling down l blin
363. x s Files of Type combo box can be changed to show you backup files Strand Lighting p294 Palette OS v10 Move and Copy The Move and Copy commands are identical and work for Cues Looks and Channels You can only move copy Cues to Cues Looks to Looks and Channels to Channels If you want to copy the contents of a Cue into a Look the best way to do that is to Load the Cue then Record the Look If you want to copy the contents of a Look into a Cue the best way to do that is to type LOOK ENTER REC ENTER Note The Record dialog box defaults to recording cues but you can type LOOK ENTER REC CUE ENTER for completeness Also see other command line methods in the topic on Looks and check out the Record Cue option called Exclude Sub Masters Copy To Copy press To Move press and hold while pressing On the QWERTY keyboard commands are launched with the C and M keys Channels The default tab for Move and Copy is the Channel tab One of the most powerful features of Palette as far as moving lights is concerned is the Abstract Control Model This basically means that all moving lights regardless of who manufactured them and what protocol they are using are controlled the same way in Palette Not only do they all have similar control handles but the data that is stored in the cues is not raw DMX levels as traditional desk do It is made up of real world terms such as 15 Degrees
364. you brought it up it would be on the cyc in blue 4 Cue 10 uses the light to Down Stage Center the color is Open White and it is irised in on an actor s head What happens when you are building this sequence is that you move along as expected from Cues 1 through 9 When building Cue 10 the first thing you probably do is grab Channel A bring up it up and see it on the cyc Then you say Hey what is that doing there Then you remember Oh ya that is where it was last But that is not where want it now You then move it as described in Step 4 above Now if you didn t have MIB and you ran this sequence one of two things would happen A You sit happily in Cue 9 feeling very proud of yourself then press Go for Cue 10 and say Ewph what a mess as the light moves from the cyc clears its color and irises in on the actor s head B You are clever and write a cue 9 5 that sets up all the parameters of Channel A that you steal from Cue 10 but you leave out the intensity and just bring that up in Cue 10 The issue with item B above is that if you ever decide to alter Cue 10 maybe because the actor moves they do that then you also have to update Cue 9 5 This is dull With MIB what happens is this 1 Channel A is on the cyc in blue in Cue 1 2 It tracks for the next 4 cues then fades out intensity only in Cue 5 3 It does nothing for Cues 6 through 9 4 Once Cue 9 is complete a Move In Black occurs to setup u
365. you have not already adjusted the Level in the Levels display the attribute will get a delta on its level value too The reverse is not true That is just because you are adjusting an attribute value it does not mean that you will see deltas in the Times display If you do have deltas in both the Levels display and the Times display you can still filter either out TIME during record update move and copy commands using the Attribute Filtering button Removing Independent Timing from an Attribute In some instances you may want to remove the Independent Timing from an attribute While in the Times display the S11 softkey is Cue Time Strand Lighting p155 Palette OS v10 The syntax above suggests you enter a number after using the key for setting Intensity times or any of S1 through S9 to set other moving light attributes If you want to remove the independent time that is already in place press S11 Cue Time ENTER Tip If you want to remove all the independent timing for a specific channel press S10 All Time S11 Cue Time ENTER Clearing All Independent Timing from a Cue If a cue has channels using Independent Timing the Cue Time field will have a clock icon in it Cue Label Cue Time Down Time a i Housetohalf 3 2 6 If you move the Blue Box to this field and press EDIT S11 Clear Ind Time will to remove all Independent Timing in the cue A confirmation dialog box will appear re vou
366. yte Group LLC

Palette OS Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents